Home

Access Service Tariff

1. Interface Groups 1 and 2 Interface Group 6 Interface Group 9 NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE NR62U FN72U 152 81 NR62V FN72V 148 91 NR62W FN72W 148 91 NR62X FN72X 12 39 NR62Y FN72Y 8 50 NR62Z FN72Z 8 50 NR6RF FN7RF 156 39 NR6RG FN7RG 144 30 NR6RH FN7RH 143 26 NR6RJ FN7RJ 27 09 NR6RK FN7RK 15 71 NR6RL FN7RL 14 86 T T T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 145 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 7 25 2002 Effective 8 15 2002 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT D 5 Cont d NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE c FGD Service with SS7 out of band signaling to FGD Service with SS7 out of band signaling and Clear Channel Capability e Per first trunk Interface Group 6 NR6RT FN7RT 206 14 Interface Group 9 NR6RU FN7RU 204 66 e Per each additional trunk Interface Group 6 NR6RV FN7RV 22 44 Interface Group 9 NR6RW FN7RW 21 23 d Rollover Charges e Rollover of existing Voice Grade Service onto a multiplexed DS1 Service per service termination NR6RE FN7RE 174 66 e Rollover of existing DS1 Service onto a multiplexed DS3 Service per DS1 Service termination affected NR6R1 FN7R1 275 48 T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 146 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 7 25 2002 Effective 8 15 2002 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND C
2. T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 57 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Access Transport Parameter ATP The term Access Transport Parameter denotes the SS7 Out of Band Signaling parameter which provides the automatic transmission of information from the originating calling location through the Common Channel Signaling Network Information supplied using ATP may consist of one or more of the following Called Party Subaddress Calling Party Subaddress High and Low Layer Compatibility and Compatibility Checking by the called party s equipment Advanced Communications Services ACS Network The term Advanced Communications Services Network denotes the commonly shared geographically distributed arrangement of interoperating advanced communications components Together these components provide advanced communications services and or functionalities of a specified type to multiple customers Agent The term Agent denotes any individual corporation or other entity who an end user or location provider designates to act on its behalf before the Company whether in conjunction with the selection of a primary IC or in conjunction with other matters pertaining to the end user s or location provider s service Aggregator The term Aggregator denotes any individual partnership association joint stock
3. 11 1 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 11 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 11 SPECIAL FACILITIES ROUTING OF ACCESS SERVICES DESCRIPTION The services provided under this Tariff are provided over such routes and facilities as the Company may elect Special Facilities Routing is involved when in order to comply with requirements specified by the customer the Company provides Switched Access Service or Federal Government Specialized Service or Arrangements in a manner which includes one or more of the following conditions Diversity Two or more services must be provided over not more than two different physical routes Avoidance A service must be provided on a route which avoids specified geographical locations Cable Only Facilities Certain Voice Grade services are provided on Cable Only Facilities to meet the particular needs of a customer Service is provided subject to the availability of Cable Only Facilities In the event of service failure restoration will be made through the use of any available facilities as selected by the Company Avoidance and Diversity are available on Switched Access Service as set forth in Section 6 preceding Cable Only Facilities are available for Switched Access Service as set forth in Section preceding In order to avoid the compromise of special routing information the Company will provide the required routing info
4. In the event of a billing dispute the customer must submit a documented claim for the disputed amount If the claim is submitted within 90 days of the payment due date any interest credits due the customer upon resolution of the dispute shall be calculated from the bill payment date If the customer submits a claim for the disputed amount more than 90 days from the payment due date any interest credits due the customer upon resolution of the dispute shall be calculated from the later of the date the claim was submitted or the bill payment date Any undisputed amounts withheld by the customer in conjunction with disputed amounts withheld shall be subject to the late payment penalty as set forth in b preceding The Company will resolve the dispute and assess interest credits or penalties to the customer as follows e If the dispute is resolved in favor of the Company and the customer has paid the disputed amount on or before the payment due date no interest credits or penalties will apply e If the dispute is resolved in favor of the Company and the customer has withheld the disputed amount any payments withheld pending settlement of the dispute shall be subject to the late payment penalty as set forth in b preceding e If the dispute is resolved in favor of the customer and the customer has withheld the disputed amount no interest credits or penalties will apply Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 39 State o
5. T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 45 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 3 FEATURE GROUP C FGC A Description Cont d 9 The Company will provide 1 interLATA sent paid access from pay telephones utilizing Smart Public Access Lines via FGC for calls dialed as 1 and or 101XXXX 1 in the following manner 1 interLATA sent paid access from pay telephones utilizing Basic Public Access Lines Service shall be provided by FGD a Smart Public Access Line PAL For traffic originating from a Smart PAL the customer to whom such calls are routed shall order FGC trunks from end offices to the customer s premises via direct trunks or via Operator Access Tandems with the Operator Trunk Full Feature type of transport termination as set forth in 6 3 2 following The trunks must be dedicated and the customer shall specify the number of trunks required at each end office from which the customer will receive 1 sent paid traffic The customer is responsible for providing all other operator services signaling capabilities as described in the Operator Services Systems Generic Requirements OSSGR Technical Reference FR 271 and the LATA Switching Systems Generic Requirements LSSGR Technical Reference FR 64 When the Company provides Operator Services Signaling OSS between an Oper
6. The customer provided POM factor will apply to CCSAC ISUP Call Set up requests only and will be used until the customer reports a different projected POM factor based on the following guidelines a The customer may update the POM factor via jurisdictional report on a quarterly basis The customer shall report the POM factor for each LATA The customer shall forward to the Company a revised report to be received no later than fourteen 14 days after the first of January April July and October The revised report shall show the POM factor for the most current data available This data shall consist of at least three 3 and no more than twelve 12 consecutive months of data ending no more than seventy five 75 days earlier than the date the report is due e g for the report due January 15th the last month of data should be no earlier than October 31 The updated POM factor shall be based on actual records defined as either call detail records call message counts including incomplete attempts or signaling message records The POM factor may be based on a statistically valid sample The POM factor reported in January April July and October will be effective on the bill date of each such month and will serve as the basis for subsequent monthly billing pending the receipt of a revised POM report If the customer requests the Company to provide data per the terms of 2 3 10 B 6 preceding the data provided by the Company will comply with th
7. The maximum Attenuation Distortion in the 404 to 2804 Hz frequency band relative to the loss at 1004 Hz is 1 5 dB to 3 5 dB T 3 C Message Noise The maximum C Message Noise for the transmission path at the IAL miles listed T is less than or equal to TAL MILEAGE LIMITS C MESSAGE NOISE Less than 50 33 dBrncO T 51 to 100 35 dBrncO T 101 to 200 37 dBrncO 201 to 400 40 dBrncO 401 to 1000 42 dBrncO Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 80 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS A Transmission Type Al Performance Cont d 4 C Notched Noise The maximum C Notched Noise measured with 16 dBm0 holding tone applied is less than or equal to 45 dBrnc0 5 Echo Control Echo Control identified as Equal Level Echo Path Loss and expressed as Echo Return Loss ERL and Singing Return Loss SRL is equal to or greater than the following MEASURED AT THE POT ERL SRL e POT to End Office Direct N A N A e POT to Access Tandem 25 dB 18 dB e POT to End Office via Access Tandem 16 dB 11 dB T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 81 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS Con
8. ac AML ANI APP AS ASG ASR AT ATP AT amp T BD B8ZS BHMC BP CAROT CCC CCL CCSAC CCSN CI CIC CMRS CO COCTX Cont d CP CPE Ctx DA dB dBm dBm0 dBrn dBrnc dBrncO dBv dBvL Alternating current Actual Measured Loss Automatic Number Identification Application Date Access Service Access Service Group Access Service Request Access Tandem Access Transport Parameter American Telephone and Telegraph Company Business Day Bipolar with Eight Zero Substitution Busy Hour Minutes of Capacity Billing Percentage Centralized Automatic Reporting on Trunks Clear Channel Capability Carrier Common Line Common Channel Signaling Access Capability Common Channel Signaling Network Channel Interface Carrier Identification Code Commercial Mobile Radio Service Central Office Central Office Centrex Continued Customer s Premises Customer Provided Equipment Centrex Directory Assistance Decibel Decibel milliwatt Decibel reference to one milliwatt relative to zero level Decibel Reference Noise Decibel Reference Noise C Message Weighting Decibel Reference Noise C Message Weighted 0 Decibel s relative to 1 volt reference Decibel s relating to 1 volt reference M Material moved to Page 24 N N N N N D N N N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 24 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 12 15 2008 Effective 2 10 200
9. e Each additional line or trunk NR6SL FN7SL 10 43 c Switched Access Service per line or trunk associated with Interface Group 9 e First line or trunk NR6SJ FN7SJ 296 17 e Each additional line or trunk NR6SM FN7SM 9 10 1 This charge is in addition to the Entrance Facility charge T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 142 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 7 25 2002 Effective 8 15 2002 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT D Nonrecurring Charges Cont d 4 Moves to a Different Serving Wire Center NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE a Switched Access Service per line or trunk associated with Interface Groups 1 and 2 e First line or trunk NR6DG FN7DG 369 87 e Each additional line or trunk NR6DK FN7DK 49 14 b Switched Access Service per line or trunk associated with Interface Group 6 e First line or trunk NR6DH FN7DH 335 00 e Each additional line or trunk NR6DL FN7DL 12 16 c Switched Access Service per line or trunk associated with Interface Group 9 e First line or trunk NR6DJ FN7DJ 332 65 e Each additional line or trunk NR6DM FN7DM 9 68 T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 143 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 7 25 2002 Effective 8 15 2002 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT D Nonrecurring Charges Cont
10. 17 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 18 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 18 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 19 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 19 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN SUBJECT PAGE CCSAC Rate Categories and Applications ceceesceeeseceeseeeeesteeeenaeeees 6 Common Channel Signaling Access Capability CCSAC seese 2 General Desctption wivaicasiayevciseseversivasavecaiscovadeadbasadeaiusesesaseseaasdigesndcansesecesye 1 LIDB Rate Categories and Applications cesceeeeececeeeeeceeeeeceteeeeeneeeees 8 Line Information Data Base LIDB ccc cceccccceccceeeeeesscsecececeeeenenens 5 Network Management s s c cscscqteeasaeaybeacsavegtavcannccauaesdecastungtvavaassatodagasseeteesses 8 Ordering Service Provisioning and Performance Requirements 8 R tes and Chartes orea e r utes supntigdeagepabes seas ae a laea eta Eih 19 Repott ReguirementS eneren i a E ai R 8 Service Applhicati Nns soemoer eani es A EAE a EE EE aE 17 Service Descriptio Msingi taera apsk toniet 2 Testis Requirements vey scgsccccsde peers caagsvey
11. 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B Jurisdictional Requirements Cont d 5 LIDB When a customer orders LIDB Service the customer shall state in its order the projected PIU factor in a whole number i e a number of 0 100 The Company will designate the number obtained by subtracting the projected interstate percentage furnished by the customer from 100 as the projected intrastate percentage of use The projected PIU factor is used by the Company to apportion the LIDB Access Query and LIDB Validation Query percentage of use between interstate and intrastate until a subsequent order is received LIDB jurisdiction may be changed by service order without charge as described in 6 7 1 following A jurisdictional report as described in C following will not be required 6 CCSAC When a customer initially orders CCSAC Service in a LATA the customer shall state in its order a PIU factor in a whole number i e a number of 0 100 The customer shall also state in its order a POM factor in a whole number i e a number of 0 100 Other messages are defined as ISUP Call Set up requests associated with local Extended Area Service EAS and intraMTA the Local Exchange Company portion of jointly provided Switched Access and Company originated toll calling M Upon request from the customer the Company will provide to the customer N within 30 days the Company originated CCSAC ISUP Call Set Up re
12. CST3 FGB FGC or FGD Service Both the low band and high band tests must meet the SRL limits specified The ERL and SRL are greater than or equal to the following TAL MEASURED AT THE POT 4 WIRE ERL e POT to End Office Direct 16 dB e POT to Access Tandem 21 dB e POT to EO via Access Tandem 16 dB TAL MEASURED AT THE POT 2 WIRE ERL e POT to End Office Direct 13 dB e POT to Access Tandem N A e POT to EO via Access Tandem 13 dB M Material moved to Page 87 SECTION 6 Release 2 Effective 11 30 2000 SRL 11 dB 18 dB 11 dB SRL 6 dB N A 6 dB N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 86 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION PARAMETER LIMITS Cont d D Transmission Type C Performance T M Transmission Type C performance is provided with the following IAL for FGA Service T 1 Loss Deviation The maximum Loss Deviation of the 1004 Hz loss relative to the Expected Measured Loss EML at 1004 Hz dB is 3 0 dB T 2 Attenuation Distortion The maximum Attenuation Distortion in the 404 to 2804 Hz frequency band relative to loss at 1004 Hz is 2 0 dB to 5 5 dB 3 C Message Noise The maximum C Message Noise for the transmission path at the IAL miles listed T is less than or equal to IAL MILEAGE LIMITS C MESSAGE NOISE T Less than 50
13. KK XOX OX RV 2RV3 0 RV 2RV3 T CCS 2N02 1 Company equipment is generally required at the customer s premises Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 21 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A 3 e Cont d COMPANY INTERFACE SWITCH NCI SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GROUP SUPERVISORY CODE FGA FGB FGC FGD 2 LO GO 4SF2 X LO 4LS2 X GO 4GS2 X RV EA EB EC 4SF2 RV EA EB EC 6EA2 E 1 RV EA EB EC 6EA2 M 1 RV EA EB EC EB2 E 1 RV EA EB EC EB2 M i EA EB EC 8EC2 M 1 RV 4ARV2 0 RV ARV2 T CCS 4N02 DS PI KX lt OX OX OX DS KKK OX OX OX OX OX DS KKK OX OX OX OX 1 Company equipment is generally required at the customer s premises Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A 3 e Cont d COMPANY INTERFACE SWITCH NCI GROUP SUPERVISORY CODE 6 LO GO LO GO LO GO RV EA EB EC RV EA EB EC RV EA EB EC CCS CCS CCS 9 LO GO LO GO RV EA EB EC RV EA EB EC CCS CCS SECTION 6 Release 2 Effective 11 30 2000 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FGA FGB 4DS9 15 1 4DS9 15L 1 4DS9 15S 1 4DS9 15 1 4DS9 15L 1 4DS9 15S 1 4DS9 15 4DS9 15B 2 4DS9 15S 2 4DS6 44 1 2FCF 3 4DS6 44 2FCF 3 4DS6 44 2FCF 3 X X X FGC FGD X X X X X X X X X X
14. T T 6 2 6 2 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 41 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP B FGB A Description Cont d 9 When all FGB switching arrangements are discontinued at an end office and or in a LATA an intercept announcement is provided This arrangement provides for a limited period of time an announcement that the service associated with the number dialed has been disconnected B Optional Features 1 Switched Transport Optional Features e Customer Specification of Switched Transport Termination e Supervisory Signaling e Customer Specified Entry Switch Receive Level Common Switching Optional Features K e Automatic Number Identification e Upto 7 digit Outpulsing of Access Digits to customer e Alternate Traffic Routing e WATS Access Service WATS Another feature Billed Number Screening which may be available in connection with FGB is provided under the Company s Exchange and Network Services Tariff 6 2 6 2 2 C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 42 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP B FGB Cont d Transmission Performance FGB is provided with Transmission Type
15. Tariff SECTION 2 Page 66 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Effective 4 Wire The term Effective 4 Wire denotes a condition which permits the simultaneous independent transmission of information in both directions over a channel The method of implementing effective 4 wire transmission is at the discretion of the Company physical time domain frequency domain separation or echo cancellation techniques Effective 4 wire channels may be terminated with a 2 wire interface at the customer s premises However when terminated 2 wire simultaneous independent transmission cannot be supported because the two wire interface combines the transmission paths into a single path 800 Data Base Access Service The term 800 Data Base Access Service denotes a toll free originating Trunkside Access Service when the 8XX Service Access Code i e 800 822 833 844 855 866 877 or 888 as available is used The term 8XX is used interchangeably with 800 Data Base Access Service throughout this Tariff to describe this service 8XX Service Provider The term 8XX Service Provider denotes a telecommunications company including Exchange and Interexchange Carriers that offer 8XX Service to subscribers End Office Switch The term End Office Switch denotes a local Company switching system where Telephone Exchange Service customer station loops are t
16. X X X X X X X X X X X 1 Company equipment is generally required at the customer s premises 2 Required with Clear Channel Capability 3 Available when Switched Access Services are ordered in conjunction with DS3 optical N N D D T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 23 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES Switched Transport Cont d 4 Optional Features Where transmission facilities permit the Company will at the option of the customer provide the following Switched Transport optional features as set forth in 6 8 following a POT Supervisory Signaling Arrangements Where the transmission parameters permit and where signaling conversion is required by the customer to meet its signaling capability the customer may order a POT supervisory signaling arrangement for each transmission path Available supervisory signaling arrangements are set forth in 3 preceding Technical specifications for supervisory signaling are delineated in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE Customer Specified Entry Switch Receive Level This feature allows the customer to specify the receive transmission level at the first point of switching The range of transmission levels which may be specified is described in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE This feature is available with Interface Groups 2 6
17. e Cut Through e Service Class Routing e Alternate Traffic Routing e Trunk Access Limitation e SWITCHNET 56 Service e WATS Access Service WATS e 950 on FGD e SS7 Out of Band Signaling e Clear Channel Capability D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 54 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 4 FEATURE GROUP D FGD B Optional Features Cont d 3 Transport Termination Optional Features e Operator Trunks i e Coin Non Coin and Combined Coin and Non Coin e Operator Trunk Full Feature C Transmission Performance FGD is provided with either Transmission Type Al or Type B1 performance as follows e When routed directly to the end office Transmission Type B1 is provided e When routed to an access tandem only Transmission Type A1 is provided for both the POT to access tandem and access tandem to end office trunks e Overall POT to end office requirements for FGD provide Transmission Type B1 performance whether routed directly with Transmission Type B1 or via an access tandem with Transmission Type A1 Transmission Type B1 performance is provided with Interface Group 1 2 6 and 9 as available Transmission Type Al performance is provided with Interface Groups 2 6 and 9 as available Voice band data Transmission Type DB1 parameter limits are provided with FGD for
18. e Subcontractor PR8SX 5 00 c PR administration and maintenance includes reconciliation e Prime Service Vendor PROPX 1 75 e Subcontractor PROSX 1 75 1 When an Access Service is ordered with both PI and PR only the nonrecurring charge for PR applies Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 37 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES ALL STATES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE Cont d NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE E 900 Service Access Restriction per telephone number restricted e Per Telephone Exchange Service telephone number RTVXW 2 52 e Per Switched Access Lineside telephone number RTVXV 2 52 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 14 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 14 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 15 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Effective 9 15 2000 Issued 9 14 2000 15 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 16 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 16 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 17 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000
19. exchange telephone repair 611 where available community information services of an information service provider and other customers services by dialing the appropriate digits Charges for FGA terminating calls requiring operator assistance or calls to 611 or 911 will only apply where sufficient call details are available Additional non access charges will also be billed on a separate account for T 6 2 6 2 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 35 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP A FGA A 8 Cont d 9 10 11 a An operator surcharge as set forth in the general and or local exchange tariffs for local operator assistance 0 and 0 calls Calls to certain community information services in accordance with the Information Provider s applicable service rates when the Company performs the billing function for the Information Provider Calls from a FGA line to another customer s service in accordance with that customer s applicable service rates when the Company performs the billing function for that customer FGA calls terminating outside of the dial tone office are assessed Tandem Transmission rates in addition to the applicable Switched Access rates when calls are terminated within the dial tone office Tandem Transmission mileage measuremen
20. factor as set forth in 3 following M Material moved from Page 18 M1 Material moved from Page 19 M M M1 M1 2 3 2 3 10 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 19 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 10 31 2008 Effective 7 14 2009 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B Jurisdictional Requirements Cont d 1 2 Feature Group C FGC or Feature Group D FGD Service a Originating FGC or FGD Service When a customer orders FGC or FGD Switched Access Service s where the jurisdiction is determined from the call detail the Company will develop the projected PIU factor according to such jurisdiction The projected interstate percentage is developed on a monthly basis by end office when the originating FGC or FGD access minutes are measured by dividing the measured interstate originating access minutes by the total originating access minutes Terminating FGC Service When a customer orders terminating FGC Switched Access Service the data used by the Company to develop the projected PIU factor for originating FGC access minutes is used to develop the projected PIU factor for such terminating access minutes When originating call details are insufficient to determine the jurisdiction for the call the customer may supply the projected PIU factor by LATA 1 or authorize the Company to use the Company developed perc
21. first and each additional line or trunk application per Access Order If a customer orders multiple lines or trunks on the same Access Order the first line or trunk is assessed the first installation charge and each additional line or trunk is assessed the each additional installation charge per Interface Group Category i e 1 and 2 6 or 9 per Access Order 2 Installation Of Optional Features Nonrecurring charges apply for the installation of some of the optional features available with Switched Access Service The charges may apply whether the feature is installed coincident with the initial installation of service or at any time subsequent to the initial installation of service Specific rate applications are as set forth in 6 7 1 following T C C 6 7 6 7 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 98 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C Nonrecurring Charges Cont d 3 Service Rearrangements Service rearrangements are changes to existing services installed which do not result in either a change in the minimum period requirements as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding or a change in the physical location of the POT at a customer s premises or a customer s end user s premises Changes which result in the establishment of new minimum period obligatio
22. multiplexing etc Network Address The term Network Address denotes a numeric character string used to identify the customer network location of the DTE and the destination of each virtual call made within the network to that location Network Control Signaling The term Network Control Signaling denotes the transmission of signals used in the telecommunications system which perform functions such as supervision control status and charge signals address signaling e g dialing calling and called number identifications rate of flow service selection error control and audible tone signals call progress signals indicating re order or busy conditions alerting coin denominations coin collect and coin return tones to control the operation of the telecommunications system Network Interface NI The term Network Interface denotes the point of interconnection between Company communications facilities and terminal equipment protective apparatus or other customer provided facilities Non Inverting Digital Loopback 108 Type Test Line The term Non Inverting Digital Loopback 108 Type Test Line denotes a termination in a digital Company switch location to conduct digital testing of digital services i e 56 kbps 64 kbps and 64 kbps clear channel Nonsynchronous Test Line The term Nonsynchronous Test Line denotes an arrangement in step by step end offices which provides operational tests which are n
23. preceding The PIU factor is reported by LATA When the customer reports a LATA level PIU factor the specified percentage applies to all end offices within the LATA The projected PIU factor is used by the Company to apportion the originating and terminating usage between interstate and intrastate until a revised report is received as set forth in C following The number of access minutes either the measured minutes or the assumed minutes is multiplied by the projected PIU factor to develop the interstate access minutes The number of access minutes minus the developed interstate access minutes is the developed intrastate access minutes This PIU factor is in addition to the PIU factor as set forth in 3 following FGA Not to be Resold For FGA Service not to be resold the customer shall state in its initial order a projected PIU factor of zero percent 0 by lineside termination or access service group FGB Service Upon ordering FGB Service the customer shall state in its initial order a projected PIU factor as set forth in B preceding The PIU factor is reported by LATA When the customer reports a LATA level PIU factor the specified percentage applies to all end offices within the LATA The projected PIU factor for FGB Service used by the Company to apportion the originating and terminating usage between interstate and intrastate is developed in the same manner as in a preceding This PIU factor is in addition to the PIU
24. provided based on the standards in the MECAB and MECOD guidelines to ensure that jointly provided access services are installed tested and turned up in a timely manner A Feature Group A Switched Access Service 1 The ordering rating and billing of FGA Switched Access Service will be based on revenue sharing agreements between the Exchange Carriers jointly providing the service For FGA Switched Access Service the Exchange Telephone Company in whose territory the first point of switching is located will accept the order In addition the Exchange Telephone Company in whose territory the customer s POT is located must also receive a copy of the order from the customer The Exchange Telephone Company that accepts the order will then determine the charges involved arrange to provide the Access Service ordered and bill the charges in accordance with its Access Service Tariff T N N T T T 2 4 2 4 7 B Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 46 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED Cont d Feature Groups B C and D Switched Access Service When more than one Exchange Telephone Company is involved in the provision of Access Service the customer requesting initial service will
25. s bills to reflect the PVU factors prospectively in the next bill period if the PVU factors are provided by the customer to the Company prior to April 15 2012 The Company may choose to provide credits based on the reported PVU factors on a quarterly basis until such time as the billing system modifications can be implemented PVU Factor Updates The customer may update the PVU factors quarterly using the method set forth in 1 c preceding If the customer chooses to submit such updates it shall forward to the Company no later than 15 days after the first day of January April July and or October of each year revised PVU factors based on data for the prior three months ending the last day of December March June and September respectively The revised PVU factors will serve as the basis for future billing and will be effective on the bill date of each such month and shall serve as the basis for subsequent monthly billing until superseded by new PVU factors No prorating or back billing will be done based on the updated PVU factors Material moved from Page 33 2 M1 Material moved to Page 33 4 T M C T T M M1 2 3 2 3 10 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 33 4 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 06 12 2012 Effective 07 13 2012 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS F Identification and Rating of VoIP PSTN Traffi
26. transport facility for different services When the same transport facility and the associated options are utilized to provide more than one service the Company shall apportion the monthly billing of the appropriate transport elements between the shared services The rate elements subject to the Shared Use allocation process are the recurring elements assessed for transport facilities only between a customer s premises and the SWC of that premises and the interoffice facilities from the customer s SWC to other wire centers which may include access tandems end offices and hubbing locations Rate elements not associated with transport facilities are not allocated The nonrecurring installation charges for each service are not apportioned and are assessed except as set forth in this section The Shared Use transport facility is ordered and provided as Private Line Transport Service PLTS unless otherwise described in this section The specific Shared Use regulations and or exceptions are described following e DS1 and DS3 PLTS with Switched Access Service is described in 2 7 1 e Switched Access Service with Common Channel Signaling Access Capability Service CCSAC is described in 2 7 3 following e PLTS and Switched Access Service provisioned with an optical interface described in 2 7 4 following DS1 AND DS3 PLTS WITH SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE When DS1 and DS3 PLTS including a facility to a Hub is shared between PLTS and Switched
27. 20 3 1 CCSAC RATE CATEGORIES AND APPLICATIONS Cont d C Message Charges Message charges as set forth in 20 8 following are assessed based on the type of message protocol ISUP or TCAP ISUP messages are associated with call set up while TCAP messages are used to query call related databases ISUP message charges are assessed per call set up request and TCAP message charges are assessed per data request Message charges do not apply for TCAP messages switched by the regional STPs to the Company provided 800 Data Base LIDB or LNP Data Base Query charges are assessed in lieu of message charges Query charges for 800 Data Base are assessed as set forth in 6 8 preceding When TCAP messages are destined for a foreign database including a non company provided LNP Data Base message charges are assessed in lieu of query charges Message charges are assessed in the following manner 1 Signal Formulation An ISUP Signal Formulation charge is assessed per call set up request for formulating signaling messages in association with call set up 2 Signal Transport An ISUP Signal Transport charge is assessed per call set up request for signaling messages transported to or from the Company STP in association with call set up A TCAP Signal Transport charge is assessed per data request transported to or from a Company STP and destined for a foreign database 3 Signal Switching An ISUP Signal Switching charge is assessed per call set u
28. 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP C FGC Cont d B Optional Features 1 Switched Transport Optional Features Supervisory Signaling MPTS D Common Switching Optional Features Automatic Number Identification Delay Dial Start Pulsing Signaling Immediate Dial Pulse Address Signaling Dial Pulse Address Signaling Service Class Routing Alternate Traffic Routing Trunk Access Limitation WATS Access Service WATS Transport Termination Optional Features Operator Trunks i e Coin Non Coin and Combined Coin and Non Coin 6 2 6 2 3 C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 47 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP C FGC Cont d Transmission Performance FGC is provided with Transmission Type B1 performance Transmission Type B1 standard parameter limits apply to the transmission path routed directly i e between the customer s premises and the end office and to each segment of an access tandem connection Transmission Type B1 performance is provided with Interface Group 1 2 6 and 9 as available Voice band data Transmission Type DB1 parameter limits are provided with FGC when directly routed and to each segment of an access tandem connection as delineated in Technical Referenc
29. 3 8 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 11 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS BILLING OF RATES Carrier Common Line Access rates will be billed to each Switched Access Service provided under this Tariff in accordance with the regulations as set forth in 3 8 5 following Determination of Rates except as set forth in 3 2 3 preceding WATS Access Lines 3 6 4 preceding Resale and 3 8 4 following PIU UNMEASURED LINESIDE ACCESS USAGE When Carrier Common Line Access is provided in association with FGA in Company offices that are not equipped for measurement capabilities an assumed average interstate access minutes will be used to determine Carrier Common Line Access rates These assumed access minutes are as set forth in 6 7 7 following PERCENT INTERSTATE USE PIU When the customer reports interstate and intrastate use of in service Switched Access Service Carrier Common Line Access rates will be billed only to intrastate Switched Access Service access minutes based on the data reported by the customer as set forth in 2 3 10 preceding Jurisdictional Reports except where the Company is billing according to actuals by jurisdiction Intrastate Switched Access Service access minutes will after adjustment as set forth in 3 6 4 preceding Resale when necessary be used to determine Carrier Common
30. 3 LIABILITY OF THE COMPANY cccccscsesssessssssssssssssssessssssssssssseseseeees 8 1 4 AUDIT PROVISIONS EEE EAEE E EE 8 1 5 TDERINITIONS E EE AEE EEEE SE 8 1 6 RATE APPLICATION AND PROVISIONING PARAMETERS o csseeeeee 8 1 7 RATES AND CHARGES soceri nania n a i S SECTION 9 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION 10 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION 11 SPECIAL FACILITIES ROUTING OF ACCESS SERVICES 11 1 DIETA N COIN EEI AE E E A AEA 11 2 RATES AND CHARGES sessnssssseseeeesesssssseeceresssssesceresssssescecerssesseseeee SECTION 1 Page 9 Release 2 7 23 2002 PAGE 137 137 149 157 157 157 158 158 MNABWNNNR C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 10 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 3 20 2001 Effective 4 21 2001 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE SECTION 12 SPECIALIZED SERVICE OR ARRANGEMENTS 12 1 GENER AT E E E E 1 12 2 MOVE CHARGES veicic a ccs tetecew E Ee A A e A EEEE 1 12 3 RATES AND CHARGES cccccccsesessececcccccceessscscsccsccsssssscsesccesseseunensnse 2 SECTION 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 1 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING cccccccccccccsssesescscceccceesnssssesccessessenenenss 1 13 2 ADDITIONAESSABOR E E EEE T E E ET 1 13 2 1 OVERTIME INSTALLATION o cccccccssesescecccccccessessssscceccessssensscecess 1 13 2 2 OTHER LABOR korira iion SiGe CAG ae oleee Gece Mun Be E Rela sees 1
31. A preceding may subsequently be added to the order at any time up to and including the service date for the Access Service When added subsequently charges for a design change as set forth in 5 2 2 C following will apply when an engineering review is required Additional Engineering is not an ordering option but will be applied to an Access Order when the Company determines that Additional Engineering is necessary to accommodate a customer request Additional Engineering will only be required as set forth in 13 1 following When Additional Engineering is required the customer will be so notified and will be furnished with a written statement setting forth the justification for the Additional Engineering as well as an estimate of the charges If the customer agrees to the Additional Engineering a firm order will be established If the customer does not want the service or facilities after being notified that Additional Engineering of Company facilities is required the order will be withdrawn and no charges will apply Once a firm order has been established the total charge to the customer for the Additional Engineering may not exceed the estimated amount by more than 10 The regulations rates and charges for Additional Engineering are as set forth in 13 1 following and are in addition to the regulations rates and charges specified in this section SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION The regulations rates and charges for special construction are set
32. ACAT of Switched Access Service involves the Company provision of a technician at its office s and the customer provides a technician at its premises with suitable test equipment to perform the required tests Additional Cooperative Acceptance Tests may for example consist of the following tests Impulse Noise Phase Jitter Signal to C Notched Noise Ratio Intermodulation Nonlinear Distortion Frequency Shift Offset Envelope Delay Distortion Dial Pulse Percent Break Automatic Scheduled Testing Automatic Scheduled Testing AST of Switched Access Services Trunkside where the customer provides remote office test lines and 105 test lines with associated responders or their functional equivalent will consist of monthly loss and C message noise tests and annual balance test However the customer may specify a more frequent schedule of tests In addition to the loss noise balance tests the customer may also order at additional charges gain slope and C notched noise testing The Company will provide a monthly AST report that lists the test results for each trunk tested Trunk test failures requiring customer participation for trouble resolution will be provided to the customer on an as occurs basis Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 10 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANE
33. ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 6 PROVISION OF ACCESS SERVICE BILLING INFORMATION B Additional Access Service Billing Options Cont d 2 Chargeable Additional Options Additional copies of the customer s monthly bill and or CSR may be provided in a standard paper microfiche magnetic tape reel magnetic tape cartridge or floppy diskette format for an additional charge a Standard Paper Customers requesting additional copies of monthly bills and or CSRs in a standard paper format are assessed a per request charge for each bill and or each CSR requested and a per page charge b Microfiche Customers requesting additional copies of monthly bills and or CSRs in a microfiche format are assessed a per set charge for each bill set and or each CSR set and a per microfiche sheet charge c Magnetic Tape Reel or Cartridge Customers requesting additional copies of monthly bills and or CSRs in a magnetic tape reel or cartridge format are assessed a per reel or per cartridge charge Only one type of magnetic tape 1 e reel or cartridge will be provided per request d Floppy Diskette At the option of the customer floppy diskettes are provided in either a 3 5 or 5 25 double sided high density diskette format The data on the diskette is formatted using standards determined by the Company Customers requesting additional copies of monthly bills and or CSRs in a floppy diskette format are
34. Access Service including CCSAC the service is ordered provided and rated as PLTS until the customer chooses to place an order for Switched Access Service When the customer chooses to use a portion of the available capacity on existing PLTS for providing Switched Access Service the customer shall place an order for each individual Switched Access Service and specify the channel assignment for the Shared Use facility N N 2 7 2 7 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 92 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS SHARED USE REGULATIONS DS1 AND DS3 PLTS WITH SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d When the PLTS transport facilities are shared with Switched Access Service the transport recurring PLTS rate elements e g Channel Termination Transport Channel and multiplexing as well as the Switched Access Service transport recurring rate elements e g Entrance Facility Direct Trunked Transport Facility and or Direct Link Transport and associated multiplexing are apportioned based on the total number of channels utilized for each service The Switched Access rate for DS3 EF Electrical capacity of two or greater or any Optical Interface rate as set forth in Section 6 following is for the billing of Shared Use only The recurring rate elements associated with multiplexing equipment are apportioned based on the number of channels utilized for each serv
35. Access Service are installation of service installation of optional features and service rearrangements These charges are set forth in 6 8 following Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 97 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C Nonrecurring Charges Cont d 1 Installation Of Service Nonrecurring charges apply for the installation of the Entrance Facility and for the installation of the individual Feature Group line or trunk a An Entrance Facility nonrecurring charge is assessed per POT i e Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 per customer designated premises per Access Order for every new Entrance Facility installed When the EF is existing and the customer orders additional Switched Access services to connect to the existing EF nonrecurring charges will not apply for the EF b For Switched Access Service which is ordered on a per line or trunk basis the nonrecurring charge is applied per line or per trunk Nonrecurring charges are assessed dependent on the Interface Group ordered for terminating Switched Transport at the customer s POT Each Interface Group provides a specified premises interface as set forth in 6 1 2 preceding Each Interface Group i e 1 2 6 9 is assigned to an Interface Group Category for the application of nonrecurring charges based on the
36. Available with FGB FGC and FGD per trunk group 1 ANI 1 Subsequent orders only Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 152 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING B Common Switching Optional Features Cont d FID 7 Up to 7 Digit Outpulsing of Access Digits to customer available with FGB per trunk group USDO 8 Cut Through available with FGD per end office or access tandem CTO 9 Delay Dial Start Pulsing Signaling available with FGC per trunk group DDSP 10 Immediate Dial Pulse Address Signaling available with FGC per trunk group ADS IDP 11 Dial Pulse Address Signaling available with FGC per trunk group ADS DP 12 Revertive Pulse Address Signaling available with FGC per trunk group 1 ADS RP 13 Service Class Routing available with FGC and FGD per trunk group SCRT 1 Available with existing service only Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 9 14 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING B Common Switching Optional Features Cont d 14 Alternate Traffic Routing e Multiple Customer Premises Alternate Routing available with FGB FGC and FGD per trunk group e End Office Alternate Routing When Ordered in Trunks available with FGB FGC and FGD Per trunk Per trunk gro
37. B1 performance Transmission Type B1 standard parameter limits apply to the transmission path routed directly i e between the customer s premises and the end office and to each segment of an access tandem connection Transmission Type B1 performance is provided with Interface Groups 1 2 6 and 9 as available Voice band data Transmission Type DB1 parameter limits are provided with FGB when routed directly and to each segment of an access tandem connection as delineated in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE Testing Capabilities FGB is provided in the terminating direction where equipment is available with seven digit access to balance 100 type test line milliwatt 102 type test line nonsynchronous or synchronous test line automatic transmission measuring 105 type test line data transmission 107 type test line loop around test line short circuit test line and open circuit test line In addition to the tests described in 6 1 5 preceding which are included with the installation of service Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing Automatic Scheduled Testing Cooperative Scheduled Testing Manual Scheduled Testing and Nonscheduled Testing are available as set forth in Section 13 following T T C C T T 6 2 6 2 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 43 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCR
38. C Adjustments for the quantities of services established or discontinued in any billing period beyond the minimum period set forth for services in other sections of this Tariff will be prorated to the number of days or major fraction of days based on a 30 day month The Company will upon request and if available furnish such detailed information as may reasonably be required for verification of any bill D When a rate as set forth in this Tariff is shown to more than two decimal places the charges will be determined using the rate shown The resulting amount will then be rounded to the nearest penny 1 e rounded to two decimal places E When more than one copy of a customer bill for services provided under the provisions of this Tariff is furnished to the customer an additional charge applies for each additional copy of the bill as set forth in 13 3 6 following T T 2 4 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 40 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES Cont d MINIMUM PERIODS The minimum period for which services are provided and for which rates and charges are applicable is one month unless otherwise specified When a service is discontinued prior to the expiration of the minimum period charges are applicable whether the service is used or not as follows When a service
39. Carrier Common Line Access rates in effect when the calls were completed C Originating Carrier Common Line per minute rate apply s to e All originating access minutes of use e Less those originating access minutes of use associated with Lineside Access Services where the off hook supervisory signaling is forwarded by the customer s equipment when the called party answers e Less all originating access minutes of use associated with calls placed to 800 and 900 numbers e Plus all originating access minutes of use associated with calls placed to 800 and 900 numbers for which the customer furnishes for each month a report of either the number of calls or minutes or a report of the percent of calls or minutes that terminate in a Switched Access Service that is assessed Carrier Common Line Access rates and for which corresponding reduction in the number of terminating access minutes of use has been made as set forth in B preceding M Material moved to Page 11 M1 Material moved from Page 15 M M1 T T T M1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 14 State of South Dakota Release 5 1 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE 3 9 RATES AND CHARGES RATE PER ACCESS MINUTE e Originating Per Access Minute 0 038420 T e Terminating Per Access Minute 0 000000 R T 1 This page previously canceled Pages 15 and 16 Release 1 Qwest Corporation Ac
40. Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE 3 5 DETERMINATION OF USAGE SUBJECT TO CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS RATES Cont d 3 5 4 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVIDED IN CONJUNCTION WITH A COMMERCIAL MOBILE RADIO SERVICE PROVIDER T For Switched Access Service provided in conjunction with a CMRS provider T Carrier Common Line Access rates do not apply 3 5 5 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ACCESS CAPABILITY EXEMPTION Common Channel Signaling Access Service as set forth in Section 20 following is not subject to a Carrier Common Line rate T 3 5 6 LINE INFORMATION DATA BASE EXEMPTION The Switched Access Service Line Information Data Base as set forth in Section 20 following is not subject to a Carrier Common Line rate T 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 5 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE RESOLD MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S SCOPE Where the customer is reselling MTS and or MTS type service s on which the Carrier Common Line and Switched Access rates have been assessed the customer may at the option of the customer obtain Feature Group A Feature Group B or Feature Group D Switched Access Service under this Tariff as set forth in Section 6 following for originating and or terminating access in the local exchange Such access group arrangements whether single line or trunks or mul
41. For terminating calls over FGA FGB FGC to 800 800 type FGD e For originating calls over FGA used for resale FGB FGC where measurement capability is available FGD e For originating calls over FGA not used for resale For originating calls over FGA not used for resale and FGC where measurement capability is not available chargeable originating access minutes are derived from recorded minutes in the following manner Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 125 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 7 MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES Cont d STEP Obtain recorded originating minutes and messages measured as set forth in A and C following for FGA not used for resale and FGC where measurement capability is not available respectively from the appropriate recording data STEP 2 Obtain the total messages and attempts by multiplying the originating measured messages by the attempts per message ratio Attempts per message ratios A M are obtained separately for the major call categories such as operator 8XX or 900 from a sample study which analyzes the ultimate completion status of the total attempts which receive acknowledgment from the customer That is Measured Messages divided by Completion Ratio equals Total Attempts STEP 3 Obtain the total non conversation time additive NCTA by mult
42. IC Subscription is a procedure whereby an end user or payphone service provider PSP may select and designate to the Company an IC to access without dialing an access code This procedure applies for both interLATA and intraLATA calls This IC is referred to as the end user s or PSP s primary IC PIC An end user or PSP may select one primary IC for both interLATA and intraLATA service or they may choose to have two primary ICs one for interLATA service and a different IC for intraLATA service The IC Subscription procedure applies to Telephone Exchange Service lines and or trunks Switched Access Lineside connections Centrex type lines and Public Access Line PAL Service e For IC Subscription pay telephones the PSP will select and designate to the Company an IC to access without dialing an access code for intraLATA calls Should a caller wish to use the services of an IC other than the primary IC it is necessary for the caller to dial the IC s access code s to reach that IC s service s The terms conditions rates and charges for interLATA IC Subscription are found in CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 Section 13 The terms and conditions for intraLATA IC Subscription are following T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MIS
43. Internet Protocol N WATS Wide Area Telecommunications Service s 1 7 1 8 Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 26 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 7 7 2011 Effective 8 9 2011 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE TRADEMARKS SERVICE MARKS AND TRADE NAMES Trade names trademarks and or service marks which may be used for services offered in this Tariff are owned by CenturyLink Inc or a subsidiary of CenturyLink Inc and are used by the Company with express permission Trademark and service mark designations will not be listed hereafter in the Tariff However the laws regarding trademarks and service marks are applicable Trade names trademarks and service marks that are owned by CenturyLink Inc or subsidiary of CenturyLink Inc cannot be used by another party without authorization CENTURYLINK CENTURYLINK CENTURYLINK REFERENCE TO OTHER TARIFFS AND OR PRICE LISTS Whenever reference is made in this Tariff to other tariffs and or catalogs of the Company the reference is to the tariffs and or catalogs in force as of the effective date of this Tariff and to amendments thereto and successive issues thereof D N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 27 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 9 REFERENCE TO TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS A All service s offered i
44. LIDB Access Query 0 000484 e Per LIDB Validation Query 0 032000 NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE LIDB Originating Point Code per OPC NRBLB 165 00 M Material moved from Page 20 T M M
45. Lasts asasledass iced ugeaet aed 5 Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing ceeceecesneecseeeeeteeeeeteeeees 13 Additional Engineering xi ci cedisiseccelsasejegecssenseasasededueadecosaessebeuedesecvaatenecseseans 13 Additional Engineering Additional Labor and Miscellaneous Services 13 Additional Labor os 0s cj adeccecess astenia n senesced ee 13 Alternate Traffic ROUNE cciias 6 Application and Reference jsisis cccieissiedecasuacseessedesdcaaysoaceionsences suaeasnevonsndtease 1 Application of Rates for Extension Service eee eesecsseeeneeeseeenseeeteeeees 6 Application of Tariff iccciscscacsicesssasaseapaccvesoaedascaeadseasaecacasoaden dsandoganasuaeaecvans 1 Automatic Number Identification AND cccccccccccccceeesssnsececeeeeeeeseeenns 6 Automatic Scheduled Testing i cc iscscssetsssbeceiaavvescatesdcesasececasesedenecesssecseans 13 Availability for Testing eseeseeessessseseseseesseesseesseessserssseessressersseeeseseesseee 2 PANOIGANCE EEE EEEE 11 Balance sinismo iroot sa EEEN E EE aA 2 Band Advance Arrangement for Use With WATS Access Lines 6 Billing and Collection Services See Information and Billing EV ICES 3c t acta ted ates oat ad chit lat anaes ate os E E TA 8 Cable Only Paci li thes snper setrini rti a sue esor siih 11 Call Denial on Line or Hunt Group ssssssssesssessesssessseressseesseesserssereseeesssees 6 Cancellation of An Access Orders s i ccssnccscncaisesucss
46. Local Area Network LAN The term Local Area Network denotes a network permitting the interconnection and intercommunication of a group of computers primarily for the sharing of resources such as data storage devices and printers Local Calling Area The term Local Calling Area which includes Extended Area Service EAS points denotes a geographical area as defined in the Company s Exchange and Network Services Tariff in which an end user Telephone Exchange Service subscriber may complete a call without incurring MTS charges T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 75 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Local Tandem Switch The term Local Tandem Switch denotes a local Company switching unit by which local or access telephonic communications are switched to and from an End Office Switch Logical Channel The term Logical Channel denotes a communications channel through the network that allows simultaneous transmission of sequenced data packets through the network No circuit capacity is preassigned to a logical channel capacity is made available as data is transmitted Loop Around Test Line The term Loop Around Test Line denotes an arrangement utilizing a Company central office to provide a means to make certain two way transmission tests on a manual basis This arrangement has two
47. Mail return receipt requested Contested audits will be resolved by the Company and the customer within thirty 30 days of written notification or a neutral arbitrator will be mutually agreed upon by the Company and the customer During the initial thirty 30 day resolution period the Company and the customer will review the audit process and the data used to calculate the PIU factor in an attempt to resolve the dispute Should the Company and the customer resolve the dispute on the PIU factor a neutral arbitrator would not be warranted Contested audits will be resolved by a neutral arbitrator mutually agreed upon by the Company and the customer The arbitration hearing will be conducted in Denver Colorado or a state and location within the Company operating territory that is mutually agreed upon by both parties The arbitration proceeding including the decision rendered shall be governed by the law both statutory and case of the state in which the arbitration hearing is held including but not limited to the Uniform Arbitration Act as adopted in that state T 2 3 2 3 10 D 4 E Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 33 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS Cont d Prior to the arbitration hearing each party shall notify the arbitrator of the PIU factor which that par
48. Overtime per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof MVWOX 9 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof MVW2X 9 00 e Premium Time per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof MVWPX 12 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof MVW3X 12 00 1 A call out of a Company employee at a time not consecutive with the employee s scheduled work period is subject to a minimum charge of four 4 hours Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 24 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE Cont d B Testing Services 1 Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing NONRECURRING TESTING PERIODS USOC CHARGE e Basic Time per technician First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof UBCX 39 16 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof UBCI1 22 16 e Overtime per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof UBCO 43 69 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof UBC2 26 68 e Premium Time per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof UBCP 48 21 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof UBC3 31 21 1 A call out of a Company employee at a time not consecutive with the employee s scheduled work period is subject to a minimum charge of four 4 hours Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1
49. Page 20 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 1 CHARGES FOR ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING NONRECURRING ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING PERIODS USOC CHARGE e Basic Time per engineer First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof AEQXX 46 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof AEQIX 28 00 e Overtime per engineer First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof AEQOX 51 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof AEQ2X 33 00 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 21 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES Cont d 13 4 2 CHARGES FOR ADDITIONAL LABOR A Installation NONRECURRING ADDITIONAL LABOR PERIODS USOC CHARGE e Overtime per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof 2 ALFOX 1 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof ALF2X 1 00 e Premium Time per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof 2 ALFPX 5 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof ALF3X 5 00 1 A call out of a Company employee at a time not consecutive with the employee s scheduled work period is subject to a minimum charge of four 4 hours 2 Only one first 1 2 hour increment applies per request Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SEC
50. RATES AND CHARGES Cont d 6 8 3 INTERCONNECTION CHARGE RATE PER ACCESS MINUTE T e Originating 0 004681 C e Terminating 0 000000 R C 6 8 4 MESSAGE UNIT CREDIT FGA ACCESS MINUTE 1 e Rate per originating 0 001726 6 8 5 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE 1 equals a negative amount Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 158 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES Cont d 6 8 6 900 ACCESS SERVICE NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE e Per first NXX per end office tandem N9E 101 71 e Per each subsequent NXX per End Office Tandem N9GIX 23 86 e Expanded 900 Option per end office tandem with NXX activity available with CST3 and FGD N98AX 874 81 e Expanded 900 Option per end office tandem without NXX activity available with CST3 and FGD N98BX 950 88 RECURRING CHARGE e 900 Customer Identification Charge 0 000994 6 8 9 800 DATA BASE ACCESS SERVICE RATE PER CALL QUERY e 800 Carrier Identification Charge per call 0 003312 e Vertical Features POTS Translation Charge per call 0 003665 Call Handling amp Destination Feature Charge per query 0 000694 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 7 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 7 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 8 Index Page 1 State of South Dak
51. Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL Cont d SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS AND MANNER OF PROVISION Lineside Access FGA is furnished on a per line basis Trunkside Access FGB C and D is furnished on a per trunk basis Trunks are differentiated by type and directionality of traffic carried over a Switched Access Service arrangement Differentiation among traffic types is necessary for the Company to design Switched Access Service properly to meet the traffic carrying capacity requirement of the customer D C C C 6 1 6 1 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS AND MANNER OF PROVISION Cont d There are five major traffic types These are Originating Terminating SWITCHNET 56 CCC Originating and CCC Terminating Originating traffic type represents access capacity within a LATA for carrying traffic from the end user to the customer Terminating traffic type represents access capacity within a LATA for carrying traffic from the customer to the end user SWITCHNET 56 traffic type represents access capacity within a LATA for carrying digital traffic at speeds up to 56 kbps between the customer and the end user CCC Originating traffic type represents access capacity within a LATA
52. SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d FEATURE GROUP B FGB A Description 1 FGB Access which is available to all customers provides trunkside Access to Company end office switches for the customer s use in originating communications from and terminating communications to an Interexchange Carrier s interstate service or a customer provided intrastate communications capability The customer must specify the Interexchange Carrier to which the FGB Service is connected or in the alternative specify the means by which FGB access communication is transported to another state FGB when directly routed to an end office via DTT is provided at appropriately equipped Company electronic end office switches When provided via Company designated electronic access tandem switches with TST FGB switching is provided at Company electronic and electromechanical end office switches When FGB Service is directly routed to an end office the Switched Transport configuration is composed of an Entrance Facility and a DTT facility to an end office When FGB is switched through an access tandem the Switched Transport configuration is composed of an Entrance Facility a DTT facility between the SWC and the access tandem and TST from the access tandem to the end offices subtending the access tandem Multiplexing options are described in 6 1 2 preceding FGB is provided as a trunkside switching through the
53. SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES Operator Trunk Coin Non Coin Or Combined Coin And Non Coin This option may be ordered to provide coin non coin or combined coin and non coin operation It is available only with FGC and FGD Non coin trunks are provided in Company electronic and electromechanical end offices Coin and combined coin and non coin trunks are provided only at Company electronic end offices and other Company end offices where equipment is available This option is provided as a trunk type of Transport Termination and is not available with SS7 Out of Band Signaling Coin This arrangement provides for initial coin return control and routing of 00 00 0 O or 1 prefixed originating coin calls requiring operator assistance to the customer s premises Because operator assisted coin calling traffic is routed over a trunk group dedicated to operator assisted calls this arrangement is only provided in association with the Service Class Routing option The operator assistance coin calling arrangement is also normally ordered by the customer in conjunction with the ANI optional feature since the preponderance of trunk groups equipped with this arrangement will be terminated in the customer s operator service positions rather than in the customer s manual cord boards Non Coin This arrangement provides for the routing of 00 00 0 O or 1 prefixed
54. Switched Transport is provided at the rates and charges set forth in 6 8 following The application of these rates with respect to the different types of service is as set forth in 6 7 1 following Switched Access is ordered under the access order provisions as set forth in Section 5 preceding Design and traffic routing of Switched Access Service is described in 6 5 2 following Switched Transport is composed of an Entrance Facility EF rate category as described in a following a Direct Trunked Transport DTT rate category as described in b following and a Tandem Switched Transport TST rate category as described in c following a Switched Transport EF Rate Category An EF provides the communication path between a customer s premises and the Company serving wire center SWC of that premises for the sole use of the customer The EF rate category is composed of a Voice Grade rate a DS1 rate or a DS3 rate An EF is provided even if the customer s premises and the SWC are located in the same building The types of facilities available for Entrance Facilities are described in 2 following C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 14 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A 1 Cont d b Switched Transport DTT Rate Category DTT provides the transmission path on circuits dedicated to the use of a s
55. System applies only to NSEP telecommunications services and requires and authorizes priority action by the Company providing the service Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 16 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PRIORITY TSP SYSTEM Cont d B The TSP System s applicability is limited to Access Services which the Company can discreetly identify for priority provisioning and or restoration C Other regulations rates and charges for services provided in conjunction with TSP System apply as specified elsewhere in this Tariff e g expedited order charge Special Construction due date change charge etc D The customer for TSP System service also must be the same customer for the Access Service with which it is associated E Under certain conditions it may be necessary to preempt one or more customer services with a lower or no restoration priority in order to install or restore NSEP telecommunications service s of a higher priority If such preemption is necessary and if circumstances permit the Company will make reasonable effort to notify the preempted service customer of the action to be taken Credit allowance for such service preemption shall be made in accordance with the provisions set forth in 2 4 4 E preceding concerning Te
56. Tariff SECTION 1 Page 20 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 4 TARIFF FORMAT 1 4 1 LOCATION OF MATERIAL 1 Section 1 provides the following for all of the sections in this Tariff e Subject Index an alphabetical listing to find the desired section e Table of Contents A numerical listing to find the desired section and page 2 Each individual section in the Tariff provides a Subject Index for the material located within that section 3 Obsolete Service Offerings Obsolete service offerings are identified in the Tariff by adding 100 to the current section number i e obsolete items from Section 6 Switched Access Service T would be found in Section 106 Obsolete Switched Access Service This section is then filed behind Section 6 T 1 4 2 OUTLINE STRUCTURE This document uses nine levels of indentations referred to as Tariff Information Management TIM Codes as outlined below LEVEL APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1 Section Heading 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 Sub Heading 2 5 CONNECTIONS 3 Sub Heading 2 5 1 GENERAL 4 Sub Heading Text A Text 5 Sub Heading Text 1 Text 6 Sub Heading Text a Text 7 Sub Heading Text 1 Text 8 Sub Heading Text a Text 9 Footnotes 1 Text Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 21 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 4 TARIFF FORMAT Cont
57. Transport is composed of an EF a DTT to an access tandem and Tandem Switched Transport TST from the access tandem to the subtending end offices The transmission path permits the transport of calls in the originating direction from the end user s end office switch to the customer s premises and in the terminating direction from the customer s premises to the end office switch but not simultaneously The voice frequency transmission path may be comprised of any form or configuration of plant capable of and typically used in the telecommunications industry for the transmission of voice and associated telephone signals within the frequency bandwidth of approximately 300 to 3000 Hz The Company will work cooperatively with the customer in determining 1 the EF 2 whether the service is to be directly routed or routed through an access tandem switch 3 the directionality of the service and 4 the hubbing arrangements Switched Transport optional features are provided as set forth in 4 following Switched Transport is provided at the rates and charges set forth in 6 8 following The application of these rates with respect to the different types of service is as set forth in 6 7 1 following C C T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 13 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A 1 Cont d
58. agent on the other hand over the designation of the primary IC the Company will honor the designation selected by the end user and or PSP regardless of any contractual obligations the end user and or PSP may have with one or more ICs or agents 3 Subscriber Alleged PIC Disputes When a subscriber alleges that a PIC change was made without their authorization the Company shall return the subscriber to their previous PIC at no charge to the subscriber All PIC change charges assessed by the Company to the subscriber as the result of the alleged unauthorized PIC change shall be credited to the subscriber s service Even if no order is received from the alleged unauthorized carrier to switch the customer back to their alleged authorized carrier the Company will assess two nonrecurring PIC change charges to the alleged unauthorized carrier one for the initial switch of the subscriber to the alleged unauthorized carrier the second for the switch from the alleged unauthorized carrier to the alleged authorized carrier as set forth in D following If the alleged unauthorized carrier change was due to a Company error the subscriber will be returned to the alleged authorized carrier free of charge to both the subscriber and the alleged unauthorized carrier T T T T 13 3 13 3 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 6 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 3 20 2001 Effective 4 21 2001 13
59. and the host office and Tandem Transmission rates as set forth in L following are assessed between the host and the RSS or RSM Mileage measurement rules are set forth in 6 7 11 following Tandem Switching rates will not be assessed T T T T 6 7 6 7 1 L N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 118 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Cont d Tandem Switched Transport The TST rate category is composed of Tandem Transmission and Tandem Switching rates Mileage measurement is described in 6 7 11 following Rates and charges are set forth in 6 8 following Tandem Transmission The Tandem Transmission rates are assessed on a per MOU basis when tandem routing is provided for trunkside services Tandem Transmission rates are also assessed to FGA Service when traffic is terminated in an end office that is not the dial tone office as set forth in 6 7 11 following The Tandem Transmission rates are portrayed in mileage bands There are two rates that apply for each band a fixed rate per band and a rate per mile per minute Tandem Switching The Tandem Switching rate is assessed on a per MOU basis to all Switched Access minutes when tandem switching functions are utilized Tandem Switching is not assessed to FGA Service Multiplexing associated with EF an
60. any or all of the usage over an unmeasured access line originates from or terminates to a WATS Access Line and the total access line usage recorded at the WATS Serving Office exceeds the assumed usage set forth preceding for FGA Access the recorded usage will be billed to the customer in lieu of the assumed usage 6 7 6 7 7 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 128 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES Cont d Feature Group A Usage Measurement For originating calls over FGA usage measurement begins when the originating FGA Access entry switch receives an off hook supervisory signal forwarded from the customer s POT Where FGA Access is used for resale this off hook signal is generally provided by the customer s equipment Where FGA Access is not used for resale the off hook signal is generally forwarded by the customer s equipment when the called party answers The measurement of originating call usage over FGA Access ends when the originating FGA Access entry switch receives an on hook supervisory signal from either the originating end user s end office indicating the originating end user has disconnected or the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch For terminating calls over FGA Access usage measurement begins when the terminating FGA Access entry switch receive
61. apply before any additional labor is undertaken The labor charges apply per Company technician performing billable work at the customer s request If multiple types of services are being ordered on one request at a designated premises all orders must specifically reference the original request When more than one technician is involved in working on a customer s request the amount of time accrued by all technicians will be totaled to determine the number of 1 2 hour increments to be billed Only one first 1 2 hour increment applies per request OVERTIME INSTALLATION Overtime installation is that Company installation effort requested by the customer outside of normal business hours OTHER LABOR Other labor is that additional labor not included in 13 2 1 preceding and labor incurred to accommodate a specific customer request that involves only labor which is not covered by any other section of this Tariff Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE A When a customer reports a trouble to the Company for clearance and no trouble is found in the Company s facilities the customer shall be responsible for payment of a Maintenance of Service charge the Maintenance of Service charge is applicable for the period of time from wh
62. assessed a per set charge for each bill set and or each CSR set requested Rates and charges for additional access service billing copies are set forth in 13 4 3 C following Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 15 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Cont d 13 3 7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PRIORITY TSP SYSTEM A Priority installation and or restoration of National Security Emergency Preparedness NSEP telecommunications services shall be provided in accordance with Part 64 401 Appendix A of the Federal Communications Commission s FCC s Rules and Regulations In addition TSP System service shall be provided in accordance with the guidelines set forth in Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System for National Security Emergency Preparedness NSEP Service Vendor Handbook NCS H 3 1 2 dated July 9 1990 and Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System for National Security Emergency Preparedness NSEP Service User Manual NCS M 3 1 1 The TSP System is a service developed to meet the requirements of the Federal Government as specified in the Service Vendor Handbook and Service User s Manual which provides regulatory administrative and operational framework for the priority installation and or restoration of NSEP telecommunications services The TSP
63. basis The query charge is assessed on all completed queries regardless of the results of the validation The Access Query represents the transport from the STP to the SCP location and back The Validation Query represents the verification of LIDB information The nonrecurring charge for LIDB is assessed per Originating Point Code Rates and charges for LIDB are set forth in 20 8 following Any change in LIDB service will be treated as discontinuance of the existing service and an installation of a new service as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 19 Release 4 Effective 9 24 2002 State of South Dakota Issued 9 9 2002 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 8 RATES AND CHARGES A Common Channel Signaling Access Capability NONRECURRING MONTHLY USOC CHARGE RATE 1 Entrance Facility e Per DSI EFY 1X FE4EX 684 00 187 39 e Per DS3 1 EFY3X FE4FX r 821 29 2 Direct Link Transport MONTHLY RATE MILEAGE BANDS USOC FIXED PER MILE a DSO Facility 0 CCA2A FFA21 Over 0 to 8 CCA2B FFA22 60 11 0 13 Over 8 to 25 CCA2C FFA23 59 98 0 22 Over 25 to 50 CCA2D FFA24 61 08 0 26 Over 50 CCA2E FFA25 64 87 0 37 b DSI Facility 0 CCA1A FFA11 Over 0 to 8 CCA1B FFA12 59 29 3 36 Over 8 to 25 CCAIC FFA13 67 63 4 94 Over 25 to 50 CCAI1D FFA14 93 10 7 46 Over 50 CCAIE FFA15 167 82 10 62 c DS3 Facility 1 0 CCA3A FFA31 Over 0 to 8 CCA3B FFA32 495 22 73 64 Over 8 to 25
64. be negotiated as set forth in B following Additional Labor Charges as set forth in Section 13 following may apply Access Services provided with a Standard Interval will be installed during Company business hours as set forth in Section 13 following If a customer requests that installation of service be done outside the Company s business hours and the Company agrees to the request the customer will be subject to applicable Additional Labor Charges as set forth in Section 13 following T T T T 5 2 5 2 1 B Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 12 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER ACCESS ORDER SERVICE DATE INTERVALS Cont d Negotiated Interval The Company will negotiate a Service Date Interval with the customer on an individual case basis resulting in a Negotiated Interval when no Standard Interval exists for the service e the quantity of Access Services ordered exceeds the quantities specified in the Standard Intervals described in the Service Interval Guide e the customer requests a Service Date before or beyond the applicable Standard Interval Service Date or e the rates are applied on an Individual Case Basis ICB The Company will offer a Service Date based on the type and quantity of Access Services the customer has requested The Negotiated Interval may not exc
65. be ordered to route calls from a designated 950 XXXX access code to FGD Access Service When a customer has FGD Access Service and does not have FGB Access Service from a particular end office 950 on FGD may be ordered to activate a customer s designated 950 XXXX access code in that end office This will allow the Company to direct those designated 950 XXXX calls dialed by the customer s end users to the customer s FGD Access Service When a customer has both FGB and FGD Access Service and orders 950 on FGD in a particular end office the Company will direct those designated 950 XXXX calls dialed by the customer s end users to the customer s FGD Access Service in that end office In both methods the customer must be prepared to handle normally dialed FGD calls as well as calls dialed with the designated 950 XXXX access code which requires the customer to receive additional address signaling Such calls will be rated as FGD T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 73 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 3 COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 3 1 COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES R 950 on FGD Cont d 950 on FGD will be provided from Company end offices and tandems where technically feasible The customer must specify the end office where 950 on FGD is to be activated to allow calls from a designated 95
66. by the Company 1 If the customer does not supply the reports the Company will assume the PIU T factors to be the same as those provided in the last quarterly report For those cases in which a quarterly report has never been received from the customer the Company will assume the PIU factors to be the same as those provided in the order for service as set forth in B preceding In any case the Company reserves the right to request actual call detail supporting the customer s reported PIU as specified preceding 2 If a quarterly report has never been received from the customer and the T customer failed to report a PIU in the order for service the Company will designate a fifty percent 50 interstate percentage beginning with the next billing period This interstate percentage will be applied until a quarterly PIU report is submitted 3 The Company will provide to the Commission annual reports on March Ist T showing the interstate percentage reported to the Company over the previous calendar year by Switched Access Service customers M1 M Material moved to Page 26 M1 Material moved from Page 28 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 28 State of South Dakota Release 5 Issued March 11 2005 Effective May 17 2005 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS C Jurisdictional Reports Cont d 2 Percent Other Message POM Factor
67. by the minutes of use MOU by the billing percentage BP 2 multiply the Tandem Transmission per mile rate by the number of miles by the MOU by the BP and 3 all other appropriate Switched Access recurring rate elements at 100 percent if applicable For Switched Access Service provisioned as DTT the recurring rates will be applied as follows 1 multiply the monthly Transport Channel fixed rate by the BP 2 multiply the monthly Transport Channel per mile rate by the number of miles by the BP and 3 all other appropriate Switched Access recurring rate elements at 100 percent if applicable The Exchange Telephone Company that owns the access tandem will assess the appropriate access tandem recurring rates at 100 percent The Exchange Telephone Company that owns the end office will assess the appropriate end office recurring rates at 100 percent When jointly provisioned Switched Access Service is provided and the Company is the intermediate non terminating carrier only the recurring Tandem Transmission per mile rate or DTT per mile rate will apply The Tandem Transmission per mile rate or DTT per mile rate will be determined by multiplying the appropriate rate by the MOU by the number of miles by the BP The DTT per mile rate will be determined by multiplying the appropriate DTT per mile monthly rate by the number of miles by the BP If the Company provides the access tandem all appropriate access tandem recurring rates will apply at 10
68. c2zisise5sadeusssecens stassatveusdndavansna oo dovedacaedataaevandenteacsdaatscavdanas Rate Regulations Concerning the Resale of MTS and or MTS Type Service S ceeececssscecsseceeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeenes Rls and Charges hirni oreren e oei e e bao E a EEE toi Resale Documentation Provided by the Customer ccsscceesseeeeseeeees Resold MTS and or MTS Type Service s ceeeeceeseeceseseceeseeeeesteeeenseeees SCOPE scsi Ges ae e aioe searetigashe anaes ec cenit pala t Gelato dawn Raced a aea oast SUPET VISION neieiet ore as ias e ta neadeashalsadecandaben sutedeaats Ea R Switched Access Service Provided in Conjunction With a Commercial Mobile Radio Service Provider eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Switched Access Service Requirement cesccecesececeeececeseeeesteeeesteeeenes Undertaking of the Company 2 icscscsasseeysdejaccacsnsucteads jacnatvasdeveiacstuaseoaseiades Unmeasured Lineside Access Usage ocsscs sccccsnssevssvesecsaccesntecesastivereanensecvens WATS ACGCESS Linesman na a leaded usecg a a a a a aaah SECTION 3 Index Page 2 Release 2 11 30 2000 PAGE 11 _ N NA NWN aAA N T T T D T T D 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL DESCRIPTION Carrier Common Line Access
69. change or rearrangement renders any customer furnished services obsolete or requires modification or alteration thereof or otherwise affects their use or performance If such substitution change or rearrangement materially affects the operating characteristics of the facility the Company will provide reasonable notification to the customer in writing Reasonable time will be allowed for any redesign and implementation required by the change in operating characteristics The Company will work cooperatively with the customer to determine reasonable notification requirements T 2 1 2 1 8 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 7 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY Cont d REFUSAL AND DISCONTINUANCE OF SERVICES Unless the provisions of 2 2 1 B or 2 5 following apply if a customer fails to comply with 2 1 6 preceding or 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 4 or 13 3 7 following including any payments to be made by it on the dates and times herein specified the Company may on thirty 30 days written notice by Certified U S Mail to the person designated by that customer to receive such notices of noncompliance refuse additional applications for service and or refuse to complete any pending orders for service by the noncomplying customer at any time thereafter If the Company does not refuse additional applications for service on
70. customer designated POT that is specified for the Tandem Sector of the originating end office It is provided in suitably equipped end office or access tandem switches and is available with FGC and FGD Alternate traffic routing through the tandem to a multiple customer POT is not an option with MPTS A customer may not overflow tandem traffic from one customer designated POT to a second customer designated POT N N T T T T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 70 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 3 COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 3 1 COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES M Alternate Traffic Routing Cont d 3 End Office Alternate Routing When Ordered in Trunks This option provides an alternate routing arrangement for customers who order in trunks and have access for a particular serving arrangement to an end office via two routes one route via an access tandem and one direct route The feature allows the customer s originating traffic from the end office to be offered first to the direct trunk group and then overflow to the access tandem group It is provided in suitably equipped end offices and is available with FGB FGC and FGD N Trunk Access Limitation This option provides for the routing of originating 900 service calls to a specified number of transmission
71. customer uses to determine the projected interstate percentage as described in 1 and 2 following 1 Switched Access Services a If the Company questions the information provided by the customer in C preceding the Company will send a letter to the customer by certified U S Mail return receipt requested requesting that the customer contact the Company to discuss and explain their report within thirty 30 days of the Company s request b If no response is received from the customer the Company will send a letter to the customer by certified U S Mail return receipt requested requesting the work papers and summary as described in C preceding used by the customer to substantiate the most recent interstate percentage The requested information must be submitted by the customer to the Company within thirty 30 days after receipt of the certified letter c If the customer submits the work papers and summary as requested in b preceding the Company will review this information within thirty 30 days after receipt of the customer s information d If after review of the documentation the Company and the customer establish a revised interstate percentage the Company will begin using that percentage with the next billing period e If the Company and the customer do not establish a revised interstate percentage the Company will begin the procedures as set forth in g following f If no response is received from the cust
72. d 1 4 3 RATE TABLES Within rate tables four types of entries are allowed e Rate Amount The rate amount indicates the dollar value associated with the service e A dash The dash indicates that there is no rate for the service or that a rate amount is not applicable under the specific column header e A footnote designator 1 The footnote designator indicates that further information is contained in a footnote e ICB The acronym ICB indicates that the product service is rated on an individual case basis 1 4 4 USOC COLUMN Within USOC columns two types of entries are allowed e USOC The three or five character code for the product or service e N A The N A indicates that there is no applicable USOC Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 22 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 5 EXPLANATION OF TARIFF CHANGE SYMBOLS SYMBOL EXPLANATION C To signify changed regulation D To signify discontinued material 1 To signify rate increase M To signify material relocated without change N To signify new material R To signify rate reduction T To signify a change in text but no change in rate or regulation State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 23 Release 2 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 6 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS
73. designations associated with Access Services or the Company serving central office prefixes associated with such numbers when necessary in the conduct of its business Should it become necessary to make a change in such number s the Company will furnish to the customer six 6 months notice by Certified U S Mail of the effective date and an explanation of the reason s for such change s beyond the non exclusive limited right to use described in this Tariff 2 2 2 2 1 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 12 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS USE INTERFERENCE OR IMPAIRMENT AND UNLAWFUL USE The characteristics and methods of operation of any circuits facilities or equipment provided by other than the Company and associated with the facilities utilized to provide services under this Tariff shall not interfere with or impair service over any facilities of the Company its affiliated companies or its connecting and concurring carriers involved in its services caused damage to their plant impair the privacy of any communications carried over their facilities or create hazards to the employees of any of them or the public Except as provided for equipment or systems subject to the F C C Part 68 rules in 47 C F R Section 68 108 if such characteristics or methods of operation are not in accordance with A preceding the Company will where practica
74. direction may be used to access valid NXX codes in the LATA community information services of an information service provider and other customers services by dialing the appropriate digits When FGB is directly routed to an end office via DTT only those valid NXX codes served by that end office may be accessed When FGB is routed through an access tandem only those valid NXX codes served by end offices subtending the access tandem may be accessed Additionally non access charges will also be billed for calls from a FGB trunk to another customer s service in accordance with that customer s applicable service rates when the Company performs the billing function for that customer Calls in the terminating direction will not be completed to 101XXXX 950 XXXX_ or 1 950 XXXX access codes local operator assistance 0 and 0 Directory Assistance 411 or 555 1212 where available and service codes 611 and 911 FGB may not be switched in the terminating direction to another Trunkside Switched Access Service 8 The Company will establish a trunk group or groups for the customer at end office switches or access tandem switches where FGB switching is provided When required by technical limitations a separate trunk group will be established for each type of FGB switching arrangement provided Different types of FGB or other switching arrangements may be combined in a single trunk group at the option of the Company T T C C T
75. disclosed in any form to anyone not involved in the audit nor is such information to be used for any other purpose 8 1 8 1 5 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 8 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 8 INFORMATION AND BILLING SERVICES RECORDING SERVICE Cont d DEFINITIONS Recording Completed The entering on magnetic tape or other media the details of messages originated through Switched Access Service for which answer and disconnect supervision has been received Recording is provided 24 hours a day 7 days a week Assembly and Editing with Provision of Message Detail The aggregation of the recorded message details to create individual messages verification that required data is present and the provision of this assembled message detail either on magnetic tape or other media Assembly and Editing without Provision of Message Detail The aggregation of the recorded message details to create individual messages and the verification that required data is present 8 1 8 1 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 8 Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 8 INFORMATION AND BILLING SERVICES RECORDING SERVICE Cont d RATE APPLICATION AND PROVISIONING PARAMETERS For each message recorded the Recording and the Assembly and Editing charges will apply whether or not the customer s schedule of ra
76. following or 2 provide the Company with a projected LATA level PIU factor via a quarterly jurisdictional report as set forth in b following Customers initially ordering Switched Access Services in the LATA for the first time shall provide on the access order a LATA level PIU factor for new EF and DTT facilities based on all the originating and terminating traffic using such facilities The Company will use the LATA level PIU factor from the customer s initial order for service as the LATA level PIU factor for the Company s mechanized program for the first quarter of new service only After the first quarter of new service the Company will develop the LATA level PIU factor as described in a following until the Company receives a certified letter from the customer authorizing the Company to develop the projected PIU factor from a customer provided report as set forth in b following The PIU factor for an EF DS3 capacity of two or more is applied at the same percentage as the reported or calculated EF PIU factor at the LATA level a Company Developed EF and DTT PIU Factor The Company developed LATA level PIU factors for EF and DTT facilities are updated on a quarterly basis by calculating the customer s average billed Interstate usage excluding VG EF and DTT facilities for FGA for the last three months The Company will perform the calculation for the revised LATA level PIU factor no later than the last business day in January April Ju
77. for damages to the customer s premises resulting from the furnishing of a service including the installation and removal of equipment and associated wiring unless the damage is caused by the Company s negligence 2 1 2 1 4 2 1 5 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 5 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY Cont d PROVISION OF SERVICES The Company to the extent that such services are or can be made available with reasonable effort and after provision has been made for the Company s telephone exchange services will provide to the customer upon reasonable notice services offered in other applicable sections of this Tariff at rates and charges specified therein INSTALLATION AND TERMINATION OF SERVICES The services provided under this Tariff a will include any entrance cable or drop wiring to that point where provision is made for termination of the Company s outside distribution network facilities at a suitable location at a customer designated premises and b will be installed by the Company to such Point of Termination POT Access Service has only one POT per customer premises Any additional terminations beyond such POT are the sole responsibility of the customer T T T 2 1 2 1 6 2 1 7 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 6 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10
78. for initial coin return control and routing of 00 00 0 O 1 prefixed originating operator assisted coin and non coin calls requiring operator assistance to the customer s premises Because operator assisted coin and non coin calling traffic is routed over a trunk group dedicated to operator assisted calls this arrangement is only provided in association with the Service Class Routing option b This arrangement is normally ordered by the customer in conjunction with the ANI optional feature since the preponderance of trunk groups equipped with this arrangement will be terminated in the customer s operator services systems rather than in the customer s manual cord boards When so equipped the ANI optional feature provides for the forwarding of information digits which identify that the call has originated from a hotel or motel and whether room number identification is required or that special screening is required e g for coinless pay telephones dormitory or inmate stations or other screening arrangements agreed to between the customer and the Company B Operator Trunk Full Feature This option provides the operator control functions available in the end office to the customer s operator These functions are 1 Operator Released 2 Operator Attached 3 Coin Collect 4 Coin Return and 5 Ringback It is available with FGD and is provided as a trunk type of Transport Termination This option is not available with SS7 O
79. forth in Section 4 of the Exchange and Network Services Tariff and are in addition to the regulations rates and charges specified in this Tariff Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER D A Switched Access Service When a customer requests new or additional Switched Access Services one or more access orders may be required The number of orders required is dependent on the type of services and or facilities being requested When placing an order for Lineside or Trunkside Switched Access Service the T customer shall specify at a minimum the following e The type of Entrance Facility EF as described in 1 following e The type of Direct Trunked Transport DTT facility for both direct routed and tandem routed traffic as described in 2 following e The number of lines and or trunks as described in 3 and 4 following e The basic Lineside or Trunkside Switched Access Service arrangement information as described in 3 and 4 following respectively T 1 When the customer orders an EF for Switched Access Service as described in 6 1 2 following the customer must specify the customer designated premises T and the type of facility DS3 DS1 or Voice Grade being requested between the customer s premises and the serving wire center SWC of that premises The custom
80. has placed an order for service with all the appropriate information to allow for the processing of the Access Order The date on which the Service Date is established is the Application Date Order Date The time required to provision the service i e the interval between the Application Date and the Service Date is known as the Service Date Interval The Service Date Interval is established in accordance with 5 2 1 following The Company will provide a firm order confirmation to the customer advising the customer the Application Date and the associated Service Date Intervals for the Access Order Access Order firm order confirmations where possible will reflect the customer s requested Service Date T T T 5 1 5 1 2 A 5 1 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES GENERAL Cont d PROVISION OF OTHER SERVICES In addition to Switched Access Services other services offered under the provisions of this Tariff shall be ordered with an Access Order or as set forth in B following The rates and charges for these services as set forth in other sections of this Tariff will apply in addition to the ordering charges set forth in this section and the rates and charges for the Access Service with which they are associated With the agreement of the Company other services set forth in
81. in conjunction with WATS Access Service shall be ordered as set forth in this section For WATS Access Service provided on a Shared WATS basis i e intrastate interLATA and intrastate intraLATA the service will be provided jointly by the Company and an Interexchange Carrier The WATS access line is provided subject to the terms and conditions of the Company s Exchange and Network Services Catalog Section 7 The Company provides the WATS access line transports the intraLATA traffic and bills both the WATS access line and intraLATA usage to the end user out of the Company s Exchange and Network Services Catalog The Interexchange Carrier transports the interLATA traffic and bills interLATA usage to the end user at the IC s applicable WATS usage rates The intrastate FGC or FGD Switched Access Service provided in conjunction with WATS Access Service shall be ordered as set forth in this section For 800 service provided on a Complementary basis i e intrastate interLATA and intrastate intraLATA the service may be provided jointly by the Company and an Interexchange Carrier The 800 Service Number is provided subject to the terms and conditions of the Company s Exchange and Network Services Catalog Section 7 The Company provides the 800 Service Number to be associated with an individual line or trunk transports the intraLATA traffic and bills both the 800 Service Number and intraLATA usage to the end user out of the Company s Exchange and Netwo
82. information shall be delivered to the Company at a location specified by the Company no later than 15 days after the bill date shown on the resold MTS and or MTS type service bill If the required information is not received by the Company the previously reported information as described preceding will be used for the next two months For any subsequent month no allocation or credit will be made until the required documentation is delivered to the Company by the customer T T 3 6 3 6 3 3 6 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 6 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE RESOLD MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S Cont d RESALE DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED BY THE CUSTOMER When the customer utilizes Switched Access Service as set forth in 3 6 2 preceding the Company may request a certified copy of the customer s resold MTS and or MTS type usage billing from either the customer or the provider of the MTS and or MTS type service Requests for billing will relate back no more than 12 months prior to the current billing period RATE REGULATIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S When the customer is provided an access group to be used in conjunction with the resale of MTS and or MTS type service s as set forth in 3 6 1 preceding subject to the limitations as set forth in 3 2 preceding and the Company receive
83. is provided by more than one Telephone Company the Companies involved in providing the joint service may individually or collectively deny service if technically feasible to a customer for nonpayment When the Telephone Company affected by the nonpayment is incapable of instituting a service denial without cooperation from the other joint provider s such other Telephone Company may request assistance in denying the jointly provided service Service denial for such joint service will only include calls which originate or terminate within or transit the operating territory of the Telephone Company Companies initiating the service denial for nonpayment The Telephone Company assisting in the service denial will notify the customer with thirty 30 days written notice by Certified U S Mail after receiving a written request from the affected Telephone Company The tariff regulations of the end office Telephone Company shall apply for instituting service denial for a jointly provided service Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 9 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 1 UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY Cont d 2 1 9 LIMITATION OF USE OF METALLIC FACILITIES Signals applied to a metallic facility shall conform to the limitations set forth in Technical Reference Publication AS No 1 2 1 2 1 10 2 1 11 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Pa
84. met the customer must order Lineside or Trunkside Service at the same time the DTT facility is ordered as set forth in 3 and 4 following T When tandem routing is to be utilized for Trunkside Access a DTT facility is C required between the SWC and the access tandem and TST common transport is required between the access tandem and all the end offices subtending that tandem The TST common transport facilities are provided by the Company based on the number of trunks being requested by the customer as set forth in 4 following C 3 When the customer orders Lineside Switched Access Service the customer must T have capacity available on an existing EF and or DTT facility with compatible interfaces or request an EF and or DTT facility as described in 1 and 2 preceding Tandem routing is not available for Lineside Switched Access When C the EF and or DTT facility is existing the customer shall provide the CFA of the facility to be utilized The customer shall also specify the number of lines the first point of switching i e dial tone office the directionality of the service and the Switched Transport and Local Switching options desired When additional T information is required either to apply credits or to measure and bill Lineside Service properly the customer shall specify whether the ordered line s will be used for resale purposes or not for resale purposes When the service is for resale purposes the customer sha
85. number of calls or minutes or a report of the percent of calls or minutes that terminate in a Switched Access Service that is assessed Carrier Common Line Access rates When the customer makes this report available to the Company in advance of billing these minutes of use will be charged on the current bill as originating minutes of use as set forth in C following If a billing dispute arises concerning T the customer provided report the Company will request the customer to provide the data the customer used to develop the report The Company will not request such data more than once a year The customer shall supply the data within 30 days of the Company request M1 M Material moved to Page 11 M1 Material moved from Page 14 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 13 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE 3 8 RATE REGULATIONS 3 8 5 DETERMINATION OF PREMIUM AND TRANSITIONAL RATES B Cont d When this report is not available to the Company until after billing it shall be used by the Company to calculate and post a credit to the customer s account The credit shall be posted to the customer s account within 30 days of receipt of the report The credit shall be calculated by multiplying the number of access minutes of use for which a credit is determined to be applicable times the difference between the terminating and originating
86. office switch A common line residence is a line or trunk provided under the residence regulations of the Exchange and Network Services Tariff A common line business is a line provided under the business regulations of the Exchange and Network Services Tariff Communications Systems The term Communications Systems denotes channels and other facilities which are capable of communications between terminal equipment provided by other than the Company Customer s The term customer s denotes any individual partnership association joint stock company trust corporation governmental entity or any other entity which subscribes to the services offered under this Tariff including both Interexchange Carriers ICs and end users Data Transmission 107 Type Test Line The term Data Transmission 107 Type Test Line denotes an arrangement which provides for a connection to a signal source which provides test signals for one way testing of data and voice transmission parameters T T T T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 64 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Decibel dB The term Decibel denotes a unit of signal power used to express the relationship between two signal powers usually between acoustic electric or optical signals equal to ten 10 times the common logarithm of the
87. or 1 950 XXXX access codes local operator assistance Q and 0 Directory Assistance and service codes 611 and 911 FGD may not be switched in the terminating direction to another Trunkside Switched Access Service 6 The Company will establish a trunk group or groups for the customer at end office switches or access tandem switches where FGD switching is provided When required by technical limitations or in the case of SWITCHNET 56 a separate trunk group will be established for each type of FGD switching arrangement provided Different types of FGD or other switching arrangements may be combined in a single trunk group at the option of the Company 7 The uniform access code for FGD switching is 101XXXX These uniform access codes will be the assigned access numbers of all FGD access provided to the customer by the Company No access code is required for calls to a customer over FGD Switched Access Service if the end user s telephone exchange service is arranged for presubscription as set forth in Section 13 following T T C C C T T T T T T 6 2 6 2 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 50 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP D FGD A 7 Cont d 10 Where no access code is required the number dialed by the customer s en
88. or customer providing a portion of a service nor shall the Company for its own act or omission hold liable any other carrier or customer providing a portion of a service 2 The Company shall be indemnified defended and held harmless by the end user or IC against any claim loss or damage arising from the end user s or IC s use of services offered under this Tariff involving Claims for libel slander invasion of privacy or infringement of copyright arising from the end user s or IC s own communications Claims for patent infringement arising from the end user s acts combining or using the service furnished by the Company in connection with facilities or equipment furnished by the end user or IC or All other claims arising out of any act or omission of the end user in the course of using services provided pursuant to this Tariff No license under patents other than the limited license to use is granted by the Company or shall be implied or arise by estoppel with respect to any service offered under this Tariff The Company will defend the customer against claims of patent infringement arising solely from the use by the customer of services offered under this Tariff and will indemnify such customer for any damages awarded based solely on such claims The Company s failure to provide or maintain services under this Tariff shall be excused by labor difficulties governmental orders civil commotions criminal actions ta
89. or a different exchange or in the same or different LATA The extensions are charged for under the Company s Private Line Transport Services Catalog MESSAGE UNIT CREDIT Calls from end users to the seven digit local telephone numbers associated with Lineside Switched Access Service may be subject to Company local and or general exchange service tariff charges including message unit and toll charges as applicable as well as any other applicable charges for the Access Service The monthly bills rendered to customers for their Lineside Switched Access Service for which Carrier Common Line rates apply will include a credit to reflect any message unit charges collected from their end users under the Company s local and or general exchange service tariffs The credit will apply for recorded originating usage or for assumed originating usage as appropriate for the Lineside service provided When the credit is applied on assumed usage such credit will not exceed the assumed levels of usage set forth in 6 7 7 preceding No Message Unit Credit will apply for any terminating Lineside Access minutes The Message Unit Credit for originating FGA Access minutes is set forth in 6 8 following LOCAL INFORMATION DELIVERY SERVICES Calls over Switched Access in the terminating direction to certain community information services will be rated under the applicable rates for Switched Access Service as set forth in 6 8 following In addition non access charges
90. paths Compatible Interface Groups are described in 3 following DS3 Facility DS3 facilities are available for Entrance Facilities and DTT facilities A DS3 facility is capable of transmitting electrical signals at a nominal 44 736 Mbps with the capability to channelize up to 672 voice frequency transmission paths Compatible Interface Groups are described in 3 following T C C T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 17 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES 2 Cont d d Hubbing Hubbing arrangements requested from the SWC to a hub location or from one hub location to a different hub location shall be ordered out of this section as DTT for Switched Access only Hubbing arrangements ordered from Section 7 of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 for the provision of Shared Use services can be utilized for both PLTS and Switched Access Service When the SWC is in the same wire center building as an end office access tandem and or hub the customer must order DTT from the SWC as set forth in 1 and 2 preceding A multiplexing function performed in the SWC for an EF is not a hubbing arrangement A hub is a Company designated wire center other than the SWC at which multiplexing functions are performed Hubbing allows the customer to terminate a DTT facility to a hub so that the fac
91. paths in a trunk group in order to limit choke the completion of such traffic to the customer Calls to the designated service which could not be completed over the subset of transmission paths in the trunk group i e the choked calls would be routed to reorder tone It is provided in all Company electronic end offices and where available in electromechanical end offices It is available with FGC and FGD O SWITCHNET 56 Service Switching Capability This option allows for a connection between the customer s premises and a suitably equipped end users premises utilizing end office and or access tandem switching capable of transmitting 56 kbps digital data SWITCHNET 56 Service is available in conjunction with FGD from suitably equipped electronic end offices and or access tandems When SWITCHNET 56 Service is ordered in conjunction with FGD it requires the use of a separate trunk group equipped with Interface Group 6 When SWITCHNET 56 is used with FGD the standard FGD dialing pattern is used This dialing pattern may vary according to the technology implemented in each specific Company end office and or access tandem i e dialing 56 may be required dependent upon the switching technology T T T T T 6 3 6 3 1 P Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 71 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERM
92. permits customers with multiple POTs within a tandem serving area to balance the call volume within their respective networks MPTS may be used in conjunction with the Common Switching Optional Feature Service Class Routing e g 8XX 900 Operator as specified in 6 3 1 following with the exception of SWITCHNET End offices subtending the tandem serving area will be divided into sectors referred to as Feature Group C and D Tandem Sectors which will be defined by the Company Each Tandem Sector must be treated as a unit and cannot be subdivided Tandem Sectors are standard for all customers who purchase MPTS MPTS must be ordered to every sector of an access tandem A customer with multiple POTs within the tandem serving area can designate to which POT the traffic from a specific Tandem Sector will be routed For example a customer with multiple POTs can request that all originating calls from a Tandem Sector be directed to a single POT In addition originating traffic from a different Tandem Sector could be routed to the same POT or a different POT as designated by the customer D T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 26 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES A d Cont d Tandem routed traffic can be delivered to a minimum number of two POTs and a maximum number of POTs that is less than or equal to the number of Ta
93. preceding b Customer Provided EF and DTT PIU Factor Customers who choose to provide a projected LATA level PIU factor for EF and DTT facilities shall notify the Company by letter certified U S Mail return receipt requested authorizing the Company to develop the projected LATA level PIU factor from a customer provided quarterly report Customer s choosing to provide a projected LATA level PIU factor shall base the PIU factor on all the originating and terminating traffic using the EF and DTT facilities in the LATA The customer provided jurisdictional report must be received by the Company no later than fourteen 14 days after the first of January April July and October in order for the customer provided PIU factor to serve as the basis for the next three month s advance billing beginning in February May August and November respectively The Company will program the customer provided revised PIU factor into the Company s billing data base no later than the last business day in January April July and October respectively If the customer does not provide the jurisdictional report in time for the Company to program the billing data base the Company will continue to develop a LATA level PIU factor for the quarter as the Company s billing data base can only be programmed with one PIU process at a time in the same quarter T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 23 State of South Dakota Release 2 I
94. pulsing signal from the customer It is available with FGC Dial Pulse Address Signaling This trunkside option provides for the transmission of number information e g called number between the end office switching system and the customer s premises by means of direct current pulses It is available with FGC Service Class Routing This option provides the capability of directing originating traffic from an end office to a trunk group to a customer designated premises based on the line class of service e g coin multiparty or hotel motel service prefix indicator e g 00 00 O O 1 01 or O11 or service access code e g 8XX or 900 A customer may direct all originating calls from an end office to a tandem trunk group to a single customer POT or multiple POTs when ordered with MPTS as referred to in 6 1 2 preceding based on the line class of service service prefix indicator or service access code It is provided in suitably equipped end office or access tandem switches and is available with FGC and FGD based on technical limitations T T T T T 6 3 6 3 1 M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 69 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d Alternate Traffic Routing The types of Alternate Traffic Ro
95. routed directly to the end office or via an access tandem The standard parameter limits for the transmission types are set forth in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE Serving arrangements are arranged for either originating terminating or two way calling based on the customer end office switching capacity ordered Originating calling permits the delivery of calls from Telephone Exchange Service locations to the customer s premises Terminating calling permits the delivery of calls from the customer s premises to Telephone Exchange Service locations Two way calling permits the delivery of calls in both directions but not simultaneously The Company will determine the type of calling to be provided unless the customer requests that a different type of directional calling is to be provided In such cases the Company will work cooperatively with the customer to determine the directionality There are various optional features available with the Switched Access Service These additional optional features are provided as Switched Transport Common Switching Transport Termination and Line Termination Following are detailed descriptions of each of the available Switched Access Services Each Service is described in terms of its specific physical characteristics and calling patterns the transport provisioning the transmission specifications with which it is provided the optional features available for use with it and the standard testing capabilitie
96. routed in accordance with SMS 800 information residing in the Company s Service Control Point SCP The customer has the option of having the dialed 800 number i e 8X X NXX XXXX or the translated Plain Old Telephone Service POTS number i e NPA NXX XXXX delivered If the translated POTS number is delivered the customer must request the POTS Translation vertical feature through the Responsible Organization as described in B following The service provider will be unable to determine that such calls originated as 1 8XX NXX XXXX dialed calls unless the customer also orders the Automatic Number Identification ANI feature through the Company as described in 6 3 1 following 800 DB Access Service provided from an equal access end office will be provisioned from the SSP switch as FGD Calls originating from end offices not equipped with equal access capabilities will be converted at the SSP switch to standard FGD format When the customer orders 800 DB Access Service for the transmission of both voice and data traffic the customer must order Clear Channel Capability CCC for provisioning of its data traffic The customer s 8XX traffic may be combined in the same trunk group arrangement with the customer s non 800 Access Service traffic or provisioned on a separate trunk group unless prohibited by technical limitations T T T T T T N N T T 6 2 6 2 8 A 1 Qwest Corporation Access Se
97. that Expedited Order Charges as set forth in D following will apply B Partial Cancellation Charge Any decrease in the number of ordered Switched Access Service facilities lines or trunks will be treated as a partial cancellation and the charges as set forth in 5 2 3 following will apply C C 5 2 5 2 2 C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 15 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER ACCESS ORDER MODIFICATIONS Cont d Design Change Charge The customer may request a design change to the service ordered A design change is any change to an Access Order which requires engineering review An engineering review is a review by Company personnel of the service ordered and the requested changes to determine what change in the design if any is necessary to meet the changes requested by the customer Design changes include such things as a change of end user s premises within the same SWC the addition or deletion of optional features or functions a change in the type of Transport Termination type of channel interface type of Interface Group or technical specification package Design changes do not include a change of customer s premises end user s premises to a different SWC end office switch or Switched Access Service type Changes of this nature will require the issuance of a new order and the cancell
98. that tandem Switching System The term Switching System denotes the hardware and or software utilized by the Company for the establishment and maintenance of a given central office Synchronous Test Line The term Synchronous Test Line denotes an arrangement in an end office which performs marginal operational tests of supervisory and ring tripping functions Tandem Switched Transport TST The term Tandem Switched Transport denotes the transport between an access tandem and end offices that subtend the access tandem that utilizes tandem switching functions Tandem Switched Transport consists of circuits used in common by multiple customers from the tandem to an end office Terminating Direction The term Terminating Direction denotes the use of Access Service for the completion of calls from a customer s premises to an end user s premises Toll VoIP PSTN Traffic The term Toll VoIP PSTN Traffic denotes a customer s interexchange voice traffic exchanged with the Telephone Company in Time Division Multiplexing format over PSTN facilities which originates and or terminates in Internet Protocol IP format Toll VoIP PSTN Traffic originates and or terminates in IP format when it originates from and or terminates to an end user customer of a service that requires P compatible customer premises equipment Traffic Types The term Traffic Types denotes one of five Switched Access capacity types They are orig
99. the PIU takes priority and the balance 100 PIU will be defaulted to POM The Company will designate the number obtained by subtracting the projected PIU and POM factors furnished by the customer from 100 as the projected intrastate percentage of use The projected PIU factor is used by the Company to apportion the message monthly and nonrecurring charges associated with the CCS Link STP Port CCSAC Entrance Facility and Direct Link Transport between interstate and intrastate The projected PIU and POM are used to apportion the ISUP Call Set up requests as interstate intrastate and other for charging purposes ISUP Call Set up requests reported as POM will not be charged provided that if the customer charges the Company for ISUP Call Set up requests for Company originated traffic the Company may charge the customer for ISUP Call Set up requests associated with customer originated traffic in the same categories of traffic billed by the customer i e local EAS intraMTA Local Exchange Company portion of jointly provided switched access or Company originated toll traffic If a customer does not provide a PIU factor the Company will apply a default PIU factor of fifty percent 50 If a customer does not provide a POM factor the Company will apply a default POM factor of zero percent 0 except in those instances where the Company fails to provide the requested data described above with respect to the initial submission of the POM in a LAT
100. trunks being requested as set forth following Trunkside Switched Access Service must be ordered in trunks The customer is responsible to assure that sufficient access facilities have been ordered to handle its traffic On the order for service the customer shall specify the number of trunks the end office if direct routing or tandem routing is desired Switched Transport options and Local Switching options desired C 5 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 7 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER A 4 Cont d The number of trunks may be determined by the customer in the following manner For each day the customer shall determine the highest number of trunks required to handle its traffic during a single hour The customer shall for the same hour period i e busy hour pick the twenty consecutive business days in a calendar year which add up to the largest number of trunks required to handle its traffic The customer shall then determine the average busy hour trunks by dividing the largest number of trunks in use figure for the same hour period for the consecutive twenty business day period by 20 This computation shall be performed for each end office and or access tandem the customer wishes to serve When ordering trunks to an access tandem the customer must also provide the Company an estimate of the amoun
101. will also apply in accordance with the Information Provider s applicable service rates when the Company performs the billing function for that Information Provider T T T T T 6 7 6 7 11 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 132 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS Cont d MILEAGE MEASUREMENT The mileage to be used to determine the Switched Transport rate for direct routed traffic via DTT is calculated on the airline distance between the end office switch or the SWC of a Mobile Telephone Switching Office MTSO where the call originates or terminates and the customer s SWC For tandem routed traffic DTT is calculated from the access tandem to the customer s SWC and TST is calculated on the airline distance between the end office switch or the SWC of a MTSO where the call originates or terminates and the access tandem Exceptions for mileage measurement are as set forth following The V amp H coordinates method is used to determine mileage This method is set forth in the National Exchange Carrier Association Inc Tariff F C C No 4 for Wire Center Information V amp H coordinates Mileage is shown in 6 8 following in terms of mileage bands To determine the rate to be billed first compute the mileage using the V amp H coordinates method then find the band into which the computed mileage fall
102. with a one month minimum period is discontinued prior to the expiration of the minimum period a one month charge will apply at the rate level in effect at the time service is discontinued When a Switched Access service with a minimum period greater than one month is discontinued prior to the expiration of the minimum period the applicable charge will be the lesser of 1 the Company s total nonrecoverable costs less the net salvage value for the discontinued service or 2 the total monthly charges at the rate level in effect at the time service is discontinued for the remainder of the minimum period CANCELLATION OF AN ORDER FOR SERVICE Provisions for the cancellation of an order are set forth in Section 5 following CREDIT ALLOWANCE FOR SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS General A service is interrupted when it becomes unusable to the customer because of a failure of one or more facility components used to furnish service under this Tariff or in the event that the protective controls applied by the Company result in the complete loss of service by the customer as set forth in 6 5 1 following An interruption period starts when an inoperative service is reported to the Company and ends when the service is operative excluding the following e customer requested monitoring and e other times when the service or customer s premises is not available for testing or repair of the service T T N N 2 4 2 4 4 B 1 Qwest Corpo
103. 0 XXXX access code to be routed over FGD Access Service The customer is precluded from having originating 950 on FGD and originating FGB in the same end office utilizing the same 950 XXXX Customer Identification Code S Signaling System Seven SS7 Out of Band Signaling M This option provides SS7 Out of Band Signaling on a FGD transmission path group This option provides the customer the ability to use out of band signaling to set up trunks on a per call basis CCSAC Service as described in Section 20 T following is required between the customer s Signaling Point of Interface SPOD and the Company s Signal Transfer Point STP for SS7 Out of Band Signaling in each LATA SS7 Out of Band Signaling provides the automatic transmission of the following parameters e Access Transport Parameter ATP provides automatic transmission of information from the originating calling location through the Common Channel Signaling Network Information supplied using ATP may consist of one or more of the following Called Party Subaddress Calling Party Subaddress High and Low Layer Compatibility and Compatibility Checking by the called party s equipment ATP is available when FGD Service is equipped with SS7 T Out of Band Signaling and Clear Channel Capability e Calling Party Number CPN is the automatic transmission of the calling party s ten digit telephone number to the customer s premises for calls originating in the LATA The ten digit num
104. 0 percent When jointly provisioned access service is provided between the Company and another Exchange Telephone Company or when the Company is the intermediate non terminating carrier the appropriate nonrecurring charges shall apply The BP is not applied to nonrecurring charges C C C C N N T T C C T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 51 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 4 PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES 2 4 7 ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED Cont d G Example Switched Access provisioned by Direct Trunked Transport and C Tandem Switched Transport Exchange Telephone Company A Exchange Telephone Company B DS1 DTT EO AT Access Tandem BP Billing Percentage CL Common Line CP Customer s Premises DIT Direct Trunked Transport EF Entrance Facility EO End Office EU End User LS Local Switching MUX EF Multiplexer SWC Serving Wire Center TS Tandem Switching TT Tandem Transmission C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 52 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 4 PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES 2 4 7 ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MO
105. 000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES D 3 Cont d c Where originating and or terminating recording capability does not exist for FGA or FGB provided to an entry switch the number of access minutes will be assumed as set forth in 6 7 7 following The Company will provide written notification to all access customers of record within a particular LATA that an end office in that LATA is scheduled to be converted to an equal access end office This notification will be sent via certified U S Mail to each customer of record in the LATA where the conversion is scheduled to occur at least six months in advance of the conversion date The customer will have the choice of converting existing services to equal access i e originating and terminating Feature Group D at no charge pursuant to the conditions set forth in 6 7 5 following or retaining the existing services Premium rates will apply to all access minutes beginning on the actual conversion date of an end office 4 Where Switched Access Service is provided in conjunction with a CMRS provider and the regulations as set forth in 2 4 8 preceding apply the Company will apply the premium Interconnection Charge when the Company does not provide end office local switching functions If the Company provides end office local switching functions then the specific application of premium and tra
106. 000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 11 MILEAGE MEASUREMENT Cont d B When the customer orders Access Service via DTT to a host for access to a remote switching system or module RSS or RSM both DTT and Tandem Transmission rates apply as set forth in 6 7 1 preceding Mileage for DTT is calculated on an airline basis between the SWC of the customer s premises or Company Hub whichever is applicable and the host office for the RSS or RSM Mileage for Tandem Transmission is calculated between the host office and the RSS or RSM When the customer orders TST from an access tandem to a host or access to a RSS or RSM mileage for Tandem Transmission is calculated between the access tandem and the host office and then a second mileage measurement is calculated between the host office and the RSS or RSM C When the Switched Transport for Switched Access Service is provided by the Company and the end user connection is provided by a CMRS provider mileage for Access will be calculated on an airline basis using the V amp H coordinate method as set forth in this section based on tandem or direct routing The SWC of the MTSO functions as the end office for mileage calculations D When jointly provisioned Switched Access Service is provided between the Company and another Exchange Telephone Company in conjunction with 800 DB Access Service and ANI cannot be identified the Company and the other Exchange T
107. 1 DTT 100 of DS1 monthly DTT rate Tandem Switching MOU rate X MOU Tandem Transmission Fixed rate X MOU X BP Tandem Transmission Per mile rate X number of miles X MOU X BP b Exchange Telephone Company B Tandem Transport Transport rate X MOU X BP Local Switching MOU rate X MOU Carrier Common Line MOU rate X MOU C C T C N T T T T 2 4 2 4 8 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 54 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES Cont d ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF SWITCHED ACCESS PROVIDED IN CONJUNCTION WITH A COMMERCIAL MOBILE RADIO SERVICE PROVIDER When Switched Access Service is ordered by a customer in conjunction with a Commercial Mobile Radio Service provider the Company will provide its portion of the Switched Access Service based on the regulations rates and charges contained in this Tariff subject to the following rules If the Company and the Commercial Mobile Radio Service provider have agreed to jointly provide the Switched Access Service the Meet Point Billing provisions as set forth in 2 4 7 preceding shall determine the ordering rating and billing for access services If the Company and the Commercial Mobile Radio Service provider have not agreed to jointly provide the Switched Access Service under the provisions of Meet Point Billing th
108. 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES ccsseccccccsceccccscececcescececsesceceaseeecees 2 13 3 1 MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE s cccscecccccccssssssscscccccesssssesescceceeaees 2 13 3 2 RESTORATION PRIORITY ccssessececcccccesesssssceccccssesssecesessceseseues 3 13 3 3 INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER SUBSCRIPTION cccsseececeeseeseceeeee 3 13 3 5 TESTING SERVICES ccccccccccccccsssssscscccccceecsssssesccsecceseussscsccsseseees 8 13 3 6 PROVISION OF ACCESS SERVICE BILLING INFORMATION 12 13 3 7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PRIORITY SYSTEM 000 15 13 3 10 PEAK DAY REROUTING ccccccceeececcccccccecssesssceccsccsssenseseccesesanes 18 13 3 15 900 ACCESS SERVICE RESTRICTION ccsccceccccccccesesessscssceseseees 19 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES ic ecccccccesssssscscccccceessssssesccssccesesssssesccsscseseaeeeess 20 13 4 1 CHARGES FOR ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING cccccssessseeceeseeeeeees 20 13 4 2 CHARGES FOR ADDITIONAL LABOR csssseececcccccsseseseeescceseeeees 21 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE o eccccccccccssesessecesceceeenes 23 SECTION 14 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 11 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE SECTION 15 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION 16 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION 17 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION
109. 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY Cont d MAINTAINING SERVICES The services provided under this Tariff shall be maintained by the Company The customer or others may not rearrange move disconnect remove or attempt to repair any facilities provided by the Company other than by connection or disconnection to any interface means used except with the written consent of the Company CHANGES AND SUBSTITUTIONS Except as provided for equipment and systems subject to F C C Part 68 regulations at 47 C F R Section 68 110 b the Company may where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business a substitute change or rearrange any facilities used in providing service under this Tariff including but not limited to 1 substitution of different metallic facilities 2 substitution of carrier or derived facilities for metallic facilities used to provide other than metallic facilities and 3 substitution of metallic facilities for carrier or derived facilities used to provide other than metallic facilities b change minimum protection criteria c change operating or maintenance characteristics of facilities or d change operations or procedures of the Company In case of any such substitution change or rearrangement the transmission parameters will be within the range as set forth in Section 6 following The Company shall not be responsible if any such substitution
110. 18 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION 19 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 12 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE SECTION 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION cccccccccccssssssceccccceccsssssescccccecssseuessecessesesenes 1 20 2 SERVICE DESCRIPTION ccccccccccccsssssssecccccecssssssescceccessseeueeeecessesseanes 2 20 2 1 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ACCESS CAPABILITY COS AG ys s60555 ccodsiats A a et vast eevee 2 20 2 2 LINE INFORMATION DATA BASE LIDB cccecscccccceeeseeeerees 5 20 3 RATE CATEGORIES insere ea sos ae E a eats ide a ea 6 20 3 1 CCSAC RATE CATEGORIES AND APPLICATIONS 0cccecececeeeeees 6 20 3 2 LIDB RATE CATEGORIES AND APPLICATIONS ssseesesesceeeeeees 8 20 4 REPORT REQUIREMENTS cccsssescccccccccsesssescsccescsssensvsesccessessunenenss 8 20 4 1 CCSAC NETWORK MANAGEMENT ccsssssececcccceesssssescesceseeeees 8 20 5 ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS cccccececcccccccsssssscsccccsccssssesesccssesssessasesccsssessunenenss 8 20 5 1 ORDERING REQUIREMENTS cccssssssceccccccccesssssceccccceseusuesscececess 8 20 5 2 SERVICE PROVISIONING ccccssesssceccccccsssssssscscceccessessuescesceseseees 10 20 5 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ccccccccccscessssscsccccsesse
111. 24 Feature Group D trunks to ride a DS1 DTT facility to an end office Section 6 and specifies that the DS1 DTT facility be assigned to the DS3 PLTS facility for the associated Switched Access Entrance Facility Switched Access Service Rates and Charges 24 672 of the Switched DS3 Entrance Facility rate 100 Switched DS1 DTT facility rate 24 672 of the Switched DS3 DS1 Multiplexer rate PLTS Rates and Charges 648 672 of the PLTS DS3 Channel Termination 648 672 of the PLTS DS3 DS1 Multiplexer In the above example if the PLTS DS3 Service has Transport Channel mileage in addition to the Channel Termination the Switched DS1 DTT facility rate and the PLTS Transport Channel rate are also apportioned M Material moved from Page 92 M1 Material moved to Page 94 T M T M M1 2 7 2 7 3 2 7 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 94 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS SHARED USE REGULATIONS Cont d SWITCHED DS3 FACILITY WITH CCSAC SERVICE Shared Use may occur when Switched Access Service as set forth in Section 6 following and CCSAC Service as set forth in Section 20 following are provided over the same DS3 facility The DS3 facility must be ordered provided and rated from Section 6 until the customer chooses to use a portion of the facility for CCSAC Service When the customer chooses to use a portion of the available capa
112. 3 Page 25 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B Testing Services Cont d 2 Automatic Scheduled Testing AST The three tests as set forth in a following represent the minimum offering i e an order for testing must at a minimum consist of twelve 12 1004 Hz Tests per transmission path twelve 12 C Message Noise Tests per transmission path and one Return Loss Balance Test per transmission path per year The additional Tests as set forth in b following may be ordered by the customer at additional charges 60 days prior to the start of the customer prescribed schedule The customer also may specify a more frequent schedule of tests 60 days prior to the start of the customer prescribed schedule a Basic Tests 1 MONTHLY TO FIRST POINT OF SWITCHING USOC RATE e 1004 Hz Loss Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBGX 0 02 e C Message Noise Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBGX 0 02 e Return Loss Balance Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBGX 0 04 1 Subject to a one year minimum contract period and annually thereafter Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 26 State of S
113. 33 dBrncO 51 to 100 39 dBrncO 101 to 200 41 dBrncO 201 to 400 43 dBrncO 401 to 1000 45 dBrncO T 4 C Notched Noise The maximum C Notched Noise measured with 16 dBm0 holding tone applied T is less than or equal to 47 dBrnc0 M 5 Echo Control M1 Echo Control for Transmission Type C performance is measured at the POT to T the first point of switching FPOS The Immediate Action Limits expressed as Echo Return Loss ERL and Singing Return Loss SRL are not specified T M1 M2 M Material moved from Page 83 M1 Material moved from Page 84 M2 Material moved to Page 87 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 87 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS Cont d 6 4 2 VOICE BAND DATA TRANSMISSION PARAMETER LIMITS T M Voice band data transmission parameter limits type DA1 DB and DBI are specified as Immediate Action Limits Restoral Limits and Service Affecting Limits Voice band data parameters apply from the POT to the first point of switching for FGA or FGB and to each segment between the POT and the EO for FGC or FGD service Specific application for Switched Access Services and Interface Groups with which the voice band data transmission parameter limits are provided are set forth in 6 2 preceding The Company will work cooperatively with the customer to achieve the voice band data param
114. 9 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 6 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS Cont d dc Direct current DD Service Date DLRD Design Layout Report Date DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency DTT Dhirect Trunked Transport EDD Envelope Delay Distortion EF Entrance Facility EI Expanded Interconnection EICT Expanded Interconnection Channel Termination ELEPL Equal Level Echo Path Loss EML Expected Measured Loss EO End Office EPL Echo Path Loss ERL Echo Return Loss ESS Electronic Switching System ESSX Electronic Switching System Exchange EU End User f Frequency F C C Federal Communications Commission FGA Feature Group A FGB Feature Group B FGC Feature Group C FGD Feature Group D FID Field Identifier FSPOI Facility Signaling Point of Interconnection N FX Foreign Exchange HC High Capacity Hz Hertz IAM Initial Address Message IC Interexchange Carrier ICB Individual Case Basis ICL Inserted Connection Loss ISUP Integrated Services Digital Network User Part kbps Kilobits per second kHz Kilohertz LATA Local Access and Transport Area LIDB Line Information Data Base LOF Letter on File LS Local Switching Ma Miulliamperes Mbps Megabits per second MF Multifrequency MHz Megahertz Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 25 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 12 21 2011 Effective 01 21 2012 1 APPLICATION AND RE
115. 9 6 5 7 DETERMINATION OF NUMBER OF TRANSMISSION PATHG 90 6 5 8 DETERMINATION OF NUMBER OF END OFFICE TRANSPORT TERMINATIONS cccccccecececececececececeeeceseceeeeseueeeeas 90 6 5 9 DESIGN BLOCKING PROBABILITY 0 0cccscessssssssssssssssssssssseeees 91 6 5 10 END USER LINE AND USAGE INFORMATION DATA uu eeeeececceeee ee 93 6 6 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER cccccccececececececececececseseeceeeeeeess 94 6 6 1 ORDERING REQUIREMENTS ccssssescsccccccsesssssssecccccsssussssesececess 94 6 6 2 REPORT REQUIREMENTS ccccccccececscececececececececececsceseceeessseeueess 94 6 6 3 SUPERVISORY SIGNALING cccccccccceeeseseseseseseseseseseseseseseceeeeeeees 95 6 6 4 TRUNK GROUP MEASUREMENT REPORTS 00s0sesesseeeesessseseeees 95 6 6 5 DESIGN OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICES c0scssssessesssessssseeees 95 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS orei Bettany Bieta heats Bee ic oe 96 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES 96 6 7 2 MINIMUM PERIODS EEA A T 119 6 7 3 MINIMUM MONTHLY CHARGE cccccesesesssseessssssssesssssssseesessses 119 6 7 4 CHANGE OF SWITCHED ACCESS INTERFACE GROUP CATEGORY A A EE A E toa ee E 119 6 7 5 CHANGE OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE TYPE sssccecescceeeeees 121 6 7 6 MOVES wees cca hese cone a cack wa eg ale dads een tase bedte ed dee ees 122 6 7 7 MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES cccccccececscececececececececeeeeesuseeess 124 6 7 8 APPLICATION OF RATES FOR EX
116. A in which case the Company will apply a default CCSAC POM equal to the number obtained by subtracting the declared CCSAC PIU from 100 The PIU and POM factors will be used by the Company until a revised PIU or POM factor is reported as set forth in C following A LATA level PIU and POM factor shall be provided for CCSAC Service provided within a LATA for the revised reports M Material moved from Page 25 M M C M C M M C M C M M M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 26 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B Jurisdictional Requirements Cont d 7 Billing Name and Address Service When a customer orders Billing Name and Address Service the customer shall state in its order the PIU factor in a whole number i e a number of 0 100 The Company will designate the number obtained by subtracting the PIU factor furnished by the customer from 100 as the projected intrastate percentage of use This percentage will remain in effect until a revised jurisdictional report is received as set forth in C following C Jurisdictional Reports 1 Percent Interstate Use PIU Factor Except where Company measured access minutes are used as set forth in B 2 preceding the customer provided PIU factor will be used until the customer reports a d
117. ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER SUBSCRIPTION B Cont d C 4 Cancellation of Interexchange Participation for IC Subscription If an IC elects to discontinue all of its Feature Group D service in an end office prior to the conversion date or after the introduction of Feature Group D in the converting end office the IC is obligated to do the following e Notify the Company of the cancellation of their Feature Group D service and e Contact all end users or PSPs that are presubscribed to the canceling IC as their primary IC Inform these end users or PSPs of the cancellation and request that the end users or PSPs contact the Company to select a new primary IC The Company will bill the canceling IC the service order charge described in C following for each end user or PSP that this IC has currently predesignated to them Such charge will not apply to the canceling IC where the canceling IC transfers or assigns its Feature Group D services and the associated 101XXXX code to another IC in such a manner that the Company does not change the end users or PSPs records or the end users or PSPs PIC designation or if another IC elects to pay the service order charge on behalf of the canceling IC IC Initiated Conversions for IC Subscription When an IC requests that their end user or PSP be changed from one access code to another access code o
118. AP messages are used to carry information between signaling points for call related database services CCSAC acts as a platform for the following applications The customer s SPOI and the Company s STP or FSPOI wire center must be located within the same LATA Call Set Up This application provides the customer the capability to send originating and terminating call set up signaling information via ISUP messages between the customer s designated premises the Company s STP and other entities in association with message telecommunications service Call Set Up may be associated with calls that utilize the Company s switched access network or may be associated with calls that do not utilize the Company s switched access network If the message trunks are provided by the Company the customer must order the associated FGD trunks with SS7 Out of Band Signaling option as set forth in Section 6 preceding Call Set Up associated with calls that do not utilize the Company s switched access network is referred to as transient call set up and the customer must have message trunks with SS7 capabilities CCSAC Service as set forth in this section is required to provide both capabilities C C C Tariff SECTION 20 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued March 11 2005 Effective May 17 2005 20 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN GENERAL DESCRIPTION A Common Channel Sig
119. Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 36 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES PAYMENT OF RATES CHARGES AND DEPOSITS The Company will in order to safeguard its interests only require a customer who has a proven history of late payments to the Company or does not have established credit to make a deposit prior to or at any time after the provision of service to the customer to be held by the Company as a guarantee of the payment of rates and charges No such deposit will be required of a customer which is a successor of a company which has established credit and has no history of late payments to the Company Such deposit may not exceed the actual or estimated rates and charges for the service for a two month period The fact that a deposit has been made in no way relieves the customer from complying with the Company s regulations as to the prompt payment of bills At such time as the provision of the service to the customer is terminated the amount of the deposit will be credited to the customer s account and any credit balance which may remain will be refunded Such a deposit will be refunded or credited to the account when the customer has established credit or in any event after the customer has established a one year prompt payment record at any time prior to the termination of the provision of the service to the customer In case of a ca
120. B Cut Through This option allows end users of the customer to reach the customer s premises by using the end of dialing digit This option provides for connection of the call to the premises of the customer indicated by the 101XXXX code upon receipt of the end of dialing digit The Company will not record any other dialed digits for these calls This option is available with FGD Delay Dial Start Pulsing Signaling This option provides a method of indicating to the near end trunk circuit readiness to accept address signaling information by the far end trunk circuit Delay dial is often referred to as an off hook on hook signaling sequence The delay dial signal is the off hook interval and the start pulsing signal is the on hook interval With integrity check the calling office will not outpulse until a delay dial off hook signal followed by a start pulsing on hook signal has been identified at the calling office This option is available with FGC D T T T 6 3 6 3 1 J Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 68 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d Immediate Dial Pulse Address Signaling This option provides for the forwarding of dial pulses from the Company end office to the customer without the need of a start
121. CCA3C FFA33 495 13 50 43 Over 25 to 50 CCA3D FFA34 477 76 73 42 Over 50 CCA3E FFA35 441 28 85 36 1 For Shared Use only as set forth in 2 7 preceding T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 20 State of South Dakota Release 9 Issued 5 22 2015 Effective 7 1 2015 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 8 RATES AND CHARGES A Common Channel Signaling Access Capability Cont d 3 CCS Link NONRECURRING MONTHLY USOC CHARGE RATE e First CCS Link NRBS1 NRME6 567 00 e Each additional NRBSA NRME7 180 00 4 STP PORT per port PT8SX 425 00 5 Multiplexing e DSI to Voice QMVXX FMCNX 587 65 e DS3 to DS1 1 QM3XX FMC5X 587 65 B Message Charge INTRASTATE OTHER RATE RATE 1 Signal Formulation e ISUP Per call set up request Originating 0 000829 Terminating 0 000339 R 2 Signal Transport e ISUP Per call set up request Originating 0 000559 Terminating 0 000229 R e TCAP Per data request 0 000418 3 Signal Switching e Per ISUP Per call set up request Originating 0 001162 Terminating 0 000475 R e Per TCAP Per data request 0 000460 1 For Shared Use only as set forth in 2 7 preceding Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 21 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 8 RATES AND CHARGES Cont d RATE PER QUERY C LIDB e Per
122. CELLANEOUS SERVICES INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER SUBSCRIPTION Cont d B Terms and Conditions Charge Application for IC Subscription End users or PSPs placing orders for new service will be asked to select a primary IC at the time they place an order with the Company for Exchange Service Switched Access Lineside connection Centrex type service or PAL Service There will be no charge for this selection Subsequent to the installation of Telephone Exchange Service Switched Access Lineside connection Centrex type service or PAL Service for any change in selection including a change from one access code to another access code for the same IC a nonrecurring charge applies When end users or PSPs simultaneously choose or change an intraLATA and interLATA primary IC a PIC change charge from CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 Section 13 will apply in addition to the applicable charge as set forth in D following The nonrecurring charge for a primary IC change is billed to the end user who is the subscriber to the Telephone Exchange Service Switched Access Lineside connection Centrex type service or to the PSP of PAL Service However an IC may at its option pay the charge for any end user and or PSP at any time or as prescribed by the Company when the IC has specified that the PIC change request is being made as the result of an end user PSP disputed PIC change reported to the alleged authorized carrier The nonr
123. CESS SERVICE 6 2 4 FEATURE GROUP D FGD A 11 a Cont d The Company will perform normal acceptance testing for sent paid services for Smart PALs In addition the Company will perform testing for coin control and Operator Trunk Full Feature i e coin collect coin return 1 person to person operator recall overtime and information calls Test tapes must be received from the customer that will be processing the 1 interLATA sent paid traffic 45 days prior to the routing of said 1 traffic to that customer The Company will provide optional testing at the request of the customer as set forth in Section 13 following b Basic PAL For traffic originating from a Basic PAL the Company shall provide 1 interLATA sent paid access from equal access end offices to the customer s premises via FGD trunks For traffic originating from a Basic PAL dialed as 1 and or 101XXXX 1 the customer to whom such calls are routed shall order or have existing FGD trunks with ANI optional feature as set forth in 6 3 1 following Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 53 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 4 FEATURE GROUP D FGD Cont d B Optional Features 1 Switched Transport Optional Features e Supervisory Signaling e MPTS 2 Common Switching Optional Features e Automatic Number Identification
124. CHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES D 3 Cont d a All access minutes that originate from or terminate at the equal access end 1 2 office s will be billed at premium rates Access minutes that originate from or terminate at end offices not equipped with equal access capabilities hereinafter referred to as non premium access minutes will continue to be billed at transitional rates Transitional rates will apply as follows The number of non premium access minutes to be billed at transitional rates is derived by subtracting the number of premium rated access minutes from the total number of access minutes Premium access minutes will be determined as set forth in b following b The number of access minutes to be rated as premium access minutes is 2 determined as follows Where measurement capability exists and end office specific usage data is available premium rates will apply to all access minutes originating from or terminating at equal access end offices Where measurement capability does not exist and or end office specific usage data is not available originating and or terminating usage will be apportioned between premium and non premium usage as described following The usage to be apportioned will be the recorded usage or the assumed usage as set forth in 3 c and 6 7 7 following Such apportionment will be based on the ratio of th
125. Company will implement the revised interstate percentage to the next billing period or quarterly report date whichever is first M M Material moved to Pages 27 and 28 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 31 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS D Jurisdictional Report Disputes And Auditing Procedures Cont d 2 Access Service Billing For Access Service Billing as described in 13 3 6 the Company will ask the customer to provide the data the customer uses to determine the projected interstate percentage if a billing dispute arises or a regulatory commission questions the customer provided interstate percentage The customer shall supply the data within thirty 30 days of the Company request The Company will not request such data more than once a year The customer shall keep records of system design and functions from which the percentage of interstate and intrastate use can be ascertained and upon request of the Company make the records available for inspection as reasonably necessary for purposes of verification of the percentages 3 Jurisdictional Report Proprietary Information The data the customer provides to the Company to support their interstate percentage is considered proprietary to the customer The Company agrees to use and protect such information by ex
126. Construction regulations and charges apply CCSAC interconnection is available only in suitably equipped Company STP locations T C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 11 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 5 ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 20 5 2 SERVICE PROVISIONING Cont d B LIDB Provisioning LIDB Service is accessed via the Company s CCSN LIDB customers must arrange access to the Company s CCSN as set forth in 20 2 1 preceding All Alternate Billing Service ABS query messages destined for the Company s LIDB require a routing indicator to be set for further Global Title Translations GTTs The Company performs the final GTT The Company will provide to the customer all necessary network accessing information e g regional STP point codes SCP point codes sub system number physical points of interconnection signal link codes identity of interconnecting link sets primary and alternate routes of the Company s LIDB application All information related to ABS functions is proprietary Proprietary data residing in the Company s LIDB is protected from unauthorized access and may not be stored by customers in a customer s data base for any reason Examples of proprietary information residing in the Company s LIDB are Billed Line Regional Accounting Office number Personal Iden
127. D services with SS7 Out of Band Signaling and Clear Channel Capability with no other change in optional features The customer changes from FGD Service with SS7 Out of Band Signaling to FGD Services with SS7 Out of Band Signaling and Clear Channel Capability with no other change in optional features T 6 7 6 7 1 I 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 116 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Clear Channel Capability Cont d The same customer premises quantity of trunks service type direct routing and Interface Group Category 6 or 9 are maintained The traffic type on FGD service is changed to the Clear Channel Capability originating and or terminating traffic type as set forth in 6 1 1 preceding All service orders are received at the same time and the disconnect date and the connect date are the same when rearranging trunk groups from MF to SS7 Out of Band Signaling with Clear Channel Capability Multiple MF trunk groups may be combined into a single SS7 trunk group with Clear Channel Capability when all trunks within the group are traffic engineered as a unit and all the communication paths within the group are interchangeable Rearrangement charges from FGD Service with multifrequency signaling to FGD Service with SS7 Out of Band Signaling and Clear Channel Cap
128. DSO to be utilized or provided between the SWC of the customer s SPOI and the Company s STP or FSPOL The Company will allow hubbing arrangements in association with CCSAC If the customer has an existing DS3 facility ordered and provisioned from Section 6 preceding or Section 7 of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 to a Company Hub the customer may use a portion of the DS3 facility Le DS1 for the CCS Link s from the SWC of the customer s SPOI to the Company Hub and then order the DS1 or DSO DLT from the Company Hub to the Company s STP or FSPOI If the customer requests a DS1 DLT multiplexing equipment must be ordered at the Company s STP or FSPOI CCSAC orders are subject to the provisions e g access order intervals modification charges cancellation charges and minimum periods specified in Section 5 preceding When a customer orders CCSAC in association with other services e g FGD with SS7 Out of Band Signaling for call set up separate orders shall be issued B LIDB Ordering Requirements When a customer orders LIDB the customer must specify per access order the LIDB Originating Point Code s Location Identification Code s and projected percent of interstate use that will access the Company s LIDB LIDB orders are subject to the provisions e g access order intervals modification charges cancellation charges and minimum periods as specified in Section 5 preceding T T Qwest Corporatio
129. Day The term Calendar Day denotes the days of the year from January through December 31 When utilized in conjunction with determination of Standard Intervals it denotes any day between January 1 through December 31 including Holidays Call The term Call denotes a customer attempt for which the complete address code e g 0 911 or 10 digits is provided to the serving dial tone office Calling Party Number CPN The term Calling Party Number denotes the SS7 Out of Band Signaling parameter which automatically transmits the calling party s ten digit telephone number to the customer s premises for calls originating in the LATA Carrier Or Common Carrier See Interexchange Carrier Carrier Selection Parameter CSP The term Carrier Selection Parameter denotes the SS7 Out of Band Signaling parameter which identifies whether the dialing end user accessed the customer s network through a presubscribed line or by dialing the customer s 101XXXX code CCS The term CCS denotes a hundred call seconds which is a standard unit of traffic load that is equal to 100 seconds of usage or capacity of a group of servers e g trunks T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 61 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Central Office CO The term Central Office denotes a local Company swit
130. ECTION 6 Page 140 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT Cont d D Nonrecurring Charges 1 Entrance Facility Installation NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE a Voice Grade per point of termination EF2AX FE4AX 99 00 R b DS1 per point of termination EF2BX FE4BX 313 25 c DS3 per point of termination EF2CX FE4CX 313 25 R 2 Line or Trunk Installation a Interface Groups 1 and 2 e First line or trunk NR61G FN71G 446 82 e Each additional line or trunk NR61K FN71K 77 40 b Interface Group 6 e First line or trunk NR61H FN71H 412 28 e Each additional line or trunk NR61L FN71L 42 64 R c Interface Group 9 e First line or trunk NR61J FN71J 409 32 e Each additional line or trunk NR61M FN71M 40 34 R Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 141 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 7 25 2002 Effective 8 15 2002 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT D Nonrecurring Charges Cont d 3 Moves within the Same Serving Wire Center 1 NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE a Switched Access Service per line or trunk associated with Interface Groups 1 and 2 e First line or trunk NR6SG FN7SG 318 17 e Each additional line or trunk NR6SK FN7SK 32 42 b Switched Access Service per line or trunk associated with Interface Group 6 e First line or trunk NR6SH FN7SH 297 41
131. EFINITIONS Cont d Service Provided Upon Request SPUR The term Service Provided Upon Request denotes a service that has not been requested by any customers in a particular state When a request for this service is received a new Company rate will be calculated and filed in this Tariff to reflect the additional demand and costs for the service Service Switching Point SSP The term Service Switching Point denotes a signal point equipped with the ability to halt call process formulate and send a SS7 query to a remote location and route the call based on information contained in the response Serving Wire Center SWC The term Serving Wire Center denotes the local Company office from which dial tone for local exchange service would normally be provided to the customer premises Seven Digit Manual Test Line The term Seven Digit Manual Test Line denotes an arrangement which allows the customer to select balance milliwatt and synchronous test lines by manually dialing a seven digit number over the associated access connection Short Circuit Test Line The term Short Circuit Test Line denotes an arrangement in an end office which provides for an ac short circuit termination of a trunk or line by means of a capacitor of at least four microfarads Signal Point SP The term Signal Point denotes an end node in a CCSN Signal Points can be switches i e end offices and access tandems data bases or op
132. EGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C Nonrecurring Charges Cont d T D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 106 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C Nonrecurring Charges Cont d 6 Rearrangement of 800 DB Service from Tandem Routing to Direct Routing When the customer requests the rearrangement of 800 DB Access Service from tandem routing to direct routing no charge shall apply for the customer requested rearrangement as long as the following conditions are met The same customer premises service type and Interface Group category are maintained with the exception of a change in Interface Group category and Service Type as set forth in 6 7 4 and 6 7 5 following The end office must subtend the tandem which service is being rearranged from The customer must disconnect one trunk at the tandem for each rerouted end office trunk installed Trunk rearrangements for more than one for one must be determined on an equivalent basis substantiated by industry accepted engineering standards and mutually agreed upon by the Company and the customer The customer may specify a change in traffic type and direction i e one way to two way at the time the order is received The customer may specify a change in optional features exc
133. ERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Certain terms used herein are defined as follows Access Code The term Access Code denotes a uniform seven digit code assigned by the Company to an individual customer The seven digit code has the form 950 XXXX or 1OLXXXX Access Minutes The term Access Minutes denotes that usage of exchange facilities in intrastate service for the purpose of calculating chargeable usage On the originating end of an intrastate call usage is measured from the time the originating end user s call is delivered by the Company to and acknowledged as received by the customer s facilities connected with the originating exchange On the terminating end of an intrastate call usage is measured from the time the call is received by the end user in the terminating exchange Timing of usage at both originating and terminating ends of an intrastate call shall terminate when the calling or called party disconnects whichever event is recognized first in the originating and terminating exchanges as applicable Access Service Group ASG The term Access Service Group denotes a group of like access services ordered to an end office or access tandem switch or to a dial tone office Access Tandem AT The term Access Tandem denotes a Company switching system that provides a concentration and distribution function for originating or terminating traffic between end offices and the customer s POT T T T T T
134. ERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES PROVISION OF ACCESS SERVICE BILLING INFORMATION Cont d B Additional Access Service Billing Options Nonchargeable Additional Options a On line Billing Service On line Billing Service OBS provides a customer on line access to view its designated Billing Account Number BAN media i e monthly bills and or CSRs in the Company OBS data base via a customer provided personal computer or terminal utilizing customer provided communications software package capable of VT100 emulation Individual User identification Number s and Personal Identification Number s are assigned by the Company and provide the customer a secure log on to view its billing media Customers reach the OBS data base by dialing a telephone number for the OBS modem pool In the event of a log on rejection the Company system administrator must be contacted The system administrator will provide customer assistance in resolving the log on failure BAN media for the last eleven months is available for viewing BAN media can be viewed between the hours of 6 a m to 6 p m Central Time Monday through Friday excluding holidays OBS is a nonchargeable additional access bill format and is not available as the primary bill format Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 14 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING
135. ES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE Cont d D Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System The following rates and charges apply per point of termination or per line and are in addition to all other rates and charges that may be applicable for other services that may be furnished under the provisions of this Tariff which operate in conjunction with the TSP System NONRECURRING MONTHLY USOC CHARGE RATE 1 Priority Installation PD Invocation includes system development verification and confirmation per point of termination or per line 1 e Prime Service Vendor PIAPX 128 00 e Subcontractor PIASX 128 00 1 When an Access Service is ordered with both PI and PR only the nonrecurring charge for PR applies Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 36 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE D Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System Cont d NONRECURRING MONTHLY USOC CHARGE RATE 2 Priority Restoration PR Level Implementation per point of termination or per line 1 a PR level implementation includes system development verification and confirmation e Prime Service Vendor PR5PX 128 00 e Subcontractor PR5SX 128 00 b PR level change includes verification and confirmation e Prime Service Vendor PR8PX 5 00
136. F Tariff tacos ins cveadstettssstves castaedibsadacasestebel das Auisaciie al unc aeai 1 Explanation of Abbreviations esseessseesessesesesressessresressessrerreeserseerrreseessee 23 Explanation of Tariff Change Symbols ssssssessesssesssesesssersseessersseresseesssees 22 Reference to Other Publications sseessesnessesssssesresesssssssseererrsssseseereress 31 Reference to Other Tariffs and or Price Lists ccccecececcccccseeeeeeeceeceeeeeees 26 Reference to Technical Publications ccccccccccccseesessecccccccesseseeeecesceseeeees 27 S bj ct Index ninine se E E ER SNe tane 13 Table Of Contents r a a aaa aS 2 Taf FORMAL ices cc cctsusasie teccectetoveieetcccderenbossisabocceseaheasacetaecucteebesbsosteccaseact 20 Trademarks Service Marks and Trade Names c cccsssssssseseseseseseees 26 1 1 Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 7 7 2011 Effective 8 9 2011 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE APPLICATION OF TARIFF This Tariff contains regulations terms conditions rates and charges applicable to the provision of Carrier Common Line Switched Access Service Expanded Interconnection Service and other miscellaneous services hereinafter referred to collectively as service s provided by Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC hereinafter referred to as the Company The tariffed and regulated services offered herein b
137. FERENCE 1 6 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS Cont d MOU Minutes of Use MRC Monthly Recurring Charge MTS Message Telecommunications Service s MTSO Mobile Telephone Switching Office MUX Multiplexing NPA Numbering Plan Area NRC Nonrecurring Charge NTS Non Traffic Sensitive NXX Three Digit Central Office Code OTPL Zero Transmission Level Point PAL Public Access Line PBX Private Branch Exchange PCM Pulse Code Modulation PDR Percent Direct Routed PI Priority Installation PIC Primary Interexchange Carrier PIU Percent Interstate Use POM Percent Other Messages POT Point of Termination POTS Plain Old Telephone Service PSP Payphone Service Provider PR Priority Restoration PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network N PTD Plant Test Date PVU Percent VoIP Usage N rms Root mean square RSM Remote Switching Modules RSS Remote Switching Systems SCD Selective Carrier Denial SP Signaling Point SPOI Signaling Point of Interface SRL Singing Return Loss SSN Switched Service Network SS7 Signaling System 7 STP Signal Transfer Point SWC Serving Wire Center TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part TES Telephone Exchange Service s TLP Transmission Level Point TSP Telecommunications Service Priority TST Tandem Switched Transport USOC Uniform Service Order Code VG Voice Grade V amp H Vertical amp Horizontal VoIP Voice over
138. For all other changes other than a change in service type a new minimum period will be established on FGD M Material moved to Page 122 T T T T N N T T T T M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 122 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 5 CHANGE OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE TYPE B Service Type Upgrade from FGC Service to FGD Service Cont d e At the customer s option the Company will allow a change to SS7 Out of Band Signaling and a change in direction from one way to two way to occur at the same time the FGC is upgraded to FGD When this kind of request is received the customer will be assessed a SS7 Rearrangement Charge when conditions in 6 7 1 preceding are met When upgrading FGC to FGD with SS7 Out of Band Signaling the disconnect date and the connect date on the orders must be the same date and a new minimum period will apply on the FGD Service e If a customer has the optional feature Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization MPTS and a non equal access end office is upgraded to an equal access end office within the tandem serving area the MPTS nonrecurring charges do not apply 6 7 6 MOVES A move involves a change in the physical location of one of the following e The point of termination at the customer s premises e The customer s premises The charges for the m
139. GATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER REPORT REQUIREMENTS Cont d 900 NXX Code Reports When ordering 900 Access Service the customer must report the appropriate NXX code s to be instituted in each Company office at which the customer identification function is performed The report must be updated by the customer each time a change is scheduled to occur i e when a new code is to be added or an existing code is to be deleted Such updated reports shall be provided at least 60 calendar days prior to the effective date of the change in order to allow the Company sufficient time to implement the change Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization Reports When ordering MPTS the customer must report the customer designated POT for all subtending end offices served by an access tandem The report shall be provided at the same time the Access Order is placed SUPERVISORY SIGNALING The customer s facilities shall provide the necessary off hook and on hook answer and disconnect supervision TRUNK GROUP MEASUREMENTS REPORTS With the agreement of the customer trunk group data in the form of usage in hundred call seconds CCS peg count and overflow for its end of all access trunk groups where technologically feasible will be made available to the Company These data will be used to monitor trunk group utilization and service performance and will be based on previously arranged intervals and format DESIGN OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICES When a customer orders S
140. GES AND SUBSTITUTIONS ccccccccccececececececececececseeeesueess 6 2 1 8 REFUSAL AND DISCONTINUANCE OF SERVICE 00s0sseseeeeeseees 7 2 1 9 LIMITATION OF USE OF METALLIC FACILITIES 0ccceceeccceeeees 9 2 1 10 NOTIFICATION OF SERVICE AFFECTING ACTIVITIES cccccccccce00 10 2 1 11 COORDINATION WITH RESPECT TO NETWORK CONTINGENCIES ccccccccececececececececececececececseeeesueueess 10 2 1 12 PROVISION AND OWNERSHIP OF TELEPHONE NUMBERS 11 T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE 2 2 SB E E AEA ret sane sees coast E eects ie hee ae eee 12 2 2 1 INTERFERENCE OR IMPAIRMENT AND UNLAWFUL USE 5 12 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER cccccccececececececececececeeeeeceeeeeeess 13 2 3 1 DAMAGES AIEE A E E EEE E 13 2 3 2 OWNERSHIP OF FACILITIES cccccccccccccccccceseceseeeseseseseseseseususueass 13 2 3 3 EQUIPMENT SPACE AND POWER c ccssesssssssssssssssssssssssseseseeees 14 2 3 4 AVAILABILITY FOR TESTING c c0cccssessssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseeees 15 2 3 5 BALANCE 0120 8 aa aa ra a TaS et 15 2 3 6 DESIGN OF CUSTOMER SERVICES seseseseserererererererererererrerrrerere 15 2 3 7 REFERENCES TO THE COMPANY c c0cssssssssessssssssssssssseseseseeees 15 2 3 8 CLAIMS AND DEMANDS FOR DAMAGES cc
141. HARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT Cont d E Optional Features 1 Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization MPTS NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE e MPTS ASR without associated trunk activity per ASR NR6TA FN7TA 46 32 T e MPTS Establishment without associated trunk activity Per FGC sector NRO6TF FN7TF 307 37 T Per FGD sector NR6TB FN7TB 179 59 T e MPTS Establishment with associated trunk activity Per FGC sector NR6TG FN7TG 307 37 T Per FGD sector NR6TC FN7TC 179 59 T e MPTS Rearrangement without associated trunk activity Per FGC sector NR6TH FN7TH 44 93 T Per FGD sector NR6TD FN7TD 30 96 T e MPTS Rearrangement with associated trunk activity Per FGC sector NROTJ FN7TJ 44 93 T Per FGD sector NRO6TE FN7TE 30 96 T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 147 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT E Optional Features Cont d FID 2 Customer specification of the receive transmission level at the first point of switching within a range acceptable to the Company per Line or Trunk 1 TLV 3 Customer specification of Local Transport Termination four wire termination in lieu of two wire termination per Line or Trunk 2 NC S T D 1 Available with Interface Groups 2 6 and 9 The range of transmission levels which may be specified is described in Te
142. INATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d WATS Access Service WATS At the option of the customer WATS Access Service as specified following may be provided at Company designated end office switches referred to as WATS Serving Office s WSO WATS Serving Offices are identified in National Exchange Carrier Association Inc Tariff F C C No 4 WATS Access Service is provided in conjunction with FGC or FGD Switched Access Service and any compatible Private Line Transport Service referred to as WATS Access Line s The WATS Access Line as described in 5 2 preceding is required to connect the WSO to the end user s premises WATS access lines are available for intrastate service as a shared WATS access line or a dual jurisdiction WATS access line as set forth in 5 2 preceding For WATS Access Service provided on a dual jurisdiction basis i e interstate and intrastate the following applies e The WSO is capable of performing the necessary routing screening and recording functions for 800 800 type service Outward WATS and similar services and is provided only for use at the closed end of such services e WATS Access Service can be arranged for originating only terminating only or two way calling depending on the specific arrangement employed Dial pulse or dual tone multifrequency address signaling and either loop start or ground start supervisory signaling is used to work with the WATS Access line order
143. IPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d FEATURE GROUP C FGC A Description 1 FGC Access which is available only to providers of MTS and WATS provides trunkside Access to Company end office switches for the customer s use in originating and terminating communications FGC is provided at all Company end office switches on a direct trunk basis via DTT or via Company designated access tandem switches with TST FGC switching is provided to the customer i e providers of MTS and WATS at an end office switch unless FGD end office switching is provided in the same office When FGD switching is available FGC switching will not be provided When FGC Service is directly routed to an end office the Switched Transport configuration is composed of an Entrance Facility and DTT facilities to an end office When FGC is switched through an access tandem the Switched Transport configuration is composed of an Entrance Facility a DTT facility between the SWC and the access tandem and TST from the access tandem to the end offices subtending the access tandem Multiplexing options are described in 6 1 2 preceding FGC is provided as trunkside switching through the use of end office or access tandem switch trunk equipment The switch trunk equipment is provided with answer and disconnect supervisory signaling Wink start start pulsing signals are provided in all offices where available In those offices where wink start start pulsing sign
144. ITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 1 FEATURE GROUP A FGA B Optional Features Cont d 3 Transport Termination Optional Features Two way operation with dial pulse address signaling and loop start supervisory signaling Two way operation with dial pulse address signaling and ground start supervisory signaling Two way operation with dual tone multifrequency address signaling and loop start supervisory signaling Two way operation with dual tone multifrequency address signaling and ground start supervisory signaling Terminating operation with dial pulse address signaling and loop start supervisory signaling Terminating operation with dial pulse address signaling and ground start supervisory signaling Terminating operation with dual tone multifrequency address signaling and loop start supervisory signaling Terminating operation with dual tone multifrequency address signaling and ground start supervisory signaling Originating operation with loop start supervisory signaling Originating operation with ground start supervisory signaling 6 2 6 2 1 B 4 C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 38 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP A FGA Optional Features Cont d Certain other features which may be avai
145. Line Access Rates as set forth in 3 8 5 following M Material moved to Page 10 M1 Material moved from Page 12 M2 Material moved from Page 13 M M1 T M1 M2 T T M2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 12 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE M 3 8 RATE REGULATIONS Cont d M1 3 8 5 DETERMINATION OF RATES T After the adjustments as set forth in 3 6 4 and 3 8 4 preceding have been applied when necessary to Switched Access Service access minutes rates for the involved customer account will be determined as follows D A Carrier Common Line Access rates shall not be reduced as set forth in 3 6 1 T preceding unless Switched Access Charges as set forth in 6 8 1 following are T applied to the customer s Switched Access Services B Terminating Carrier Common Line per minute rate s apply to T e All terminating access minutes of use e All originating access minutes of use associated with Lineside Access Services where the off hook supervisory signaling is forwarded by the customer s equipment when the called party answers e All originating access minutes of use associated with calls placed to 800 and 900 numbers less those originating access minutes of use associated with calls placed to 800 and 900 numbers for which the customer furnishes for each month a report of either the
146. MENTS Cont d PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A CCSAC Performance Requirements The Company supports the performance standards for CCSN as defined in Technical References GR 905 CORE and 77342 The overall end to end CCSN network objective from any SP to any other SP is less than ten minutes unavailable access per year based on design and diversity requirements and the performance objective for any single SP including a Service Control Point SCP is less than three minutes unavailable access per year The combined link set from the SCP to the STP has a performance objective of less than two minutes unavailable access per year The Company will administer its CCSN network to ensure acceptable service provision levels The Company maintains the right to apply protective controls to its CCSN as a result of occurrences such as failure or overload of CCSN facilities natural disasters mass calling or national security demands In the event that the protective controls applied by the Company result in the complete loss of CCSAC service by the customer the customer will be entitled to a credit allowance for Switched Access service interruptions as set forth in 2 4 4 preceding When the customer or the Company pursuant to an order for service arranges to establish a route to a signaling point such route will be used by all messages delivered to the Company s signaling network N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20
147. Minutes ssessseesseeeesseesseesseesseesssetsseessersseeeseessseesseeso NWN vw NNNNNY N NVWNAADAN NOW NW NNNNDNNDNADDND Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 16 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX Cont d SUBJECT SECTION Minimum Monthly Charge sss saci nicancatsusosdeg cons eaagieeh Geejautaceutucsaatesaanetnetacs 6 Minimum Period Charges iscsiisx sveieisdseacsagwass dua lesesccasuesacedub deavensvavadee leveabceate 5 Minim m Pernod Ses nereo sues teccassecncs bees teceassedicd suawteccdsbeehes tosstecssentes 2 5 6 T Moves to a Different Building 2000 eee ceeeeeceeececeeeeeceeeeecseeeeeseeestteeeees Moves within the Same Building eee ececeencecseeeeceeeceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization MPTS eee ceeeeeseeereeeeseceeeeeees nN aAA Network Management ijccissvscccisisdssatsvisavccsisievedeasvspaacuseseaesansavzandseesadenssaaetease T Nonhunting Number for Use with Hunt Group Arrangement or Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement for Use with WATS Access ANOS Inin an cue vita E E satan wteatemiuivctiuainsntins Nonhunting Number for Use with Hunt Group or Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement 2 3 4ss3ccss3cessseccsasasausdecasqeaedeneteasacsaabebaetesscesaenss Nonscheditled Testing i scssicccascciansicesoseeasnneceesceedannasgstaa naa 1 Notification of Service Affecti
148. NAL FEATURES Cont d E Nonhunting Number for Use with Hunt Group Arrangement or Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement This option provides an arrangement for an individual line within a multiline hunt or uniform call distribution group that provides access to that line within the hunt or uniform call distribution group when it is idle or provides busy tone when it is busy when the nonhunting number is dialed Where available this feature is provided in Company electronic end offices only It is available with FGA 6 3 6 3 1 F Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 65 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d Automatic Number Identification AND This option provides the automatic transmission of a three seven or ten digit number and information digits to the customer s premises for calls originating in the LATA to identify the calling station The three seven or ten digit numbers will contain the following information three digit NPA only seven digit NXX XXXX ten digit NPA NXX XXXX The ANI feature is an end office software function which is associated on a call by call basis with 1 trunk groups routed directly between an end office and a customer s premises or where technically feasible with 2 trunk groups between an end office a
149. O Multiplexer at the SWC of the customer s SPOI Multiplexing rates are set forth in 20 8 following T 20 2 20 2 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 5 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN SERVICE DESCRIPTION Cont d LINE INFORMATION DATA BASE LIDB LIDB is provided by the Company to its customers in support of alternate billing services which offer LIDB customers the choice to permit their end user to bill calls to an account other than the account associated with the originating calling number All LIDB queries are transported uniformly to the Company s LIDB where the following functions are performed e Validation of the 14 digit telecommunications calling card account number stored in LIDB e Determination of whether the billed line has decided in advance to reject certain calls billed as collect and or to a third number e Determination of the billed line as a pay telephone or a nonworking telephone number e Determination of central office codes as active or vacant A customer LIDB query is transported from the customer s Operator Service System OSS identified by the Service Switching Point SSP Originating Point Code OPC to the Regional STP pair as designated by the Company The customer s OPC is translated in the STP The STP translation process validates the OPC and routes the query to and from the
150. ONS MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES Feature Group B Usage Measurement Cont d The measurement of terminating call usage over FGB ends when the terminating FGB entry switch receives disconnect supervision from either the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating end user has disconnected or the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch Feature Group C Usage Measurement For originating calls over FGC if measurement capabilities are not available usage measurement begins when the originating FGC entry switch receives answer supervision from the customer s POT indicating the called party has answered If measurement capabilities are available usage measurement begins when the originating FGC entry switch receives the first wink supervisory signal forwarded from the customer s POT The measurement of originating call usage over FGC ends when the originating FGC entry switch receives disconnect supervision from either the originating end user s end office indicating the originating end user has disconnected or the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch For terminating calls over FGC to services other than 800 800 type and 900 terminating FGC usage may not be directly measured at the terminating entry switch but may be imputed from originating usage excluding usage from calls to 8XX or 900 Services Actual measured usage will be used where available rather than an imputed val
151. ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER Cont d MINIMUM PERIOD Except as set forth in B following the Minimum Period for which Access Service is provided and for which charges are applicable is one month The Minimum Period for Feature Group D 800 Access Service 900 Access Service and DS3 and DSI Entrance Facilities and DS3 and DS1 DTT facilities associated with such services is three months Service Rearrangements as set forth in 6 7 1 following may be made without a change in Minimum Period requirements Changes other than those identified in 6 7 1 following will be treated as a discontinuance of the existing service and an installation of a new service All associated nonrecurring charges will apply for the new service A new Minimum Period will be established for the new service The customer will also remain responsible for all outstanding Minimum Period obligations associated with the disconnected service The changes listed below are those which will be treated as a discontinuance and installation of service and for which a new Minimum Period will be established A change of customer of record i e Access Service is provided to and billed to a different entity except as provided for in 6 7 1 and 12 2 following A change in type of service e g Switched Access to Private Line Transport or one type of Switched Access Service to another except as set forth in 6 7 4 and 6 7 5 following A change in
152. OUS SERVICES 13 3 5 TESTING SERVICES Cont d C Cooperative Scheduled Testing Cooperative Scheduled Testing of Switched Access Services where the Company provides a technician at its office s and the customer provides a technician at its premises with suitable test equipment to perform the required tests will consist of quarterly loss and C message noise tests and annual balance tests However the customer may specify a more frequent schedule of tests In addition to the loss noise balance measurements the customer may also order at additional charges gain slope and C notched noise testing The Company will provide on a quarterly basis a Cooperative Scheduled Testing report that lists the test results for each trunk tested Trunk test failures requiring customer participation for trouble resolution will be provided to the customer on an as occurs basis D Manual Scheduled Testing Manual Scheduled Testing MST of Switched Access Services Feature Groups B C or D and Directory Access Service not routed through an access tandem where the Company provides a technician at its office s and at the customer s premises will consist of quarterly loss and C message noise tests and annual balance tests However the customer may specify a more frequent schedule of tests In addition to the loss noise balance tests the customer may also order at additional charges gain slope and C notched noise testing The Company will provide on a
153. Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE SUBJECT PAGE 800 Data Base Access Service Description and Application of Rates and Charges ceescceeeseeeeees 112 Provision and Description of Switched Access Service eeeeeeeeeeee 56 Rates and Charges renerien aaen EEE EEEE E EEA 158 900 Access Service Provision and Description of Switched Access Service eeeeeeeeeee 59 Rates and Charcesiias iiss sssscanisessietuswassaes tan AE E ETRA 158 900 Access Service Customer Identification Charge ceeceeeseeeesteeees 112 900 Access Service Nonrecurring Charge ceecceescceeeseceeeseeeeseeeeeneeees 113 950 om ne eh cats Si es ice a EE E ons im hun beet el oes a hu 12 Acceptance Testing o iiine rt iert degen Ried a iee E oan 31 Alternate Traffic Routing sisiciiveigecasaceceastiaugsaees sesecdesabgedecssoades os cpsoguns suateccvens 69 Application of Rates for Extension Service e eee eeseceseeereeereecsseeneeeees 131 Application of Premium and Transitional Rates 000 0 eee eeeeeseesseceeeeeees 108 Automatic Number Identification ANI o cccccececcccccceeeesessnneceeeceeeenenens 65 Call Denial on Line or Hunt Group ou eee ee eeceeeenceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 62 Change of Switched Access Interface Group Category ccceeeeeeeeereeees 119 Change of Switched Access Service Type ceeccccssccecesceceeeeeceteeeeeteeeees 121 Cl
154. Page 14 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 5 ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 20 5 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Cont d B LIDB Performance Requirements The Company supports the LIDB performance standards as defined in Technical References GR 954 CORE GR 1158 CORE and 77342 LIDB Service outage time will be less than twelve hours per year LIDB is capable of processing up to 100 validation queries per second The per query response time from switch transmission to reception should not exceed one second for ninety nine 99 percent of all queries During periods of LIDB system congestion an automatic code gapping procedure will be utilized to control such congestion The automatic code gapping procedure directs the switches gap level i e how long the switch should wait before sending another query and the duration how long the switch should continue to perform gapping During system congestion the automatic code gapping will begin to drop a percentage of the queries received uniformly to all LIDB users based upon the level of system congestion The Company maintains the right to invoke manual intervention of the automatic code gapping procedure to preserve the integrity of the network In the event that the protective controls applied by the Company result in the complete loss of LIDB service by the customer the customer w
155. Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC C Access Service Tariff TITLE PAGE State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 7 7 2011 Effective 8 9 2011 TERMS CONDITIONS RATES AND CHARGES Applying to the provision of intrastate ACCESS SERVICE Within the operating territory of Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC C Whether offered under the name or the trade or band name CenturyLink C in the State of SOUTH DAKOTA Company Code 5145 ADOPTION NOTICE N Effective April 2 2011 Qwest Corporation registered the fictitious name CenturyLink QC Effective August 8 2011 Qwest Corporation began operating under the name CenturyLink QC As such Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC hereby adopts ratifies and makes its own in every respect as if the same had been originally filed by it all schedules rules notices concurrences schedule agreements divisions authorities or other instruments whatsoever filed with the South Dakota Public Utility Commission State of South Dakota by or adopted by Qwest Corporation By this notice Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC also adopts and ratifies all supplements or amendments to any of the above schedules etc which Qwest Corporation has heretofore filed with said Commission N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE SUBJECT PAGE Apphtation O
156. R 0 13 Over 50 1YTXE 1UFX5 24 46 R 0 29 R DSI 0 1YTXA 1UFX1 Over 0 to 8 1YTXB 1UFX2 45 27 R 6 85 R Over 8 to 25 1YTXC 1UFX3 57 70 7 23 Over 25 to 50 1YTXD 1UFX4 62 71 7 61 Over 50 1YTXE 1UFX5 69 05 R 7 96 R DS3 0 1YTXA 1UFX1 Over 0 to 8 1YTXB 1UFX2 429 89 R 71 01 D Over 8 to 25 1YTXC 1UFX3 412 09 45 79 R Over 25 to 50 1YTXD 1UFX4 413 55 46 72 R Over 50 1YTXE 1UFX5 520 36 R 58 94 T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 139 Release 2 Effective 7 2 2013 State of South Dakota Issued 5 31 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT Cont d C Tandem Switched Transport Usage Rates RATE PER ACCESS MINUTE MILEAGE BANDS FIXED PER MILE 1 Tandem Transmission e Originating 0 _ Over 0 to 8 0 000237 0 000015 Over 8 to 25 0 000273 0 000018 Over 25 to 50 0 000308 0 000019 Over 50 0 000311 0 000020 e Terminating 0 7 T Over 0 to 8 0 000240 J 0 000030 I Over 8 to 25 0 000240 R 0 000030 Over 25 to 50 0 000240 0 000030 Over 50 0 000240 R 0 000030 I RATE PER ACCESS MINUTE 2 Tandem Switching Charge Originating 0 007664 R Terminating 0 002252 R Common Transport Multiplexing Originating 0 000036 Terminating 0 000036 MONTHLY USOC RATE Access Tandem Trunk Port Charge per port P4TRX F4KRX 6 00 N N C C T T C C N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff S
157. R MODIFICATIONS D Expedited Order Charge Cont d If costs other than additional labor are to be incurred when an Access Order is expedited the Company will develop determine and bill the customer such costs in accordance with the special construction terms and conditions as set forth in Section 4 of the Company s Exchange and Network Services Tariff D 5 2 5 2 3 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 18 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER Cont d CANCELLATION OF AN ACCESS ORDER A customer may cancel an Access Order for the installation of service at any time prior to notification by the Company that service is available for the customer s use The cancellation date is the date the Company receives written or verbal notice from the customer that the order is to be canceled The verbal notice must be followed by written confirmation within 10 days If a customer or a customer s end user is unable to accept Access Service within 30 business days after the original service date the following will occur e The Access Order will be canceled and charges as set forth in D and E following will apply or e The service will be activated at the customer s request and billing for the service will commence In such instances the cancellation date or the date billing is to commence depending on which option is select
158. RE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED G Example Switched Access provisioned by Direct Trunked Transport and Tandem Switched Transport Cont d 1 Layout a Feature Group D Switched Access is ordered to an end office via DTT and TST b The premises of ordering customer the serving wire center SWC of that premises and the access tandem are in operating territory of Exchange Telephone Company A A Company exchange c The customer orders a DS3 Entrance Facility from the customer s premises to the SWC with a 3 1 MUX in the SWC d The customer orders a DS1 DTT to the AT e The BP for TT is 57 for Exchange Telephone Company A f The end office is in the operating territory of Exchange Telephone Company B g The BP for transport is 43 for Exchange Telephone Company B C C C C C N C T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 53 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 4 PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES 2 4 7 ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED G Example Switched Access provisioned by Direct Trunked Transport and Tandem Switched Transport Cont d 2 Rate elements assessed per Exchange Telephone Company a Exchange Telephone Company A Entrance Facility 100 of DS3 monthly Entrance Facility rate and 3 1 MUX DS
159. RENCE 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX Cont d SUBJECT SECTION SCOPE MRR TED Mer Re a een nh errr eer a Meer e mere ary oe Selection of Facilities for Access Orders ceeeeseessecsseceeeeesseeenseeeeeeees DELVICES Class ROUND sicscatsontaverccestspeventunyardeaaegheed seas tuaserya neg R SEE E Service Code Denial on Line or Hunt Group cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees Seryice Date Changeri irar jesienaeness cag a tle sant E A a E Shared USE E E E E E Shar d Use Facilities esisscsepise reestigi isas agusia essiri aa TAS Signaling System Seven SS7 Out of Band Signaling eee Spectral Constr ctiOli re ionien ne oe a e a E a ES Special Facilities Routing yi s5 isseseadsasanccssaseivesessvasscessnoseiensoacaatdseveaesansaceivene Special Facilities Routing of Access Service cceeeccecesccecsseeesteeeenseeeenes Specialized Service or Arrangements cccccceecceceeececeeeeecseeeeesteeeeneeeenes Standard Transmission Specifications ccceeescecssccecseececeseeeesteeeeseeeeeas Subject INGER mirer irinin oo aree ea e REER E AEAT ROAT aA Supervisory Signaling sssesseeseeeeseeessseesseesserssesesseessetesseesseesseeesseeesseesseesse Switched Access Service Arrangements and Manner of Provision Switched ACCESS SELVICE nsira eeii aai edad Switched Transporters ineeiieo irisan a e E N A EEEE NNNDDNDRDNKDINNADNAMNDD NWN Fable of Content ssssu casks ss scsata min i A aa a Tarti Format arnee ian ae EE a e t
160. RL limits specified The ERL and SRL are greater than or equal to the following MEASURED AT THE POT ERL SRL e POT to FPOS 4 wire transmission 16 dB 11 dB T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 SECTION 6 Page 83 Release 2 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS 6 4 1 C Transmission Type B1 Performance STANDARD TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS Cont d Transmission Type B1 performance is provided with the following IAL for FGB FGC or FGD Service 1 Loss Deviation The maximum Loss Deviation of the 1004 Hz loss relative to the EML at 1004 Hz dB is as follows POT to End Office Direct POT to Access Tandem Access Tandem to End Office POT to End Office via Access Tandem 2 Attenuation Distortion EML 2 5 dB 2 5 dB 2 5 dB 3 0 dB The maximum Attenuation Distortion in the 404 to 2804 Hz frequency band relative to loss at 1004 Hz is as follows 4 WIRE POT to End Office Direct POT to Access Tandem Access Tandem to End Office POT to End Office via Access Tandem 2 WIRE POT to End Office Direct POT to Access Tandem Access Tandem to End Office POT to End Office via Access Tandem M Material moved to Page 86 Loss AT 1004 Hz 2 0 to 4 0 2 0 to 4 0 2 0 to 4 0 2 0 to 5 5 Loss AT 1004 Hz 2 0 to 5 5 2 0 to 5 5 2 0 to 5 5 2 0 to 6 5 N N M Qwest C
161. S FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER A Switched Access Service Cont d 8 10 When a customer orders LIDB the customer must specify the Originating Point Code s and Location Identification Code s that will access the Company s LIDB per access order as set forth in Section 20 following When a customer orders FGD Service with SS7 Out of Band Signaling the customer must specify the CCSAC Service required between the customer s SPOI and the Company s STP location per access order as set forth in Section 20 following Separate orders shall be issued for the CCSAC Service and associated FGD Service When a customer desires Switched Access Service to an end office that is a remote switching office the customer must order service to and or from the host office which controls the remote switching office since all traffic to and or from a remote switching office must be routed through the host office T 5 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 10 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER Cont d B For WATS Access Service provided on a dual jurisdiction basis i e interstate and intrastate the WATS access line and associated WATS Access Service options are provided subject to the terms and conditions of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 The intrastate FGC or FGD Switched Access Service provided
162. SERVICE SUBJECT Access CLOUDS teineen e E E EE ETE E aksh Billing of Rates ssnrenioersasi oe innan E aa Common Channel Signaling Access Capability Exemption 6 Customer Obligations Concerning the Resale of MTS and or MTS Type Service S cceecceessececssececseeceesseceesteeeeneeeenas Determination Of Jurisdiction woe ceececceccccccccssesessececccessssensescesceseeaaes Determination Of Rates iecccccccccccccccedsccecetcscvessscsessceccctevsedeccocesdecdaecsscosseedeae Determination of Usage Subject to Carrier Common Line Access Rates cceccecccccccccsssessececcccccesssscesesccecseessaeeeseceeess EXCLUSIONS essa T A E ER Sees See ee Dada osc coun teens AE See General Description speise tasaa a r EE a r TEESE Interstate and Intrastate USe serioan n aaa a aai TSM tat OS a KEE ENEE A EE E A A Line Information Data Base Exemption sssessesssesssesessseessresserssereseeesssees Local Exchange Access and Enhanced Service Exemption eeeseeeseeeeeee SECTION 3 Index Page 1 Release 2 11 30 2000 PAGE 11 whe D T D T D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE SUBJECT Obligations of the Customer iisiecsszcageyaesavestesaceasitenaced quaseaiva veceaaseatuaseceonteaannss Percent Interstate Use PIU Jansin iena n nn a aa A PFOVISIONOL SCEVICE 20s sss sesh a E E E aia OS Rate Regulations
163. SUBJECT TO CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS RATES ccccccccccseeseseesecceeseseeseneees 3 3 5 1 DETERMINATION OF JURISDICTION sscseeseccccceccssesssesceeseseeeees 3 3 5 2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE eccccccccccccsesesesceccccccessnsssescceseseees 3 3 5 3 LOCAL EXCHANGE ACCESS AND ENHANCED SERVICE EXEMPTION sie soccccvccesodintbockctetcz soos aa a eel SealcocSientiaud dente 4 3 5 4 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVIDED IN CONJUNCTION WITH A COMMERCIAL MOBILE RADIO SERVICE PROVIDER 4 3 5 5 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ACCESS CAPABILITY EUXEMPTION onto EE S EN AE E gevsbesnecne 4 3 5 6 LINE INFORMATION DATA BASE EXEMPTION s ccceeseceeeceeeseee 4 3 6 RESOLD MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S s scccseceeeesesersees 5 3 6 1 SCOPES ATE EEE A E EEEN E ietiesinsteceut sm subetstveccens 5 3 6 2 CUSTOMER OBLIGATIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICES ccccccccccccssessseeesceseeeees 5 3 6 3 RESALE DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED BY THE CUSTOMER 6 3 6 4 RATE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICES ccccccccccccscssesseeseeees 6 M Material moved to Page 6 N N N N N N N N T N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 6 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE 3 8 RATE REGULATIONS cc s
164. Service Control Point SCP which stores all LIDB information and performs the validation function OPC data is recorded in the SCP and later used by the Company to bill the customer a LIDB Access Query and Validation Query as set forth in 20 3 2 following Technical Specifications for LIDB Service are described in Technical References GR 954 CORE GR 1158 CORE and 77342 LIDB is accessed via the Company s CCSN LIDB customers must order CCSAC Service as set forth in this section T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 6 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 12 15 2008 Effective 2 10 2009 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN RATE CATEGORIES CCSAC RATE CATEGORIES AND APPLICATIONS CCS Link rates and charges are set forth in 20 8 following Carrier Common Line rates as set forth in Section 3 preceding and Switched Access rates as set forth in Section 6 preceding are not applicable A Nonrecurring Charges Each CCS Link is assessed a nonrecurring charge per link provided on a first and each additional basis per order A nonrecurring charge is also assessed for each DS1 Entrance Facility provided Any change in CCSAC Service except a change in jurisdiction will be treated as a discontinuance of the existing service and an installation of a new service Minimum period requirements are as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding Monthly Rates The Entrance Facility monthly rate is assessed on a pe
165. Service provides for the use of Company common lines by customers for access to end users to furnish interstate telecommunications service WATS Access Service as described in 6 3 1 following is not subject to Carrier Common Line Access Service provisions The Company will provide Carrier Common Line Access Service Carrier Common Line Access to customers in conjunction with Switched Access Service provided in Section 6 of this Tariff LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS Neither a telephone number nor detail billing are provided with Carrier Common Line Access Additionally directory listings and intercept arrangements are not included in the rates for Carrier Common Line Access ACCESS GROUPS All lineside connections provided in the same access group will be limited to the same features and operating characteristics All trunkside connections provided in the same access group will be limited to the same features and operating characteristics D Tariff SECTION 3 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE LIMITATIONS Cont d WATS ACCESS LINES Where Switched Access Services are connected with Private Line Transport Services at Company Designated WATS Serving Offices for the provision of WATS and or WATS type Services Switched Access Service minutes which are carr
166. South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER A Switched Access Service Cont d 2 When the customer orders a DTT facility as described in 6 1 2 following for C either tandem routed or direct routed traffic the customer must specify whether C the EF that interfaces with the DTT facility is new or existing If the EF is new the customer shall order the EF as described in 1 preceding If the EF is existing the customer shall provide the Circuit Facility Assignment CFA of the existing facilities that will be utilized for the DTT The EF capacity must be the same capacity as the DTT or higher The customer shall specify the type of DTT facility DS3 DS1 or Voice Grade being requested and any multiplexing options desired When ordering a DS1 DTT facility to a Company Hub the customer shall specify the desired multiplexing Hub selected from the National Exchange Carrier Association Inc Tariff F C C No 4 This tariff identifies the type s of multiplexing functions which are available for a DS1 facility When the customer desires DS3 to DS1 multiplexing hubbing arrangements the Company will work cooperatively to provide the desired multiplexing hubbing arrangements in all wire centers The customer may order a DTT facility prior to ordering Lineside or T Trunkside Service only as set forth in 1 preceding If one of the conditions in 1 preceding is not
167. Switched Access Service when answer supervision is provided by the customer premise equipment the term message used herein denotes a completed call originated by an end user For Feature Group D Switched Access Service when answer supervision is not provided by the customer premise equipment the term message used herein denotes a call originated by an end user where a start time and a disconnect time are received by Company recording equipment Recording Service cannot be provided for Feature Group C Switched Access Service calls where the customer premise equipment does not provide answer supervision 8 1 8 1 2 8 1 3 A 8 1 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 8 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 8 INFORMATION AND BILLING SERVICES RECORDING SERVICE Cont d BILLING NAME AND ADDRESS SERVICE The Billing Name and Address product provides a requesting customer the name and address information on those telephone numbers for which they do not have an associated name and address in their data base BNA information is supplied to the customer on an individual request basis and requires a signed contract between the Company and the customer LIABILITY OF THE COMPANY Except as set forth below the Company in the absence of willful misconduct shall not be liable to the customer for damages attributable to its acts or omissions in the performance of Recording Servic
168. Switched Access Service Interface Group except as set forth in 6 7 4 following A change in Switched Access Service traffic type except as set forth in 6 7 1 following When FGD service is rearranged as set forth in 6 7 1 following a change in traffic type may occur without discontinuance and installation of service No new minimum period will be required T T T T T T T 5 2 5 2 5 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 24 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER MINIMUM PERIOD D Cont d S 6 Any change in CCSAC Service other than a change in jurisdiction A change in LIDB Originating Point Code A change in capacity of a Switched Access Service Entrance Facility or DTT facility e g a change from a DS1 Entrance Facility to a DS3 Entrance Facility except as set forth in 6 7 1 following A change in Switched Access Service type of transport except as set forth in 6 7 1 following T T T T T T 5 2 5 2 6 5 2 7 5 2 8 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 25 State of South Dakota Release 2 1 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER Cont d MINIMUM PERIOD CHARGES When Access Service is discontinued prior to the expiration of the minimum period charg
169. System according to the Guidelines for 800 Data Base D T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 84 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Return Loss The term Return Loss denotes a measure of the similarity between the two impedances at the junction of two transmission paths The higher the return loss the higher the similarity Segment The term Segment denotes a continuous sequence of binary bits of information within a packet A segment has a billable length of up to 64 octets of customer data transmitted to or from a port Service Control Point SCP The term Service Control Point denotes the node in the network where several independent data base applications receive and respond to SS7 queries Service Management System 800 SMS 800 The term Service Management System 800 denotes the main operations support system of 800 Data Base Access Service It is used to create and update subscriber 8XX records that are then downloaded to SCPs for handling subscribers 8XX calls see Service Control Points The system is also used by 8XX responsible organization to reserve and assign 8XX numbers T T T T D 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 85 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS D
170. T 20 6 20 6 3 20 6 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 16 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN TESTING REQUIREMENTS Cont d CCSAC ADDITIONAL COOPERATIVE ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing as described in 13 3 5 preceding will be performed on a cooperative basis with the customer Additional Cooperative Acceptance tests for CCSAC are described in Technical References GR 905 CORE and 77342 LIDB ADDITIONAL COOPERATIVE ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing as described in 13 3 5 preceding will performed on a cooperative basis with the customer Additional Cooperative Acceptance tests for LIDB are described in Technical References GR 905 CORE GR 1158 CORE and in 77342 Rates and charges for Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing are described in 13 4 3 preceding T T T T T T 20 7 20 7 1 20 7 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 17 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN SERVICE APPLICATIONS CALL SET UP This application provides the customer the capability to send originating and terminating call set up signaling information via ISUP messages between the customer s designated premises the Com
171. T REPORTS Subject to availability the Company will make available trunk group data in the form of usage in CCS peg count and overflow to the customer based on previously agreed to intervals Trunk group measurement reports will be available for Feature Group Switched Access Service DID Switched Access Service and WATS Access Service at no charge to the customer C T T T 6 5 6 5 7 6 5 8 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 90 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE OBLIGATIONS OF THE COMPANY Cont d DETERMINATION OF NUMBER OF TRANSMISSION PATHS DS1 and DS3 Entrance Facilities and DTT facilities requested by the customer are solely transport facilities capable of 24 and 672 channels respectively and do not reflect the actual switching capacity in the SWC end office access tandem or Company Hub The actual number of transmission paths provided will be based on the customer s line or trunk request Subsequent assignment will be based on switching equipment available For Switched Access Service which is ordered on a per line or per trunk basis the customer specifies the number of transmission paths in the order for service DETERMINATION OF NUMBER OF END OFFICE TRANSPORT TERMINATIONS For analog entry switches a termination will be provided for each Feature Group line or trunk requested For digital entry switches an e
172. T REQUIREMENTS Cont d F Identification and Rating of VoIP PSTN Traffic VoIP PSTN Traffic is defined as traffic exchanged between a Company end user and the customer in Time Division Multiplexing TDM format that originates and or terminates in Internet Protocol IP format This section governs the identification and compensation of VoIP PSTN Traffic that is required to be compensated at access rates unless the parties have agreed otherwise by the F C C in its Report and Order in WC Dockets Nos 10 90 etc F C C Release No 11 161 November 18 2011 F C C Order Specifically this section establishes the method of separating VoIP PSTN Traffic from the customer s traditional intrastate access traffic so that VoIP PSTN Traffic can be billed in accordance with the F C C Order The FCC released its Second Order of Reconsideration in WC Docket No 10 90 etc FCC Release No 12 47 April 25 2012 which temporarily modified the compensation of originating VoIP PSTN Traffic on a prospective basis Upon receipt validation and acceptance of the Percent VoIP Usage factor originating VoIP PSTN Traffic will be compensated as follows e Between the Initial Implementation date described in 2 3 10 F 2 and July 12 2012 the applicable rate elements used in providing originating access for VoIP PSTN Traffic and associated facilities will be billed according to interstate access rates e Effective July 13 2012 the applicable rate element
173. TA and for disallowing completion of calls to 0 555 and N11 i e 411 611 and 911 This feature is provided where available in all Company electronic end offices and electromechanical end offices It is available with FGA Hunt Group Arrangement This option provides the ability to access sequentially one of two or more lineside connections in the originating direction when the access code of the line group is dialed This feature is provided in all Company end offices It is available with FGA Resold and non resold FGA Access cannot be mixed in the same hunt group arrangement T D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 63 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 3 COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 3 1 COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d D Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement This option provides a type of multiline hunting arrangement which provides an equitable distribution of calls among the available lines in a hunt group Where available this feature is provided in Company electronic end offices only It is available with FGA D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 64 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 3 COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 3 1 COMMON SWITCHING OPTIO
174. TENSION SERVICE ccccccccceeeee 131 6 7 9 MESSAGE UNIT CREDIT aea re a ee Nen S iea 131 6 7 10 LOCAL INFORMATION DELIVERY SERVICES ccccccsseseesesceceeeees 131 6 7 11 MILEAGE MEASUREMENT c0c0ccssesessessssssssssssssssssssssssseseseseeees 132 6 7 12 SHARED USE sieiec cess eaa a Ana e aida ueestade e Aaaa 135 6 7 13 PERCENT DIRECT ROUTED PDR FACTOR ccse sccseeceeeeeeeees 136 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 7 24 2002 Effective 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d 6 8 RATES AND CHARGE Sinira a aid Gites Mere deianencee 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT cccccccscececececececececscecscscececscesecesscesuceeecs 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING o3i35e5 0de2 hab diets wes adhieins od a eis 6 8 3 INTERCONNECTION CHARGE u cccccccececececececececececececececececesueueess 6 8 4 MESSAGE UNIT CREDIT orisa irea teri AA e AA EA EET AR 6 8 5 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE cccccccceceessesseececececeeueeeseeceseeeaees 6 8 6 JOO ACCESSSERVICE oraraa aa AA ATTE 6 8 9 800 DATA BASE ACCESS SERVICE ccccccccececscecececececececeeeeeeeeeees SECTION 7 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION 8 INFORMATION AND BILLING SERVICES 8 1 RECORDING SERVICE cccccssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssessssseseseseees 8 1 1 TE NER AT ct cece 6 OM tA AEE Bole i NSE EER Ae Oh NN 8 1 2 BILLING NAME AND ADDRESS SERVICE ccccccccccccscessssseccecceseeseeeess 8 1
175. TION 13 Page 22 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 2 CHARGES FOR ADDITIONAL LABOR Cont d B Other Labor NONRECURRING ADDITIONAL LABOR PERIODS USOC CHARGE e Basic Time per technician First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof 1 ALGXX 45 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof ALG1X 25 00 e Overtime per technician 2 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof 1 ALGOX 45 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof ALG2X 25 00 e Premium Time per technician 2 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof 1 ALGPX 50 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof ALG3X 35 00 1 Only one first 1 2 hour increment applies per request 2 A call out of a Company employee at a time not consecutive with the employee s scheduled work period is subject to a minimum charge of four 4 hours Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 23 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES Cont d 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE A Maintenance of Service NONRECURRING MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE PERIODS USOC CHARGE e Basic Time per technician First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof MVWXxX 6 00 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof MVWIX 6 00 e
176. TIONS OF THE COMPANY Cont d DS1 RECORDS ASSIGNMENT When the customer initially orders a DS3 EF with DS3 DTT facilities to a Company Hub access tandem or end office the Company will provide to the customer the appropriate DS1 facility record necessary for the customer to identify circuit facility assignment CFA On subsequent orders utilizing existing DS3 Entrance Facilities or DS3 DTT facilities the Company will assign the DS1 facility to the DS3 Entrance Facility or DS3 DTT facility as directed by the customer s order MULTIPLEXING The Company will provide multiplexing equipment at a location determined by the Company as part of its overall network design when the conditions exist as set forth in 6 1 2 preceding PROVISION OF SERVICE PERFORMANCE DATA Subject to availability end to end service performance data available to the Company through its own service evaluation routines may also be made available to the customer based on previously arranged intervals and format These data provide information on overall end to end call completion and non completion performance e g customer equipment blockage failure results and transmission performance These data do not include service performance data which are provided under other tariff sections e g testing service results If data are to be provided in other than paper format the charges for such exchange will be determined on an individual case basis TRUNK GROUP MEASUREMEN
177. X 900 and Operator traffic type represents access capacity for carrying respectively only 8XX 900 or Operator traffic When such a customer wishes to segregate traffic as described above the customer must specify Domestic 8XX 900 or Operator traffic type T T 6 1 6 1 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 5 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL Cont d RATE CATEGORIES There are four rate categories which apply to Switched Access Service e Switched Transport described in A following e Local Switching described in B following e Interconnection described in C following e Common Line described in Sections 3 preceding In addition to the four rate categories there are rate elements applicable to certain Switched Access Services e 800 Data Base Access Service Charges applicable to 800 Access Service provided in conjunction with Trunkside Access The description and application of these charges are set forth in 6 7 1 following e 900 Access Service Charges applicable to 900 Access Service provided in conjunction with Feature Groups C D and 900 Access Service The description and application of these charges are set forth in 6 7 1 following The following diagrams depict possible serving arrangements and components of Switched Access Service and the manner in which the components are combined to provid
178. ability will be assessed the nonrecurring charges as set forth in 6 8 1 and 6 8 2 following Rearrangement charges from FGD service with SS7 Out of Band Signaling to FGD service with SS7 Out of Band Signaling and Clear Channel Capability will be assessed the first trunk charge in association with Interface Group Category 6 or 9 service Each additional trunk will be assessed the each additional trunk charge in association with Interface Group Category 6 or 9 service The nonrecurring charge for Clear Channel Capability as set forth in 6 8 2 following is assessed per trunk group in addition to the nonrecurring charges per trunk as set forth in 6 8 1 following The removal of the CCC arrangement from existing trunkside service will be treated as a discontinuance of the existing service and installation of new service All associated nonrecurring installation charges will apply for the new service A new minimum period will be established for the new service T 6 7 6 7 1 J K 1 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 117 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Cont d Entrance Facility The Entrance Facility monthly rate is assessed based on the type of facility provided Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 When Lineside Switched Access Service is provided the Voice Grade E
179. ac tsetse tut ta ots ape ete ters era tn tl aia eaten tee boia tant nme ati 15 Cancellation of an Order for Service s sicassessessesiesgasacdesscesesastannsecsssnssbesaedses 40 Changes and Substitutions viis nicecssasessacsssenccass seceecssassndeessnaeed es daseaatabuevncsans 6 Claims and Demands for Damages eeccecssececeeececeeeeeceeeeeceteeeseneeeees 16 COMMECELOIS seseisocdeetech aye ee piensiecs aK SE EE EA ATE ES SERES 55 Coordination With Respect to Network Contingencies cceeceeeseeeees 10 17 Credit Allowance for Service Interruptions sessseseesssessesssereseressseessres 40 DAMAGES vis eceieisases Gaasavsteusn tea cdaveavel sdsapeaccaguacsaua Seevsasenasnaceasaeeaeektpavaanelvenaeuease 13 Definitions irii siesti igot Nel aids aateal a EE ES 56 Design of Customer Services i cicecacsciciactusviccesaseaeesandbicaees anadeceadecoaataseacaceoans 15 Determination of Intrastate Charges for Mixed Interstate and Intrastate Access SOL VICE sisira sie a eenia metas eSEE SEs SAE Saia aS 34 Determination of Jurisdiction for Mixed Interstate and Intrastate Access Service Billing sessesessesesssesssessessseeesseeessresseesseessee 34 Equipment Space and Power 1 scsisisessacsassacceve tecesasasusvaceasdasecea teevassasecsnocesye 14 Identification and Rating of VoIP PSTN Traffic eee eeceeeeeeeeeteeeees 33 1 N Installation and Termination of Services ceeesceeseceeeeeececeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeees 5 Interfere
180. actors will apply for the next two quarters before new factors can be submitted by the customer e If the audit supports the customer s PVU factors the usage for the contested periods will be adjusted to reflect the customer s audited PVU factors M Material moved from Page 33 4 C C M M 2 3 2 3 11 2 3 12 A 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 34 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER Cont d DETERMINATION OF JURISDICTION FOR MIXED INTERSTATE AND INTRASTATE ACCESS SERVICE BILLING When an Access Service Bill as described in 13 3 6 contains both interstate and intrastate billing the jurisdiction will be determined as follows e If the customer s estimate of the interstate charges on the bill constitutes more than ten percent of the total charges on that bill the bill will be provided in accordance with the applicable rules and regulations of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 e If the customer s estimate of the interstate charges on the bill constitutes ten percent or less of the total charges on that bill the bill will be provided in accordance with this Tariff DETERMINATION OF INTRASTATE CHARGES FOR MIXED INTERSTATE AND INTRASTATE ACCESS SERVICE PIU For all Access Service except those services as set forth in 2 3 11 preceding where mixed interstate an
181. additional line or trunk is assessed the each additional move charge per appropriate Interface Group category per Access Order In addition full nonrecurring charges will be assessed for the Entrance Facility per point of termination per Access Order New minimum period requirements at the different serving wire center will be established for the new service The customer will also remain responsible for satisfying all outstanding minimum period charges for the discontinued service M Material moved from Page 122 T M M 6 7 6 7 7 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 124 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS Cont d MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES Customer traffic to end office switches will be measured i e recorded or assumed by the Company at end office switches or access tandem switches Originating and terminating calls will be measured i e recorded or assumed by the Company to determine the basis for computing chargeable access minutes In the event the customer message detail is not available because the T Company lost or damaged tapes or experienced recording system outages the Company shall estimate the volume of lost customer access minutes of use based on previously known values The measured minutes are the chargeable T access minutes for calls over the following serving arrangements e
182. age is used to simulate the frequency characteristic of the 500 type telephone set and the hearing of the average subscriber C Notched Noise The term C Notched Noise denotes the C message frequency weighted noise on a voice channel with a holding tone which is removed at the measuring end through a notch very narrow band filter Commercial Mobile Radio Service CMRS Provider The term Commercial Mobile Radio Service Provider denotes a common carrier as defined by the Federal Communications Commission subject to the Rules set forth in Section 332 of the Communications Act Common Channel Signaling Access Capability CCSAC The term Common Channel Signaling Access Capability denotes the interconnection between the Company s CCSN and a customer s CCSN T N N T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 63 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Common Channel Signaling Network CCSN The term Common Channel Signaling Network denotes a specialized digital signaling network separate from the regular message voice network which interconnects computerized switching systems and has access to special data bases Common Line CL The term Common Line denotes a line trunk or other facility provided under the Exchange and Network Services Tariff of the Company terminated on a central
183. al Switching MUX EF Multiplexer SWC Serving Wire Center TS Tandem Switching TT Tandem Transmission C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 11 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES Cont d EXAMPLE 6 Private Line Service and Switched Access Ordered to a Company Hub LS DS1 DIT Access Tandem CL Common Line CP Customer s Premises DTT Direct Trunked Transport EO End Office EU End User HUB HUB Location LS Local Switching MUX EF Multiplexer EU PL Private Line SWC Serving Wire Center TS Tandem Switching TT Tandem Transmission C C 6 1 6 1 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 12 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES Cont d A Switched Transport 1 General Description The Switched Transport rate category provides the transmission facilities between the customer s premises and the end office switch es where the customer s traffic is switched to originate or terminate its communications Switched Transport is a two way voice frequency transmission path composed of an Entrance Facility EF and a Direct Trunked Transport DTT facility for direct routed traffic For tandem routed traffic the Switched
184. al space or the interconnector designated Virtual EIC equipment Entry Switch See First Point of Switching Envelope Delay Distortion EDD The term Envelope Delay Distortion denotes a measure of the linearity of the phase versus frequency of a channel Equal Level Echo Path Loss ELEPL The term Equal Level Echo Path Loss denotes the measure of Echo Path loss at a 4 wire interface which is corrected by the difference between the send and receive Transmission Level Point TLP ELEPL EPL TLP send TLP receive Exchange The term Exchange denotes a unit generally smaller than a Local Access and Transport Area established by the Company for the administration of communications service in a specified area which usually embraces a city town or village and its environs It consists of one or more central offices together with the associated facilities used in furnishing communications service within that area The exchange includes any Extended Area Service EAS area that is an enlargement of a Company s exchange area to include nearby exchanges One or more designated exchanges comprise a given Local Access and Transport Area T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 68 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Exit Message EXM The term Exit Message denotes a SS7 message sent to a
185. aling or upgrades in Lineside or Trunkside Switched Access Service to FGD trunk groups equipped with SS7 Out of Band Signaling will be performed at Company tandems and end offices designated as having SS7 capabilities SS7 Out of Band Signaling Rearrangement Charges will apply when the following conditions are met The same customer premises quantity of lines or trunks routing traffic type Interface Group category and optional features are maintained Exceptions to this condition are set forth in J following Rearrangement from a one way or two way transmission when the signaling is changing to SS7 Out of Band Signaling will be by trunk group s ordered and received at the same time Multiple lines or trunk groups may be combined into a single FGD trunk group with SS7 Out of Band Signaling when all trunks within the group are traffic engineered as a unit and all the communications paths within the group are interchangeable The disconnect date and connect date on the Access Orders must be the same date when rearranging to a FGD trunk group with SS7 Out of Band Signaling Upgrades from Lineside or Trunkside service types to FGD Switched Access Service with SS7 Out of Band Signaling are available when the above conditions are met M Material moved to Page 103 C C T T C T C C C T T T N N M 6 7 6 7 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 103 State of Sou
186. als are not available delay dial start pulse signaling is provided unless immediate dial signals will be provided in which case no start pulsing signals will be provided FGC is provided with MF address signaling except in certain electromechanical end office switches where MF signaling is not available In such switches the address signaling will be dial pulse or immediate dial pulse whichever is available Up to 12 digits of the called party number dialed by the customer s end user using dual tone MF or dial pulse address signals will be provided by Company equipment to the customer s premises where the Switched Access Service terminates Such called party number signals will be subject to the ordinary transmission capabilities of the Switched Transport provided T T T C C T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 44 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 3 FEATURE GROUP C FGC A Description Cont d 6 No access code is required for FGC switching The telephone number dialed by the customer s end user shall be a seven or ten digit number for calls in the North American Numbering Plan NANP The form of the numbers dialed by the customer s end user is NXX XXXX 0 or 1 NXX XXXX NPA NXX XXXX Oor 1 NPA NXX XXXX 7 FGC switching when used in
187. ampus type configuration of buildings Primary IC PIC The term Primary IC denotes the Interexchange Carrier of choice as designated by an end user for business or residential service or a location provider for a pay telephone Prime Service Vendor The term Prime Service Vendor denotes the status of the Company when contracting directly with the user of TSP service Public Access Line PAL Service The term Public Access Line Service denotes Basic and Smart Public Access Line Service available under the Exchange and Network Services Tariff of the Company for use with pay telephones T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 82 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Protocol The term Protocol denotes a set of rules for conducting interactions between two or more terminals hosts or peripherals These rules consist of syntax header structure semantics actions and reactions that are supposed to occur and timing relative ordering and duration of states and events e X 3 X 28 and X 29 An international set of standards developed by CCITT that provides the protocols for Data Terminals to communicate with the PPSN asynchronously e X 25 An international standard developed by CCITT that provides the foundation for Public Packet Switched Networks e X 75 An international standard d
188. an address such as customer dialed digits which does not explicitly contain information that would allow routing in the signaling network The information needed to access the correct Global Title information is sent to the appropriate STP where the GTT tables reside The STP performs a table look up and then routes the SS7 message to the appropriate CCSN destination Hard Coded Automatic Number Identification Information Digits The term Hard Coded Automatic Number Identification Information Digits denotes the two digit ANI pair assignments which are installed in a switch via a generic switch update provided by the switch vendor Host Computer The term Host Computer denotes the Company computer containing the data for Electronic White Pages EWP Access Service Host Office The term Host Office denotes an electronic switching system which provides call processing capabilities for one or more Remote Switching Modules or Remote Switching Systems Hub The term Hub denotes a Company designated wire center at which bridging multiplexing or connections to other services are performed e g WATS Access Service PPSN and connections of two like services installed as two separate services 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 71 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Immediately Available Funds The term Im
189. and 9 for Feature Groups A and B Customer Specification of Switched Transport Termination This option allows the customer to specify for Feature Group B routed directly to an end office or an access tandem a four wire termination of the Switched Transport at the entry switch in lieu of a Company selected two wire termination This option is available only when the Feature Group B arrangement is provided with Transmission Type B1 performance T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 4 22 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A 4 Cont d SECTION 6 Page 24 Release 3 Effective 6 3 2003 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 25 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES 4 Cont d d Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization MPTS Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization MPTS is an optional feature designed to meet the traffic routing requirements of customers whose Feature Group C and D originating Switched Access Services are routed through an access tandem from multiple customer points of termination POTs MPTS is available in connection with originating Feature Group C and D Services MPTS allows originating Feature Group C and D traffic to be directed via an access tandem to a specific POT designated by the customer MPTS
190. andem switching functions TST is not available from or to a Company Hub TST consists of circuits used in common by multiple customers from the access tandem to an end office For TST the Company will determine the type of facilities to the end office s based on the customer s order for service on a per trunk basis The TST rate category is composed of the rate elements set forth in 1 and 2 following Rates and charges are set forth in 6 8 following Tandem Transmission Tandem Transmission is composed of a fixed per MOU rate and per mile per MOU rate The fixed rate provides for the circuit equipment at the end of the interoffice transmission paths The per mile rate provides for the transmission facilities including intermediate transmission circuit equipment between the end points of the interoffice circuit For purposes of determining the per mile rate mileage will be measured as airline mileage using the V amp H coordinates method Mileage measurement rules are set forth in 6 7 11 following Tandem Switching Tandem Switching is a per MOU rate assessed for utilizing tandem switching functions when tandem routing is requested for trunkside services Tandem Switching is not assessed to FGA Services Access Tandem Trunk Port An access tandem trunk port ATTP is provided for each trunk terminated on the SWC side of the access tandem when the customer has requested tandem routing The ATTP rate is assessed monthly per Fe
191. any will determine the number of VoIP PSTN Traffic minutes of use MOU to which interstate rates will be applied under B preceding by applying an originating Percent VoIP Usage PVU factor to the total intrastate access MOU originated by a Company end user and delivered to the customer and by applying a terminating PVU factor to the total intrastate access MOU terminated by a customer to the Company s end user b The Company will use state average data and the customer provided Facility PVU to determine the monthly recurring credit for terminating VoIP PSTN Traffic c The customer will calculate and furnish to the Company an originating PVU factor representing the whole number percentage of the customer s total originating intrastate access MOU that the customer exchanges with the Company in the LATA that is received from the Company and that is terminated in IP format and that would be billed by the Company as intrastate access MOU d The customer will calculate and furnish to the Company a terminating PVU factor representing the whole number percentage of the customer s total terminating intrastate access MOU that the customer exchanges with the Company in the LATA that is sent to Company and which originated in IP format and that would be billed by the Company as intrastate access MOU e The customer shall not modify their reported PIU factor to account for VoIP PSTN Traffic f The customer will calculate and furnish to the Co
192. apply as set forth in D and E following Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 19 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER CANCELLATION OF AN ACCESS ORDER Cont d C The Critical Dates monitored by the Company for the purpose of calculating a Cancellation Charge are as follows Application Date APP The date the customer provides a firm commitment and sufficient information as detailed in 5 1 1 preceding The APP Date is the date the Company enters the order into the Company s order distribution system This is sometimes referred to as the order date Design Layout Report Date DLRD The date the Design Layout Report which contains the design for the service s ordered is forwarded to the customer Plant Test Date PTD The date acceptance testing is performed with the customer Service Date DD The date the service is due to be made available to the customer This is sometimes referred to as the Due Date 5 2 5 2 3 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 20 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER CANCELLATION OF AN ACCESS ORDER Cont d The percentage of the total provisioning cost incurred by the Company at a particular Critical Date varies by the type of service as shown in E follow
193. are Immediate Action Limits IAL Acceptance Limits AL are set forth in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE This technical reference also provides the basis for determining Switched Access Service maintenance limits Transmission specifications for SS7 Out of Band Signaling are delineated in Technical References GR 394 CORE GR 905 CORE and 77342 Transmission specifications and error performance parameters for DS1 level digital transmission on FGD service equipped with Clear Channel Capability are delineated in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE T T T T T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 79 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS Cont d 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS Following are descriptions of the standard transmission parameter limits T available with Switched Access Services Specific applications for Switched T Access Services and Interface Groups with which the standard transmission parameter limits are provided are set forth in 6 2 preceding T A Transmission Type Al Performance Transmission Type Al performance is provided with the following IAL for FGD Service T 1 Loss Deviation The maximum Loss Deviation of the 1004 Hz loss relative to the Expected Measured Loss EML at 1004 Hz dB is 2 0 dB T 2 Attenuation Distortion
194. as set forth in Section 6 apply G Nonrecurring charges will not apply to establish Peak Day Rerouting Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 19 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Cont d 13 3 15 900 SERVICE ACCESS RESTRICTION A General Description 900 Service Access Restriction prevents access to the 900 network When customers dial a 1 900 direct dialed pay per call number from a restricted telephone number the 900 call is diverted to a Company provided intercept announcement 900 Service Access Restriction is available where technically feasible Customers who request 900 Service Access Restriction on a new telephone number within sixty 60 days from receipt of the telephone number will not be assessed a charge to add 900 Service Access Restriction Customers who request 900 Service Access Restriction on a telephone number after sixty 60 days from the receipt of the telephone number will be assessed a nonrecurring charge per telephone number to add 900 Service Access Restriction as set forth in 13 4 3 F following Requests by customers to remove 900 Service Access Restriction must be submitted to the Company in writing No charge is assessed to remove 900 Service Access Restriction from a telephone number Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13
195. ate as set forth in 6 8 following When Lineside Access service is provided where actual measurement capabilities do not exist the customer will always be billed for the assumed average number of access minutes for all applicable usage rated elements CHANGE OF SWITCHED ACCESS INTERFACE GROUP CATEGORY Changes from one Switched Access Service Interface Group Category to another will be treated as a discontinuance of service and the installation of service with the establishment of a new minimum period as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding When the following conditions are met the nonrecurring charges will not apply T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 120 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 4 CHANGE OF SWITCHED ACCESS INTERFACE GROUP CATEGORY Cont d A Interface Group Category 6 IG6 on Feature Group B Service to Interface Group Category 9 IG9 on Feature Group B and Feature Group D Service e The same customer premises quantity of trunks routing traffic type direction i e one way two way and optional features are maintained e The orders for the change from IG6 to IG9 are received at the same time e The trunks are upgraded from IG6 to IG9 in groups of 24 trunks e In accordance with 6 7 5 following the disconnect date for the FGB Service with IG6 is no more than 90 days from the connect date o
196. ates and charges as set forth in 6 8 following when the following conditions exist a DS3 EF facility is requested or a DS3 EF connects to a DS1 DTT facility or a DS3 EF is requested with a DS3 DS1 multiplexer and a DS1 DSO multiplexer for connection to a Voice Grade DTT facility or a DS1 EF connects to a Voice Grade DTT facility or a higher capacity DTT facility connects to a lower capacity DTT facility at a Company Hub or a DS3 DTT facility connects to an access tandem end office or Company Hub or a DS1 DTT facility transports a combination of Lineside and Trunkside Access to an end office on the same facility or Shared Use facilities are requested B Local Switching The Local Switching rate category provides the local end office switching end user line termination and intercept functions necessary to complete the transmission of Switched Access communications to and from the end users served by the local end office The Local Switching rate category includes the Local Switching rate elements and is divided into two categories LS1 provides local dial switching for Feature Groups A and B except for FGA and FGB used to terminate traffic to a WATS Access Line provided from an equal access end office T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 29 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES B Lo
197. ation of the original order with appropriate cancellation charges applied The Company will review the requested change notify the customer whether the change is a design change if it can be accommodated and if a new Service Date is required If the customer authorizes the Company to proceed with the design change a Design Change Charge will apply A Design Change Charge will apply on a per order per occurrence basis This charge will also apply to change an incorrect address as long as the new address is in the same wire center as the incorrect address and the change is made prior to the issuance of the Design Layout Report DLR If a change of end user s premises within the same SWC is requested Expedited Order Charges may also apply as detailed in D following The applicable design charge is USOC CHARGE e Design Change Charge per order H28 50 00 T T T T T T 5 2 5 2 2 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 16 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER ACCESS ORDER MODIFICATIONS Cont d Expedited Order Charge When placing an Access order for service s for which standard intervals exist a customer may request a Service Date that is prior to the standard interval Service Date A customer may also request an earlier Service Date on a pending standard or negotiated interval Access Order I
198. ation Guide Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 32 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 10 REFERENCE TO OTHER PUBLICATIONS Cont d C The following publications may be obtained through the Government Printing Office Superintendent of Documents Document Control Branch 941 N Capitol St N E Washington D C 20401 TITLE Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System for National Security Emergency Preparedness NSEP Service Vendor Handbook National Communications System NCS H 3 1 2 Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System for National Security Emergency Preparedness NSEP Service User Manual National Communications System NCS M 3 1 1 D The following publication may be obtained from the Telcordia Number Administration Service Center NASC 290 West Mount Pleasant Avenue Livingston NJ 07039 0486 TITLE Guidelines for 800 Data Base E The following publication may be obtained from Telcordia Customer Service 8 Corporate Place PY A 3A184 Piscataway NJ 08854 4196 TITLE SMS 800 User Guide 800 Service Management N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 12 21 2011 Effective 01 21 2012 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS SUBJECT PAGE Availability f r Testing acc sususceaycarsstahyensvenstosegenseaeaistauaneeaaegas ave siedakeseonseveys 15 Bal an xs a
199. ator Access Tandem and the customer s premises the customer will be required to order a separate and final trunk group from the Operator Access Tandem to the customer s premises for each Numbering Plan Area NPA within a LATA to identify the originating NPA Also the customer must order a separate trunk group for each type of coin control signaling that is utilized among the equal access end offices subtending an Operator Access Tandem The Company will not block 101XXXX 1 calls and will route 1O1XXXX 1 interLATA sent paid traffic in accordance to the end user request It will be the responsibility of the 101XXXX 1 dialed carrier to complete the casual 101XXXX 1 interLATA sent paid call or to provide a recorded message to the end user The Company will perform normal acceptance testing for sent paid services for Smart PALs In addition the Company will perform testing for coin control and Operator Trunk Full Feature i e coin collect coin return 1 person to person operator recall overtime and information calls Test tapes must be received from the customer that will be processing the 1 interLATA sent paid traffic 45 days prior to the routing of said 1 traffic to that customer The Company will provide optional testing at the request of the customer as set forth in Section 13 following 6 2 6 2 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 46 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3
200. ature Group trunk excludes FGA N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 15 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 1 GENERAL 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A Switched Transport 1 General Description c Switched Transport TST Rate Category Cont d 6 6 4 Common Transport Multiplexing N Common transport multiplexing equipment is utilized in the end office side of the access tandem when common transport is provided between the access tandem and the subtending end offices This rate is assessed on a per MOU basis Multiplexing equipment associated with a DTT facility ordered to the access tandem is provisioned on the SWC side of the access tandem Multiplexing rates for EF and DTT facilities are described in 6 1 2 A 4 e following and if assessed are in addition to the common transport multiplexing rates N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 16 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES Switched Transport Cont d 2 Switched Transport Facilities Customers requesting Lineside or Trunkside Switched Access Service shall specify the type of Entrance Facility Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 between the customer s premises and the SWC The customer shall also specify if tandem routing or direct routing will be utilized for tr
201. be notified in writing at least 30 days prior to the initial billing date which Exchange Telephone Company s set of terms and conditions apply and of the billing arrangement for any jointly provided Access Service ordered Customers requesting additional service will not be notified unless a change in the existing billing arrangement is made In the event of a change in the existing billing arrangement the customer will be notified in writing at least 30 days prior to the date when the Exchange Telephone Companies involved in the provision of Access Service agree to change from one billing arrangement to another Notification will also include the customer s method of payment 2 4 2 4 7 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 47 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED B Feature Groups B C and D Switched Access Service Cont d 1 Each Exchange Telephone Company involved shall receive a copy of the order The Exchange Telephone Company that accepts the order and or bills the customer is determined as follows a FGB FGC and FGD ordered to an end office The Exchange Telephone Company where the end office is located will accept the order and bill the customer FGB FGC and FGD ordered to an acce
202. ber consists of the Numbering Plan Area NPA plus the seven digit telephone number The Company will automatically transmit CPN with SS7 Out of Band Signaling in those offices suitably equipped with the software that allows customers to elect to block their CPN information from being displayed to the called party This software allows the customer to block their CPN on a per call basis and transmits a privacy indicator as part of the CPN information M M Material moved from Page 74 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 74 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 3 COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 3 1 COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES S Signaling System Seven SS7 Out of Band Signaling Cont d M e Charge Number is the SS7 Out of Band Signaling equivalent of the ten digit ANI N telephone number Charge Number is the automatic transmission of the ten digit billing number of the calling station and the originating line information when a FGD trunk group is provisioned with SS7 Out of Band Signaling Charge Number is provided when the customer requests the ANI optional feature on FGD trunk groups provisioned with SS7 Out of Band Signaling Charge Number information is provided based on the following requirements 1 the telephone number and billing information may be used for billing and collection routing s
203. bill The rates and charges for each Exchange Telephone Company are based upon billing percentages These billing percentages are agreed upon by each Exchange Telephone Company The customer will receive from the non billing Exchange Telephone Company a written agency agreement authorizing payment to the billing Exchange Telephone Company Also termed Single Bill Pass Through Also termed Single Bill Single Tariff 2 4 2 4 7 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 49 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED B Feature Groups B C and D Switched Access Service Cont d 3 4 C If the Exchange Telephone Companies involved cannot agree upon a single bill alternative then each Exchange Telephone Company will render a separate bill to the customer This billing arrangement is described in 4 following When the Exchange Telephone Companies involved agree to render separate bills the following regulations apply Each Exchange Telephone Company involved will accept the order from the customer Each Exchange Telephone Company will render bills for nonrecurring charges as they are incurred Bills for recurring charges will not be rendered until the service ordered can be provided by all of t
204. billing date of a bill for a customer for Access Service under this Tariff the period of service each bill covers and the payment date will be as follows For Miscellaneous Services and non usage sensitive Switched Access Service charges the Company will establish a bill day each month for each customer account The bill will cover non usage sensitive service charges for the ensuing billing period and any known unbilled non usage sensitive charges Any known unbilled usage charges for prior periods and any known unbilled adjustments will also be applied to this bill Payment for such bills is due as set forth in 2 following If payment is not received by the payment date as set forth in 2 following in immediately available funds a late payment penalty will apply as set forth in 2 following Payment Due Date And Late Payment Penalty a All bills dated as set forth in 1 preceding provided to the customer by the Company are due payment date and payable in immediately available funds by the next bill date If such payment date would cause payment to be due on a Saturday Sunday or holiday i e New Year s Day Independence Day Labor Day Thanksgiving Day Veteran s Day Christmas Day and a day when Washington s Birthday or Memorial Day or Columbus Day is legally observed payment for such bills will be due from the customer as follows e If such payment date falls on a Sunday or on a holiday which is observed on a Monday the pay
205. ble notify the customer that temporary discontinuance of the use of a service may be required however where prior notice is not practicable nothing contained herein shall be deemed to preclude the Company s right to discontinue temporarily the use of a service if such action is reasonable under the circumstances In case of such temporary discontinuance the customer will be promptly notified and afforded the opportunity to correct the condition which gave rise to the temporary discontinuance During such period of temporary discontinuance Credit Allowance for Service Interruptions as set forth in 2 4 4 A and B following is not applicable The service provided under this Tariff shall not be used for an unlawful purpose 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 13 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER DAMAGES The customer shall reimburse the Company for damages to the Company facilities for all services utilized to provide services under this Tariff caused by the negligence or willful act of the customer or resulting from the customer s improper use of the Company facilities or due to malfunction of any facilities or equipment provided by other than the Company Nothing in the foregoing provision shall be interpreted to hold one customer liable for another customer s actions The Company will upon reimburs
206. bly equipped end offices and or access tandems However the customer must collect 900 traffic at all access tandems within the LATA Network constraints do not permit multiple tandem arrangements for routing of 900 traffic For 900 Access Service provisioned as Feature Group C or D the customer may establish a separate trunk group or combine 900 traffic with other traffic types for access from suitably equipped end offices and access tandems For 900 Access Service provisioned with traditional signaling and answer supervision network limitations requires routing of 900 traffic from suitably equipped end offices and access tandems via a dedicated trunk group Additionally only 900 traffic will be routed over the dedicated trunk group Measurement of 900 Access Service usage shall be in accordance with the regulations set forth in 6 7 7 following for Feature Group C and D Specifically 900 Access Service originating usage shall be measured in the same manner as that specified for Feature Group C and D whether provisioned separately i e dedicated trunk group or combined with other traffic types The Company must be notified 24 hours prior to any media stimulation The Company maintains the right to apply protective controls i e those actions such as call gapping to ensure the provisioning of acceptable service to all telecommunications users of the Company s network services The nonrecurring charges for 900 Access Service are describe
207. c Cont d 4 PVU Factor Verification M M1 a Not more than twice in any year the Company may request from the customer an overview of the process used to determine the PVU factors the call detail records description of the method for determining how the end user originates and terminates calls in IP format and other information used to determine the customer s PVU factors furnished to the Company in order to validate the PVU factors supplied The customer shall comply and shall reasonably supply the requested data and information within 15 days of the Company s request The Company may dispute the Customer s PVU factor based upon e A review of the requested data and information provided by the customer or customer s refusal to provide the data and information to support the PVU factors e The Company s reasonable review of other market information F C C reports on VoIP lines such as F C C Form 477 or state level results based on the F C C Local Competition Report or other relevant data e A change in the reported PVU factor by more than five percentage points from the preceding quarter If after review of the data and information the customer and the Company establishes revised PVU factors the Company will begin using those revised PVU factors with the next bill period Material moved from Page 33 3 Material moved to Page 33 5 M T C C M M1 Qwest Corporation Acces
208. caiss a eck sctseet E a deena 11 3 8 1 BILLING OP RATES scccsesdesscesacteccdsedeqesesssdesectedgieebscedecde cveuhosestecceots 11 3 8 3 UNMEASURED LINESIDE ACCESS USAGE eeccccccccccsseeessecesceseeeees 11 3 8 4 PERCENT INTERSTATE USE PIU ccccsscccccccceceessssceceeeeeeeees 11 3 8 5 DETERMINATION OF RATES cccceccccccccssesessscsccccceesssessscssceseseees 12 3 9 RATES AND CHARGES genannt aa a n a a n an ai 14 SECTION 4 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE SECTION 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 5 1 GENERAL cea a a a E EIE E 1 5 1 1 ORDERING CONDITIONS o ceccccccccccssessscecccccccesssssssscccccsssussesseececess 1 5 1 2 PROVISION OF OTHER SERVICES cssseccccctsecececcesecccenssecceenes 2 5 1 3 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ccccccccccccsssssssececcccccesssssssceccesssesensesceeess 2 5 2 ACCESS ORDER wae EE EAEE TEE Ae al ade REY oe 3 5 2 1 ACCESS ORDER SERVICE DATE INTERVALS cccsssssseecesecceeeees 11 5 2 2 ACCESS ORDER MODIFICATIONS cccccccsesssescescccccesessssececcecseeees 13 5 2 3 CANCELLATION OF AN ACCESS ORDER ccccccccccccssessssecesceceseees 18 5 2 4 SELECTION OF FACILITIES FOR ACCESS ORDERS ccccceeeeeeee 22 5 2 5 MINIMUM PERIOD ena edacn decee a a aa a aa n 23 5 2 6 MINIMUM PERIOD CHARGES nsnsssssssoesessssssssesrerrsssssssseereresssssseere 25 5 2 7 SHARED USE FACILITIES ccccccccsssescsccccccccsssssscsccescessueeeeesceeess 25 5 2 8 DISCONTINUANCE OF ACCESS SERVICE ccccc
209. cal Switching Cont d LS2 provides local dial switching for Feature Groups C and D for FGA and FGB used to terminate traffic to a WATS Access Line provided from an equal access end office and for Feature Groups A and B originating or terminating access minutes when the service is provided to customers who furnish interstate MTS WATS Local Switching rates are set forth in 6 8 following The application of these rates with respect to the different types of service is as set forth in 6 7 1 following 1 Local End Office Switching T a Common Switching Common Switching provides the local end office switching functions associated with the various access switching arrangements The service arrangements are T described in 6 2 following Included as part of Common Switching are various optional features which the customer can order to meet its specific communications requirements These optional features are described in 6 3 1 following b Transport Termination Transport Termination provides for the line or trunkside arrangements which terminate the Switched Transport facilities Included as part of Transport Termination are various optional termination arrangements These optional terminating arrangements are described in 6 3 2 following The number of Transport Terminations provided for the lineside or trunkside arrangement will be determined by the Company as set forth in 6 5 8 following The number of transmission paths will be
210. cated and the customer shall specify the number of trunks required at each end office from which the customer will receive 1 sent paid traffic The customer is responsible for providing all other operator services signaling capabilities as described in the Operator Services Systems Generic Requirements OSSGR Technical Reference FR 271 and the LATA Switching Systems Generic Requirements LSSGR Technical Reference FR 64 When the Company provides Operator Services Signaling OSS between an Operator Access Tandem and the customer s premises the customer will be required to order a separate and final trunk group from the Operator Access Tandem to the customer s premises for each Numbering Plan Area NPA within a LATA to identify the originating NPA Also the customer must order a separate trunk group for each type of coin control signaling that is utilized among the equal access end offices subtending an Operator Access Tandem The Company will not block 101XXXX 1 calls and will route 101XXXX 1 interLATA sent paid traffic in accordance to the end user request It will be the responsibility of the 101XXXX 1 dialed carrier to complete the casual 101XXXX 1 interLATA sent paid call or to provide a recorded message to the end user Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 52 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED AC
211. ccccccccceeeseseecscceeeeeees 16 2 3 9 COORDINATION WITH RESPECT TO NETWORK CONTINGENCIES cccccssesssessssssssssssssssssssssssssssessseees 17 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS cccccecsseseseeeeseeeeees 17 2 3 11 DETERMINATION OF JURISDICTION FOR MIXED INTERSTATE AND INTRASTATE ACCESS SERVICE BILLING 34 2 3 12 DETERMINATION OF INTRASTATE CHARGES FOR MIXED INTERSTATE AND INTRASTATE ACCESS SERVICE 0ccccceccceeeeees 34 T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 1 2 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 6 2 4 7 2 4 8 2 5 2 5 1 2 6 2 7 2 7 1 2433 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES 00e000 PAYMENT OF RATES CHARGES AND DEPOSITS MINIMUM PERIODS ccccccccessecccceeeeccseeesceseeens CANCELLATION OF AN ORDER FOR SERVICE CREDIT ALLOWANCE FOR SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS 00065 REESTABLISHMENT OF SERVICE FOLLOWING FIRE FLOOD OR OTHER OCCURRENCE ccccceeeeeeeeee TITLE OR OWNERSHIP RIGHTS cccccceeeeeees ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVIDED IN CONJUNCTION WITH A COMMERCIAL MOBILE RADIO SERVICE PROVIDER c cccceeee0 CONNECTIONS 0 ccsscsescsccccccccess
212. ccccccccesssessececceceeeees 25 M Material moved from Page 5 T M N N T M M D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 7 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE SECTION 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL EOE N E E E tach laces EE EE 1 6 1 1 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS AND MANNER OF PROVISION ccccccccccccsesssssceccccccesssecesesscesesenes 2 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES ccccccccccccsssssscsccscccecesssssesccsccsecuseesssseseccseseees 5 6 1 3 SPECIAL FACILITIES ROUTING cccccccccccscesessececccccceseneseecesceseeeees 31 6 1 4 DESIGN LAYOUT REPORT ccccccccccccccccessssscecceccesssseseessceccesesenes 31 6 1 5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING cccccccccccssssssssccccceccssessssecceccesssesesescceseeaees 31 6 1 6 ORDERING OPTIONS AND CONDITIONS ccccccccccccesssseecesceeeeeees 31 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE sistas oodlvivece cutie cbedvecslercelis A a n Ea es 32 6 2 1 FEATURE GROUP A FGA cccccccessessscecececeeeesessseceseceeseeessnaes 33 6 2 2 FEATURE GROUP B FGB ccc ceccceessssececececeesessaeceeeceeeeeesensees 39 6 2 3 FEATURE GROUP C FGO woe ccccccessssecececeeeesesssseceseeeesenenenaees 43 6 2 4 FEATURE GROUP D FGD ccccccccceesesssseceeeceeeceessrseseeeeeceeeees 48 6 2 8 800 DATA BASE ACCESS SERVICE cc
213. ccceccccccccccssessececcecseeeeneneess 56 6 2 9 900 ACCESS SERVICE ccccccsssssscsccscccceessssscsccsccsceusessssscseccseseees 59 6 3 COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES cccccccccccccesessscecccccescssesssescceccssssseusesecesseseeeees 61 6 3 1 COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES csseeecccesececeeeeese 62 6 3 2 TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES eeeeeceeeeeee 76 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS cccccccssssssscecccccceessscsesccecsessenenenss 78 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS cccccccccccseesesssceeees 79 6 4 2 VOICE BAND DATA TRANSMISSION PARAMETER LIMITS 87 T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 8 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 7 24 2002 Effective 7 23 2002 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE 6 5 OBLIGATIONS OF THE COMPANY cccccccececececececececececececeseseceeeeess 88 6 5 1 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 000cscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseseeees 88 6 5 2 DESIGN AND TRAFFIC ROUTING OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE ccccccccccccccecececececececececececeeeeeeeeeess 88 6 5 3 DS1 RECORDS ASSIGNMENT c cccscssssssssssssssssssssssssssessseseeees 89 6 5 4 MULTIPLEXING arinn Ycotentt Sevardk cosa cetetest Mesto 89 6 5 5 PROVISION OF SERVICE PERFORMANCE DATA Q c0cceeeeeeseeeseeees 89 6 5 6 TRUNK GROUP MEASUREMENT REPORTS cccccecececececeeeceeeeees 8
214. ce are provided over the same analog or digital high capacity facility through a common interface The regulations governing the provision of Shared Use Facilities are set forth in the Private Line Transport Service Catalog Switched Access rates and charges as set forth in 6 8 following will apply for each channel of the high capacity facility that is used to provide Switched Access Service M Material moved to Pages 133 and 134 6 7 6 7 13 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 136 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS Cont d PERCENT DIRECT ROUTED PDR FACTOR When the customer orders Trunkside Switched Access Service and the Company is unable to determine routing based on the call detail the Company apportions usage between TST and DTT based on a state PDR factor The PDR factor determines the percentage of traffic to be billed TST rates DTT monthly rates will not be apportioned by the PDR factor The Company calculates the PDR factor in the following manner Step 1 The Company obtains the total billed usage for all Switched Access Services on a state wide basis Step 2 The Company obtains the total billed usage for all Switched Access Services utilizing TST on a state wide basis Step 3 The percentage of TST traffic is obtained by dividing the total TST billed usage obtained in Step 2 by the total billed usage i
215. central office terminations each reached by means of separate telephone numbers and does not require any specific customer premises equipment Equipment subject to this test arrangement is at the discretion of the customer Loss Deviation The term Loss Deviation denotes the variation of the actual loss from the designed value 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 76 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Major Fraction Thereof The term Major Fraction Thereof is any period of time in excess of 1 2 of the stated amount of time As an example in considering a period of 24 hours a major fraction thereof would be any period of time in excess of 12 hours exactly Therefore if a given service is interrupted for a period of thirty six hours and fifteen minutes the customer would be given a credit allowance for two twenty four hour periods for a total of 48 hours Message The term Message denotes a call as defined preceding Milliwatt 102 Type Test Line The term Milliwatt 102 Type Test Line denotes an arrangement in an end office which provides a 1004 Hz tone at 0 dBm0 for one way transmission measurements towards the customer s premises from the Company end office Mobile Telephone Switching Office MTSO The term Mobile Telephone Switching Office denotes the switching facility used by a CMRS p
216. ces provided under this Tariff shall be included in the indemnification However the foregoing indemnification shall not apply to suits claims and demands to recover damages for damage to property death or personal injury unless such suits claims or demands are based on the tortious conduct of the customer its officers agents or employees Tariff SECTION 2 Page 17 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 10 31 2008 Effective 7 14 2009 2 3 2 3 8 C 2 3 9 2 3 10 A M Qwest Corporation Access Service 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER CLAIMS AND DEMANDS FOR DAMAGES Cont d The customer s shall not attempt to hold the Company or the Company s employees agents contractors or invitees liable for and shall hold harmless and indemnify the Company and its employees agents contractors or invitees from and against demands claims causes of action liabilities including punitive damages costs or expenses including reasonable attorneys fees incurred by customer s its employees agents contractors or invitees arising from any acts omissions or negligence of customer its agents employees contractors invitees or visitors or any violation or non performance of any law ordinance or governmental requirement of any kind or any injury or damage to person or property of customer its agents employees contractors invitees or visitors arising out of the use of Company services or property wh
217. cess Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 34 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP A FGA A Description Cont d 6 FGA switching when used in the terminating direction is arranged with dial tone start dial signaling and dial pulse address signaling When used in the terminating direction FGA switching may at the option of the customer be arranged for dual tone multifrequency DTMF address signaling subject to the availability of the equipment at the first point of switching When FGA switching is provided in a hunt group or uniform call distribution arrangement all FGA switching will be arranged for the same type of address signaling No address signaling is provided by the Company when FGA switching is used in the originating direction Address signaling in such cases if required by the customer must be provided by the customer s end user using inband tone signaling techniques Such inband tone address signals will not be regenerated by the Company and will be subject to the ordinary transmission capabilities of the Switched Transport provided FGA switching when used in the terminating direction may be used to access valid NXX codes in the LATA local operator service Qand 0 Directory Assistance 411 and 555 1212 whichever is available emergency reporting service 911 where available
218. cess Service Tariff SECTION 4 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 4 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES SUBJECT PAGE ACCESS OLE vac A AEE E EEE E ores E E E AE 3 Access Order Modifications sesssrsesiissrsesiscsrsesressrsesroirsesisssreerids tisovine 13 Access Order Service Date Intervals ccccc ccc cccccsseseseececccecesseneeecessesseaees 11 Cancellation of an Access Order wo c ccccceeeccceccccccccsssssssececccscessenseeecesceseeanes 18 Desien Chance Char oe nosenie cinne seeacnhe betes sausonabeueea og ia 15 Discontinuance of Access Service o cccceseecececccccccsssssscscceccessuneeeseesceseeees 25 Expedited Order Charge ssi 0ndiseeaanadicniedisiandscianucooiaadwdans 16 General ensena a a Dacencee ha Ueda teeth ok stents abet sa ete be 1 Minimum Period sisne a osc dads sbsdedsnestesaes sesdeaed Ea AT 23 Minimum Period Charges casi sic ceseic senuanes dea atsacadae eotdesqucoruseuseseastaeondebans 25 Negotiated Interval seiirt esgair an iaaa E at O OE OTTE Vaaa 12 Orderin a Conditions scssi rein a EA E 1 Partial Cancellation Charge isisi sienose iro arei e gees rsi aans 14 Provision Of Other ServiceS a a A E aT 2 Selection of Facilities for Access Orders sseeneesessesseenesssssssesrerr
219. ching system where Telephone Exchange Service customer station loops are terminated for purposes of interconnection to each other and to trunks Central Office Prefix The term Central Office Prefix denotes the first three digits NXX of the seven digit telephone number assigned to a customer s telephone exchange service when dialed on a local basis Centralized Automatic Reporting On Trunks CAROT Testing The term Centralized Automatic Reporting on Trunks Testing denotes a type testing which includes the capacity for measuring operational and transmission parameters Channel s The term Channel s denotes an electrical or photonic in the case of fiber optic based transmission systems communications path between two or more POT Channelize The term Channelize denotes the process of multiplexing wider bandwidth or higher speed channels into narrower bandwidth or lower speed channels or vice versa D T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 62 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Charge Number CN The term Charge Number denotes the SS7 Out of Band Signaling parameter which is equivalent to the ten digit ANI telephone number C Message Noise The term C Message Noise denotes the frequency weighted average noise within an idle voice channel The frequency weighting called C mess
220. chnical Reference GR 334 CORE 2 Available with FGB Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 148 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT E Optional Features Cont d NONRECURRING MONTHLY USOC CHARGE RATE 4 Multiplexing 1 e Entrance Facility per arrangement DS1 to Voice Grade MKW1X FM61X 75 00 R 199 98 R DS3 to DSI MKW3X FM63X 200 00 R 252 37 R e DTT Facility per arrangement DS1 to Voice Grade M6W1X FM6YX 75 00 R 199 98 R DS3 to DSI M6W3X FM6ZX 200 00 R 252 37 R 1 Nonrecurring charges apply when the MUX is not installed at the same time as an Entrance Facility or a DTT facility Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 149 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 5 22 2015 Effective 7 1 2015 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES Cont d 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING A Local End Office Switching RATE PER ACCESS MINUTE e LSI Feature Groups A and B Originating 0 008557 Terminating 0 000807 R e LS2 Feature Groups C and D Originating 0 008557 Terminating 0 000807 R e End Office Shared Port Originating 0 000747 Terminating 0 000306 R MONTHLY USOC RATE e End Office Dedicated Trunk Port 1 per trunk P4TWX 4 23 R 1 The End Office Dedicated Trunk Port rate was calculated assuming a 50 50 split of the originating and ter
221. chnical Reference GR 905 CORE GR 394 CORE and 77342 When rearranging signaling to SS7 Out of Band Signaling a SS7 Out of Band Signaling Rearrangement Charge applies as described in 6 7 1 following Clear Channel Capability Clear Channel Capability CCC is the ability to send any combination of ones marks and zeros spaces in the 192 information bits of each frame This permits 24 DSO 64 kbps services or 1 536 Mbps of customer information on the 1 544 Mbps line rate Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution B8ZS line code conformity is required The B8ZS line code is described in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE CCC is available on FGD service when the trunkside service is equipped with SS7 Out of Band Signaling and Interface Group 6 or 9 on separate trunk s in suitably equipped digital Company end offices or access tandems CCC may be utilized in conjunction with 800 DB Access Service for transmission of 8XX data traffic where technically feasible CCC equipped trunkside service requires a specific traffic type i e CCC Originating and or CCC Terminating as set forth in 6 1 1 preceding The description and application of rates and charges for CCC are set forth in 6 7 1 following T T C C T T T 6 3 6 3 2 A 1 2 a Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 76 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON
222. cioestis eiside 1 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Suenan a a N Rn a aos 2 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX iata i tuts a E aa oc tested Aa EEEE aeina 13 1 4 TARIFEHORMA T nnana aaia a E a RA A a eT SR 20 1 4 1 LOCATION OF MATERIAL 0cccscesssssssesssssssesssssssssssssssessssseseeees 20 1 4 2 OUTLINE STRUCTURE asoini ties itaient 20 1 4 3 RATE TABLE Sor ann aE tac ecco TE AA teeth aes 21 1 4 4 USOC COLUMN meterie a e o a iian 21 1 5 EXPLANATION OF TARIFF CHANGE SYMBOLG sscssecescccceseeseeeees 22 1 6 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS csssscecescccccsessssssceccessessenenenss 23 1 7 TRADEMARKS SERVICE MARKS AND TRADE NAMES ccceeeeeeeee 26 1 8 REFERENCE TO OTHER TARIFFS AND OR PRICE LISTS 00e0eeee 26 1 9 REFERENCE TO TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS cccccssssesseccscceseeseeeese 27 1 10 REFERENCE TO OTHER PUBLICATIONS cccccccccccccsssesseseccecseseuseeeess 31 SECTION 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 1 UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY cccccssssssssssssssssssssssessssseseeesees 1 2 1 1 SS COPE meanganan dat oc tates ocedet a toe toes LT 1 2152 LIMEPA TIONS Soten a aa beds andes coset setedude eoekdt uoeuseces Goes 1 2 1 3 TTA BIDE Yet et et LD Ales Bla dT DM A SE Ble Bla Ls 3 2 1 4 PROVISION OF SERVICES cccccccccccececesecececececececesececeseeeeesueeeeas 5 2 1 5 INSTALLATION AND TERMINATION OF SERVICES ccceceeceeeeeees 5 2 1 6 MAINTAINING SERVICES ccccccccececececececececececececececececececesecueass 6 2 1 7 CHAN
223. city 1 e DS1 of a DS3 facility for providing CCSAC the customer shall place an order for each individual CCSAC Service from Section 20 following and specify the channel assignment for the Shared Use facility The customer must dedicate at a minimum one DS1 facility for the CCS Links Since a minimum of one DS1 is utilized for CCS Links the number of channels apportioned for CCSAC will be in multiples of 24 channels All rates and charges will be apportioned as set forth in 2 7 1 preceding Where PLTS or Switched Access Service is provided and a portion of the facility is utilized for Shared Use to a Hub rates and charges are apportioned for the facility to the Hub as set forth in 2 7 1 preceding and individual service rates and charges for CCSAC apply from the Hub to the Company STP as set forth in Section 20 following PLTS AND SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISIONED WITH AN OPTICAL INTERFACE When a customer chooses to use a portion of the available capacity of a PLTS provisioned with an optical interface all rates and charges are apportioned as set forth in 2 7 2 preceding The optical interface is ordered and provided from Section 7 of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 The rate for the optical interface as set forth in 6 8 following is for the billing of Shared Use only T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS
224. company trust corporation governmental entity or any other entity as defined under Part 64 708b of the F C C Rules and Regulations Answer Disconnect Supervision The term Answer Disconnect Supervision denotes the transmission of the switch trunk equipment supervisory signal off hook or on hook to the customer s POT as an indication that the called party has answered or disconnected T T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 58 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Attenuation Distortion The term Attenuation Distortion denotes the difference in loss at specified frequencies relative to the loss at 1004 Hz unless otherwise specified Automatic Number Identification AND The term Automatic Number Identification denotes the automatic transmission of information digits and a seven or ten digit number to the customer s premises for calls originating in the LATA to identify the calling station Automatic Number Identification Information Digits ANIii The term Automatic Number Identification Information Digits denotes the two digit ANIii pair assignment made by the North American Numbering Plan Administrator The information digits precede the seven or ten digit telephone number on the ANI record and inform the customer of the calling party s class of service for billing routing and s
225. contact name or telephone number and e Change of jurisdiction All other service rearrangements will be charged as set forth following a If the change involves the addition of or a modification to an optional feature which has a separate nonrecurring charge that nonrecurring charge will apply b If due to technical limitations of the Company a customer could not combine its 800 DB Access Service and or 900 Access Service traffic with its other trunk side Switched Access Services no charge shall apply to combine these trunk groups when it becomes technically possible T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 100 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C 3 Cont d c If due to an office replacement a customer requests conversion from one way to two way trunks and the request is made six months in advance of the office replacement due date the nonrecurring charges will not apply d For all other changes including the addition of or modifications to optional features without separate nonrecurring charges a charge equal to one half the Switched Transport per line or per trunk nonrecurring i e installation charge will apply This one half nonrecurring charge is assessed the first installation charge for the first line or trunk and each additional line or tru
226. creening and completion of the originating subscriber s call or transaction or for services directly related to the originating subscriber s call or transaction 2 the Charge Number information shall not be reused or resold without notifying the originating subscriber and obtaining the affirmative consent of such subscriber for such reuse or resale and 3 Charge Number information shall not be disclosed except as permitted by 1 and 2 preceding for any purpose other than e performing the services or transactions that are the subject of the originating subscriber s call e ensuring network performance security and the effectiveness of call delivery e compiling using and disclosing aggregate information and e complying with applicable law or legal process N e Carrier Selection Parameters CSP is the automatic transmission of a signaling indicator which signifies to the customer that the call being processed originated from a presubscribed line or by dialing the 101XXXX code M Material moved to Page 73 6 3 6 3 1 S Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 75 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Signaling System Seven SS7 Out of Band Signaling Cont d The technical specifications for the CPN and CSP parameters are described in Te
227. d 5 Service Rearrangement a SS7 Out of Band Signaling 1 Service Order Rearrangement Charge NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE e One way transmission to SS7 FGD two way NR6S1 FN7S1 97 72 e Two way transmission to SS7 FGD two way NR6S2 FN7S2 97 72 2 SS7 Trunk Rearrangement Charge a One way transmission to SS7 FGD two way e Per first trunk in a SS7 trunk group Interface Groups 1 and 2 NR61U FN71U 180 34 Interface Group 6 NR61V FN71V 176 44 Interface Group 9 NR61W FN71W 176 44 e Per each additional trunk in a SS7 trunk group Interface Groups 1 and 2 NR61X FN71X 15 18 Interface Group 6 NR61LY FN71LY 11 28 Interface Groups 9 NR61Z FN71Z 11 28 T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 7 25 2002 SECTION 6 Page 144 Release 3 Effective 8 15 2002 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT D 5 a 2 Cont d b Two way transmission to SS7 FGD two way e Per first trunk in a SS7 trunk group Interface Groups 1 and 2 Interface Group 6 Interface Group 9 e Per each additional trunk in a SS7 trunk group Interface Groups 1 and 2 Interface Group 6 Interface Group 9 b FGB or FGD Tandem to Direct Routed Access e Per first trunk in a Direct Routed Trunk Group Interface Groups 1 and 2 Interface Group 6 Interface Group 9 e Per each additional trunk in a Direct Routed Trunk Group
228. d Access Service which is available to customers for their use in furnishing their services to end users provides a two point electrical communications path between a customer s premises and an end user s premises It provides for the use of terminating switching transport facilities and common subscriber plant of the Company Switched Access Service provides for the ability to originate calls from an end user s premises to a customer s premises and to terminate calls from a customer s premises to an end user s premises in the LATA where it is provided Specific references to material describing the elements of Switched Access Service are provided in 6 1 1 and 6 1 2 following Rates and charges for Switched Access Service are set forth in 6 8 following The application of rates for Switched Access Service is described in 6 7 following Rates and charges for services other than Switched Access Service e g a customer s interLATA toll message service may also be applicable when Switched Access Service is used in conjunction with these other services Descriptions of such applicability are provided in 6 2 1 A 8 6 2 1 B 4 6 2 2 A 7 6 2 2 B 3 6 2 3 A 7 6 2 4 A 5 6 2 5 4 8 6 2 5 B 4 6 7 8 and 6 7 10 following Finally a credit is applied against FGA Switched Access Service charges as described in 6 7 9 following T T T 6 1 6 1 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 2 State of South Dakota
229. d DTT facilities A nonrecurring charge is assessed per arrangement when multiplexing equipment is not installed at the same time as the associated Entrance Facility and or DTT facility The multiplexing monthly rate is assessed on a per arrangement basis Interconnection Charge The Interconnection Charge as set forth in 6 8 following is assessed on a per minute of use basis to originating Switched Access minutes of use When Switched Access service is jointly provided between the Company and another Exchange Telephone Company as set forth in 2 4 7 preceding the Company will assess the Interconnection Charge only when the end office is in the Company territory C 6 7 6 7 2 6 7 3 6 7 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 119 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS Cont d MINIMUM PERIODS Minimum periods for Switched Access Service are described in 5 2 5 preceding MINIMUM MONTHLY CHARGE Switched Access Service is subject to a minimum monthly charge The minimum charge applies for the total capacity provided The minimum monthly charge consists of the following elements The minimum monthly charge for usage rated elements is the sum of the charges set forth in 6 8 following for the measured or assumed usage for the month For monthly rated elements the minimum monthly charge is the tariffed monthly r
230. d POM The CCSAC PIU and POM reports as set forth in 2 3 10 preceding will serve as the basis for prorating the charges The percentage of a CCSAC rate element to be charged as intrastate is applied in the following manner For the following chargeable rate elements CCSAC Entrance Facility Direct Link Transport CCS Links STP Port Multiplexing TCAP message charges and all nonrecurring charges multiply one hundred percent minus the CCSAC PIU times the quantity of chargeable elements times the stated Tariff rate per element For chargeable rate elements associated with ISUP Call Set up requests multiply the percent intrastate use 100 minus the sum of the CCSAC PIU plus the CCSAC POM times the actual use times the stated Tariff rate The CCSAC PIU and POM factors will change as revised declarations are submitted as set forth in 2 3 10 preceding When mixed interstate and intrastate Access Service is provided on those services set forth in 2 3 11 preceding and the jurisdiction of the service is determined in accordance with 2 3 11 preceding to be an interstate service one hundred percent 100 of all recurring rates i e daily and monthly and all nonrecurring charges of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 will apply If the jurisdiction of the service is determined to be an intrastate service one hundred percent 100 of the charges in this Tariff will apply T 2 4 2 4 1 A Qwest Corporation
231. d a reasonable period if the renovation of the original location on the premise affected is not practical within the allotted time period B Nonrecurring Charges Apply Nonrecurring Charges apply for establishing service at a different location on the same premises or at a different premises pending re establishment of service at the original location 2 4 2 4 6 2 4 7 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 45 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES Cont d TITLE OR OWNERSHIP RIGHTS The payment of rates and charges by customers for the services offered under the provisions of this Tariff does not assign confer or transfer title or ownership rights to proposals or facilities developed or utilized respectively by the Company in the provision of such services ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED The Multiple Exchange Carriers Access Billing Guidelines MECAB and the Multiple Exchange Carriers Ordering and Design Guidelines MECOD are the standards on which the regulations in the following paragraphs are based These standards determine the ordering rating and billing for Access Services when the service is provided by more than one Exchange Telephone Company All information necessary for billing ordering and design coordination will be
232. d in 6 7 1 G following 6 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 61 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES Following are descriptions of the various optional features that are available in lieu of or in addition to the standard features provided with the Switched Access Services They are provided as either Common Switching or Transport Termination options 6 3 6 3 1 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 62 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Call Denial On Line Or Hunt Group This option allows the screening of terminating calls within the LATA and the completion only of calls to 411 611 911 8XX 555 1212 and a Company specified set of NXXs within the Company local exchange calling area of the dial tone office in which the arrangement is provided All other toll calls are routed to a reorder tone or recorded announcement This feature is provided in all Company electronic end offices and where available in electromechanical end offices It is available with FGA Service Code Denial on Line or Hunt Group This option allows the screening of terminating calls within the LA
233. d intrastate Access Service is provided all charges i e nonrecurring monthly and or usage including optional features charges will be prorated between interstate and intrastate The PIU factors provided in the jurisdictional reports as set forth in 2 3 10 preceding will serve as the basis for prorating the charges The percentage of an Access Service to be charged as interstate is applied in the following manner For monthly and nonrecurring chargeable rate elements multiply the percent interstate use times the quantity of chargeable elements times the stated tariff rate per element In the event that the customer has provided a separate percent interstate use for terminating access for FGD the projected PIU factor for originating access minutes of use will be used to determine the apportionment of charges For usage sensitive i e access minutes and calls chargeable rate elements multiply the percent interstate use times actual use i e measured or Company assumed average use times the stated tariff rate The PIU factor will change as revised usage reports are submitted as set forth in 2 3 10 preceding T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 35 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 12 DETERMINATION OF INTRASTATE CHARGES FOR MIXED INTERSTATE AND INTRASTATE ACCESS SERVICE Cont d B CCSAC PIU an
234. d user shall be a seven or ten digit number for calls in the North American Numbering Plan NANP The form of the numbers dialed by the customer s end user is NXX XXXX 0 or 1 NXX XXXX NPA NXX XXXX 0 or 1 NPA NXX XXXX When the 101XXXX access code is used FGD switching also provides for dialing the digit 00 for access to the customer s operator 911 for access to the Company s emergency reporting service or at the customer s option the end of dialing digit for cut through access to the customer s premises When SWITCHNET 56 Service is provided with FGD the standard FGD dialing pattern is used FGD switching will be arranged to accept calls from telephone exchange service locations without the need for dialing 101XXXX uniform access code Each telephone exchange service line may be marked with a presubscription code to identify which 101XXXX uniform access code its calls will be directed to for interLATA service Presubscription codes are applied as set forth in Section 13 following When a customer has had FGB access in an end office and subsequently replaces the FGB access with FGD access at the mutual agreement of the customer and the Company the Company will for a period of 90 days after the installation of the FGD access service unless the customer requests a shorter period direct calls dialed by the customer s end users using the customer s previous FGB access code to the customer s FGD access service The cust
235. denotes a logical channel between two points on the network that is established by service order and available on a permanent basis No call establishment call termination or network address is associated with a permanent virtual circuit Phase Jitter The term Phase Jitter denotes the unwanted phase variations of a signal N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 80 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 6 DEFINITIONS Cont d Point Of Termination POT The term Point of Termination denotes a point at or near a Customer designated premises at which the Company s responsibility for the provision of Access Service ends 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 81 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Premises The term Premises denotes a building portion of a building in a multi tenant building or buildings on continuous property except Railroad Right of Way etc not separated by a public highway It may also denote a customer owned enclosure or utility vault located aboveground or underground on private property or on customer acquired Right of Way Except for an end user that offers Telecommunications Services exclusively as a reseller this term is not to be limited to one building but applies as well to a complex or c
236. descuentessuneannsacncessnens sdndeace 5 Cancellation of An Order for Service cceeeececesceeeesececeteeeesneeeeneeeenaeeees 2 Carrier Common Line Access Service visccscscsssesscesasnatbien seeosnncausaghendeuesoensaeons 3 Change of Feature Group T ype savcs ccecvcetesdnesaanene ovaciauedacaisbedsdes lncsactenesoranase 6 Changes and Substitutions 5 3cc sacswersacsseeccedaavecaiacipeecesesonccatesedegaterunsateess 2 Claims and Demands for Damages cceeeccecesececeeeceeeeeeeesteeeeneeeenaeeees 2 Clear Channel Capability sieicedisscccataccaciccssvanceeussedanaassntert aiii ia 6 Common Channel Signaling Access Capability CCSAC seese 20 Common Channel Signaling Network CCSN w eee eeseceeeceeeeeeeeenaeenes 20 Common Switching and Transport Termination Optional POaturesscsin3cas 3 53sec inre i a E T E DRG 6 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 14 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX Cont d SUBJECT SECTION Common Switching Optional Features eee eeceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeceteeeenteeeees CONNECHIONS isisisi isset osen ann Es ete es el ee a esaa Cooperative Scheduled Testing cacisisacsgacs susslessttevaueseatecssqueetuentinecateaatus aeavens Coordination with Respect to Network Contingencies eeeeecereeeeee Credit Allowance for Service Interruptions sessssseesssessesssesessreesseessres
237. determined as set forth in 6 5 7 M following M M Material moved from Page 30 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 30 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES B Local Switching Cont d 2 Line Termination Functions WATS Access Line Terminations are provided for end user lines terminating in the local end offices The WATS Access Line Terminations are differentiated by line vs trunkside terminations In addition there are various types of originating and terminating lineside terminations depending on the type of signaling associated with the WATS Access Line Lineside terminations are available with either dial pulse or dual tone multifrequency address signaling 3 Intercept Function The Intercept function provides for the termination of a call at a Company Intercept operator or recording The operator or recording tells a caller why a call as dialed could not be completed and if possible provides the correct number M 4 End Office Shared Port N The End Office Shared Port rate provides for the termination of common transport trunks in shared end office ports and in remote switching system or module RSS or RSM ports The End Office Shared Port rate is assessed on a per MOU basis to all trunkside originating and terminating access minutes utilizing tandem routing to an end office If tandem rou
238. e The Company s liability for Recording Service is as follows If message detail is not available due to the Company s error or omission lost or damaged tapes or incurred recording system outages the Company will estimate the volume of the messages and associated revenue based on previously known values When the Company is notified that due to the Company s omission or error incomplete message data has been provided to a customer the Company will make every reasonable effort to reconstruct such detail and to provide it in magnetic tapes or retransmit it to the customer at no additional charge Recorded customer message detail is not retained by the Company for more than 45 days AUDIT PROVISIONS Upon reasonable written notice by the customer to the Company the customer shall have the right through its authorized representative to examine and audit during normal business hours and at reasonable intervals as determined by the Company all such records and accounts as may under recognized accounting practices contain information bearing upon the determination of revenues for which amounts may be payable to the customer and to request detail supporting the billed charges The information subject to the audit will be limited to the period of time for which the service s were provided All information received or reviewed by the customer or its authorized representative is considered confidential and is not to be distributed provided or
239. e centered on a major city and generally cover an area the size of a state Intrastate Communications The term Intrastate Communications denotes any communications within a state subject to oversight by a state regulatory commission as provided by the laws of the state involved Kilosegment The term Kilosegment denotes one thousand segments N N 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 73 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Letter of Authorization LOA The term Letter of Authorization denotes the signed authorization form from a customer or agent who has authority to act on behalf of the customer for billing and service related issues Lineside Connection The term Lineside Connection denotes a connection of a transmission path to the line side of a local exchange switching system Local Access and Transport Area LATA The term Local Access and Transport Area denotes a geographic area established for the provision and administration of communications service It encompasses one or more designated exchanges which are grouped to serve common social economic and other purposes T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 74 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d
240. e terms of this Section b No prorating or back billing will be done based on the jurisdictional report However usage will be billed utilizing the POM percentage that was in effect at the time the usage was generated c The customer shall maintain and retain the work papers that show how the POM was determined and a summary derived from the actual records for a minimum twelve 12 month period which statistically substantiates each POM provided to the Company This summary at a minimum shall include month year and state If the customer requests the Company to provide data per the terms of 2 3 10 B 6 preceding the Company will comply with the terms of this Section with respect to the data it provides M Material moved to Page 28 1 C C C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 28 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued March 11 2005 Effective May 17 2005 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS C Jurisdictional Reports 2 Percent Other Message POM Factor Cont d d The Company may request the data used to develop the POM or a statistically valid sample of such data on a prospective basis not to exceed a consecutive three month period The data will be used to statistically substantiate the POM provided to the Company and the process by which it is developed Such data shall consist of call or message information of suffic
241. e 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF Address Signaling The term Dual Tone Multifrequency Address Signaling denotes a type of signaling that is an optional feature of Lineside Switched Access Service It may be utilized when Lineside Switched Access Service is being used in the terminating direction from the POT with the customer to the local exchange end office An office arranged for DTMF Signaling would expect to receive address signals from the customer in the form of DTMF signals Echo Control The term Echo Control denotes the control of reflected signals in a telephone transmission path Echo Path Loss EPL The term Echo Path Loss denotes the measure of reflected signal at a four wire POT without regard to the send and receive Transmission Level Point Echo Return Loss ERL The term Echo Return Loss denotes a frequency weighted measure of return loss over the middle of the voiceband approximately 500 to 2500 Hz where talker echo is most annoying Effective 2 Wire The term Effective 2 Wire denotes a condition which permits the simultaneous transmission in both directions over a channel but it is not possible to ensure independent information transmission in both directions Effective 2 wire channels may be terminated with 2 wire or 4 wire interfaces T T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service
242. e Company shall provide the Switched Access Service to the carrier subject to the following rules e If the Company provides the Switched Transport and provides end office local switching functions the customer will be assessed all applicable Switched Access Service rates i e Switched Transport and Local Switching Carrier Common Line rates will not be assessed e If the Company provides the Switched Transport and does not provide end office local switching functions the Company will assess all applicable Switched Access Service rates Local Switching and Carrier Common Line rates will not be assessed by the Company The mileage to be used to determine the Switched Transport rate is calculated as set forth in 6 7 11 following T T T N N T T T D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 55 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 5 CONNECTIONS 2 5 1 GENERAL Equipment and Systems i e terminal equipment multiline terminating systems and communications systems may be connected with Switched Access Service furnished by the Company where such connection is made in accordance with the provisions specified in Technical Reference Publication AS No 1 and 2 1 preceding 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 56 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GEN
243. e GR 334 CORE Testing Capabilities FGC is provided in the terminating direction where equipment is available with seven digit access to balance 100 type test line milliwatt 102 type test line nonsynchronous or synchronous test line automatic transmission measuring 105 type test line data transmission 107 type test line loop around test line short circuit test line and open circuit test line In addition to the tests described in 6 1 5 preceding which are included with the installation of service Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing Automatic Scheduled Testing Cooperative Scheduled Testing or Manual Scheduled Testing and Nonscheduled Testing are available as set forth in Section 13 following for FGC T T C C T T 6 2 6 2 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 48 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d FEATURE GROUP D FGD A Description 1 FGD is provided at Company designated end office switches whether routed directly to an end office or via Company designated electronic access tandem switches FGD which is available to all customers provides a trunkside termination through the use of end office or access tandem switch trunk equipment Wink start start pulsing and answer supervisory signaling are sent by the terminati
244. e a complete Access Service The following diagrams are not intended to depict all serving arrangements available Common line rate elements are described in Section 3 preceding T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 6 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES Cont d EXAMPLE 1 Switched Access Service Ordered with Tandem Routing TT DS1 EF AT CP EU DS1 DTT TS LS AT Access Tandem CL Common Line CP Customer s Premises DTT Direct Trunked Transport EF Entrance Facility EO End Office EU End User LS Local Switching SWC Serving Wire Center TS Tandem Switching TT Tandem Transmission C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 7 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES Cont d EXAMPLE 2 Switched Access Service Ordered with DS1 EF and DS1 DTT Facility C CP DS1 DTT LS CL Common Line CP Customer s Premises EF Entrance Facility EO End Office EU End Users LS Local Switching SWC Serving Wire Center C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 8 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES Co
245. e facilities to be tested available to the Company at times mutually agreed upon 13 3 13 3 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 12 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Cont d PROVISION OF ACCESS SERVICE BILLING INFORMATION A Primary Access Service Billing Copy 1 The customer will receive its primary access service monthly bills and Customer Service Records CSRs in a standard paper format at no charge At the option of the customer primary access service monthly bills and CSRs may be requested on magnetic tape reel floppy diskette or transmitted by electronic data transmission to the customer s premises in lieu of the standard paper format at no charge When a customer selects a primary billing copy in lieu of the standard paper format the customer will receive an abbreviated bill in paper format for remittance purposes at no charge The abbreviated bill will conform with industry standard billing data output Upon Company acceptance of an order for electronic data transmission the Company will determine the period of time to implement the transmission of such material on an individual order basis Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 13 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINE
246. e first service order processed First Point of Switching The term First Point of Switching denotes the first Company location at which switching occurs on the terminating path of a call proceeding from the customer s premises to the terminating end office and at the same time the last Company location at which switching occurs on the originating path of a call proceeding from the originating end office to the customer s premises Flexible Automatic Number Identification The term Flexible Automatic Number Identification denotes the two digit ANIii pair assignments which are installed in a switch via a flexible software program controlled by the Company Frequency Shift The term Frequency Shift denotes the change in the frequency of a tone as it is transmitted over a channel N N 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 70 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Grandfathered The term Grandfathered denotes Terminal Equipment Multiline Terminating Systems and Protective Circuitry directly connected to the facilities utilized to provide services under the provisions of this Tariff and which are considered grandfathered under Part 68 of the F C C s Rules and Regulations Global Title Translation The term Global Title Translation denotes a specific routing translation in a STP A Global Title is
247. e number of subscriber lines in the access area i e local calling area LATA or end offices subtending the access tandem as appropriate of the entry switch that are served by equal access end offices to the total number of subscriber lines in that access area The ratio thus developed is applied to the total measured or assumed originating FGA usage terminating FGA usage originating FGB usage or terminating FGB usage as applicable to determine the usage to be billed at premium rates unless adjusted as set forth in 3 following The ratios used to determine the premium usage will be updated on a quarterly basis The ratios to be used for the succeeding quarter will be provided to the customer with the last bill rendered in the quarter or mailed separately within five working days after the first day of the new quarter i e January April July and October Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 110 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES D 3 b 2 Cont d 3 For purposes of administering this provision 1 subscriber lines are defined as exchange service lines Centrex lines and Centrex type lines provided by the Company under its local and or general exchange service tariff 2 the access area is defined as the local calling area of the dial tone for originatin
248. ear Channel Capability Common Switching Optional Features 20 0 0 eeeceesecceceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaes 75 Description and Application of Rates and Charges 0 ec eeeeeeseeeeeeeees 115 Common Switching Optional Features 20 0 0 ee eeceeeeceeeeececeeeeeceteeeeeteeeees 62 Common Switching and Transport Termination Optional Features 61 UA TOUGH coe nasie e a E aE E a theses 67 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Index Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE SUBJECT PAGE Delay Dial Start Pulsing Signaling 0 eee eeeeeeececseececeteeeesteeeeneeeenaeeees 67 Description and Application of Rates and Charges 96 Design and Traffic Routing of Switched Access Service secsec 88 Design Blocking Probability 2 0 0 0 ceeceeececsscecseeeeceneeeeseeesseeeeseeeenaeeees 91 Design Layout Report onrera t e nea E e Mavens 31 Design of Switched Access Services cessccesecesssecessseceesscceesseceensceeees 95 Determination of Number of End Office Transport Terminations 90 Determination of Number of Transmission Paths ceeesceeeseeeeeeeeeees 90 Dial Pulse Address Signaling 5 scscsisicscsscassedsnteathessennstensedeqoosaeeonseedenesoanteasaes 68 Direct Trunked Transport i sccsisecesssscapesasvenndencasgeteaca taseintasnsecceunesdaanacostaa cone 117 DSI R cords Assignment ass cgeucacaets cutsacadenSadeg teu sattccadec
249. ecurring charge for a PIC change is set forth in D following The applicable primary IC change charge as set forth in D following will be determined based on whether the change is requested through manual or electronic means 1 A manual change is defined as a change submitted to a customer service representative from an end user request or by a wholesale provider request 2 An electronic change is defined as a change submitted by an IC to the Company through the Regional Subscription System RSS or processed from an electronic source such as a Company sponsored website regardless of whether some manual processing is required T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 5 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 3 20 2001 Effective 4 21 2001 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 3 INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER SUBSCRIPTION B Terms and Conditions Cont d 2 Dispute Application for IC Subscription If there is a conflict between an end user a PSP or their respective agent on one hand and the IC on the other hand over the designation of the primary IC the Company will honor the designation selected by the end user a PSP or their respective agent regardless of any contractual obligations the end user PSP or agent may have with one or more ICs If there is a conflict between an end user and or a PSP on one hand and their
250. ed subject to the terms and conditions of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 e WATS Access Service options are available in conjunction with WATS Access Service These options are provided in Company designated WSO s and are available for use with WATS Access Service only WATS Access Service options are available in conjunction with FGC and FGD as specified in CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 T T T 6 3 6 3 1 Q Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 72 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d FGA InterLATA Toll Denial This option provides the screening of all calls on terminating FGA lines and for the completion only of calls to 411 611 911 800 800 type 555 1212 Local Information Delivery Services and 0 or 1 intraLATA All interLATA calls 950 XXXX and 101X XXX are routed to a recorded announcement This feature is provided in all Company end offices where technically available It is available with FGA This feature does not affect calls placed on originating FGA lines Customers requesting Lineside Access without the InterLATA Toll Denial option will be responsible for InterLATA calls recorded on FGA line s 950 on FGD FGD Access Service as set forth in 6 2 4 preceding may
251. ed Access minutes of use C M M Material moved from Page 30 6 1 6 1 3 6 1 4 6 1 5 6 1 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 31 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL Cont d SPECIAL FACILITIES ROUTING Any customer may request that the facilities used to provide Switched Access Service be specially routed The regulations rates and charges for Special Facilities Routing i e Diversity are as set forth in Section 11 following DESIGN LAYOUT REPORT The Company will provide to the customer the makeup of the facilities and services provided from the customer s premises to the first point of switching This information will be provided in the form of a Design Layout Report The Design Layout Report will be provided to the customer at no charge and will be reissued or updated whenever these facilities are materially changed ACCEPTANCE TESTING At no additional charge the Company will at the customer s request cooperatively test at the time of installation the following parameters loss C notched noise C message noise 3 tone slope d c continuity and operational signaling When the Switched Transport is provided with Interface Group 2 6 and 9 as available and the Transport Termination is two wire i e there is four wire to two wire conversion in Switched Transport balance parameters equal level echo path lo
252. ed by the customer is the 31st business day beyond the original service date of the Access Order Service Date Intervals are associated with the provisioning of an Access Order whether standard or negotiated as set forth in 5 2 1 preceding Certain Critical Dates as set forth in E following are used by the Company to monitor the service order provisioning progress The Company includes these scheduled Critical Dates in the firm order confirmation associated with each Access Order provided to the customer Cancellation charges are based on the estimated costs incurred by the Company at the time the order is canceled The Company monitors which Critical Date was last scheduled and what percentage of the Company s provisioning costs have been incurred as of that Critical Date A Cancellation Charge will not apply if the scheduled Service Date has not been provided to the customer Costs incurred in conjunction with the provision of Switched Access Service start on the Application Date defined in C following When a customer cancels an Access Order prior to the Application Date no charges shall apply When a customer cancels an Access Order or part of an Access Order on or after the Application Date a charge equal to the estimated costs incurred by the Company shall apply as set forth in D and E following When a customer cancels an Access Order or part of an Access Order on or after the original Service Date the Cancellation Charge will
253. ed with the customer prior to the release of that service Thereafter a credit allowance as set forth in B preceding applies Interruptions of a service which continue because of the failure of the customer to authorized replacement of any element of special construction as set forth in Section 4 of the Exchange and Network Services Tariff The period for which no credit allowance is made begins on the seventh day after the customer receives the Company s written notification of the need for such replacement and ends on the day after receipt by the Company of the customer s written authorization for such replacement 2 4 2 4 4 C 6 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 43 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES CREDIT ALLOWANCE FOR SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS When Credit Allowance Do Not Apply Cont d Periods when the customer elects not to release the service for testing and or repair and continues to use it on an impaired basis Periods of temporary discontinuance as set forth in 2 2 1 B preceding Periods of interruption as set forth in 13 3 1 following An interruption or a group of interruptions resulting from a common cause for amounts less than one dollar Use of an Alternative Service Provided by the Company Should the customer elect to use an alternative service provided by the Company duri
254. eed by more than six 6 months the Standard Interval Service Date or when there is no Standard Interval the Company offered Service Date Access Services provided on a Negotiated Interval will be installed during Company business days If a customer requests that installation be done outside of the Company s business hours and the Company agrees to their request the customer will be subject to applicable Additional Labor Charges as set forth in Section 13 following T T T D T T 5 2 5 2 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 13 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER Cont d ACCESS ORDER MODIFICATIONS The customer may request a modification of its Access Order at any time prior to notification by the Company that service is available for the customer s use The Company will make every effort to accommodate a requested modification when it is able to do so with the normal work force assigned to complete such an order within normal business hours If the modification cannot be made with the normal work force during normal business hours the Company will notify the customer If the customer still desires the Access Order modification the Company will schedule a new Service Date All charges for Access Order modifications will apply on a per occurrence basis Any increase in the number of Swi
255. elephone Company will mutually agree upon an end office designation to determine an existing end office that reflects the closest mileage measurement to the average Switched Transport miles This end office designation can then be used for purposes of determining the appropriate mileage by using the V amp H coordinate method When the ANI can be determined the originating end office will be used to determine the Local Transport mileage M Material moved from Page 135 T T T M T M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 134 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 11 MILEAGE MEASUREMENT Cont d E When DTT Switched Transport facilities of different capacities or bandwidths are connected by a multiplexer at a Company Hub mileage is determined using the V amp H coordinates method Mileage for DTT is measured separately from the SWC to the Company Hub where multiplexing occurs and then measured from the Company Hub to the end office F When DTT is provided from the SWC to an access tandem in conjunction with TST to subtending end offices the mileage is determined using the V amp H coordinates method Mileage for DTT is measured between the SWC and the access tandem and mileage for TST is measured from the access tandem to the end offices G Mileage Measurement for Switched Transport connected to Expa
256. ement for damages cooperate with the customer in prosecuting a claim against the person causing such damage and the customer shall be subrogated to the right of recovery by the Company for the damages to the extent of such payment OWNERSHIP OF FACILITIES Facilities utilized by the Company to provide service under the provisions of this Tariff shall remain the property of the Company Such facilities shall be returned to the Company by the customer whenever requested within a reasonable period following the request in as good condition as reasonable wear will permit Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 14 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER Cont d 2 3 3 EQUIPMENT SPACE AND POWER The customer shall furnish or arrange to have furnished to the Company at no charge equipment space and electrical power required by the Company to provide services under this Tariff at the POTs of such services The selection of ac or dc power shall be mutually agreed to by the customer and the Company The customer shall also make necessary arrangements in order that the Company will have access to such spaces at reasonable times for installing testing inspecting repairing or removing Company services T 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 7 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 15 State of South Dakota Re
257. empts Per Message Ratio A M eee 1 333 NCTA Per AlGm pt lt csiastolasvshecsae ated iieri eei A 1 Total Attempts 1 000 M Mes x 1 333 eee 1 333 2 Total NCTA 4 NCTA per Attempt x 1 333 0 533 2 3 Total Chargeable Originating Access Minutes 7 000 M Min 533 2 NCTA ceecceccesecesceceseeeesees 7 533 2 When assumed minutes are used the assumed minutes are the chargeable access minutes FGA access minutes or fractions thereof the exact value of the fraction being a function of the switch technology where the measurement is made are accumulated over the billing period for each line or hunt group and are then rounded up to the nearest access minute for each line or hunt group FGB C or D access minutes or fraction thereof the exact value of the fraction being a function of the switch technology where the measurement is made are accumulated over the billing period for each end office and are then rounded up to the nearest access minute for each end office Assumed minutes are used for FGA Access Service which originate or terminate in end offices not equipped with measurement capabilities The assumed average interstate access minutes are set forth following Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 127 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 7 MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES Cont d e W
258. en Company personnel are dispatched to an unmanned Company building outside of normal business hours or to the customer s premises to when the work is completed Failure of Company personnel to find trouble in Company facilities will result in no charge if the trouble is actually in those facilities but not discovered at the time The customer shall be responsible for payment of a Maintenance of Service charge when the Company dispatches personnel to an unmanned Company building outside of normal business hours or to the customer s premises and the trouble is in equipment or communications systems provided by other than the Company or in detariffed CPE provided by the Company 13 3 13 3 2 13 3 3 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Cont d RESTORATION PRIORITY Existing Restoration Priority RP was superseded by Telecommunications Service Priority TSP as specified in Section 13 3 7 following on September 10 1990 Existing RP arrangements remain in effect for thirty 30 months until March 10 1993 If RP Service is converted to TSP the customer will incur the Priority Restoration Level Implementation Nonrecurring Charge as specified in 13 4 3 D following INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER SUBSCRIPTION Description Interexchange Carrier
259. entage for such call detail The Company will designate the number obtained by subtracting the projected PIU factor for originating and terminating access minutes calculated by the Company from 100 100 Company calculated projected interstate percentage intrastate percentage as the intrastate percentage of use When the customer reports a LATA level PIU factor the specified percentage applies to all end offices within the LATA M Material moved to Page 18 1 T M 2 3 2 3 10 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 20 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 10 31 2008 Effective 7 14 2009 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B 2 Cont d 1 c Terminating FGD Service When a customer orders terminating FGD if the Company has sufficient call details to determine the jurisdiction for the call the Company will bill the call minutes of use according to that jurisdiction unless the parties agree on a more accurate methodology When terminating call details are insufficient to determine the jurisdiction for the call see A preceding the customer may supply the projected PIU factor for a portion of the indeterminate jurisdiction by LATA 1 The projected PIU factor will be used to apportion the terminating traffic which does not exceed the 7 floor When terminating call details are insufficient to determine the jurisdiction and the custo
260. ept Switched Transport multiplexing at the time the order is received If the optional feature has a separate nonrecurring charge that nonrecurring charge shall apply Requests for a rearrangement from MF to SS7 Out of Band Signaling must be received on a separate access order The Company must receive an ASR to connect 800 DB Access Service at the end office within six months of the end office becoming SSP capable The customer must place the order to disconnect from the tandem at the same time the order is placed to connect at the end office The disconnect date may be negotiated with the Company not to exceed 90 days from the connect date Customer specified rearrangement requests will be cooperatively negotiated with the customer and are subject to the availability of Company switching equipment and other existing facilities T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 107 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C Nonrecurring Charges Cont d 7 Rollover A rollover allows for a lower speed Entrance Facility i e Voice Grade or DS1 to be either placed onto a higher speed Entrance Facility i e DS1 or DS3 or moved from one higher speed facility to a different higher speed facility or moved to a different channel on the same multiplexed facility Should
261. er shall specify their facility terminating interface and the appropriate multiplexing options if desired at the SWC Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER A 1 Cont d When a Voice Grade EF is ordered the customer shall order the associated Lineside or Trunkside Service as set forth in 3 and 4 following and the DTT T facility as set forth in 2 following at the same time When a DS1 or DS3 EF and or DTT is being requested the customer has the option of ordering the Lineside or Trunkside Service at the same time or the customer may order the Lineside or Trunkside Service subsequent to ordering the EF or DTT facility when one of the following conditions exist e A DS3 EF is ordered with a DS3 to DS1 Multiplexer at the SWC or e A DS3 EF is ordered with a DS3 to DS1 Multiplexer at the SWC and DS1 DTT is ordered to a specific end office Company Hub or access tandem or e A DS3 EF is ordered to the SWC and a DS3 DTT facility with a DS3 to DS1 Multiplexer is ordered to a specific end office Company Hub or access tandem or e A DSI EF is ordered with a DS1 to Voice Grade Multiplexer at the SWC or e A DSI EF and a DS1 DTT are ordered to a specific end office Company Hub or access tandem Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 5 State of
262. erator service systems that are equipped with CCS T T T T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 86 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Signal To C Notched Noise Ratio The term Signal to C Notched Noise Ratio denotes the ratio in dB of a test signal to the corresponding C Notched Noise Signal Transfer Point STP The term Signal Transfer Point denotes a switch which provides CCSN access and performs CCSN message routing and screening Signal Transfer Point Port STP PORT The term Signal Transfer Point Port denotes the POT on the STP which provides CCSN access Signaling System 7 SS7 The term Signaling System 7 denotes the signaling protocol in the CCSN Singing Return Loss SRL The term Singing Return Loss denotes the frequency weighted measure of return loss at the edges of the voiceband 200 to 500 Hz and 2500 to 3200 Hz where singing instability problems are most likely to occur T T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 87 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 12 21 2011 Effective 01 21 2012 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Subtending End Office of an Access Tandem The term Subtending End Office of an Access Tandem denotes an end office that has final trunk group routing through
263. ercising the same degree of care normally used to protect its own proprietary information T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 32 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS D Jurisdictional Report Disputes And Auditing Procedures Cont d 4 Contested Audits When a jurisdictional audit is conducted by the Company or an independent Certified Public Accountant CPA auditing firm selected by the Company the audit results will be furnished to the customer by certified U S Mail return receipt requested The customer may contest the audit results by providing written notification by certified U S Mail return receipt requested to the Company within fifteen 15 calendar days from the date the audit report is furnished to the customer by certified U S Mail return receipt requested When a jurisdictional audit is conducted by an independent Certified Public Accountant CPA auditing firm selected by the customer the audit results will be furnished to the Company by certified U S Mail return receipt requested The Company may contest the audit results by providing written notification by certified U S Mail return receipt requested to the customer within fifteen 15 calendar days from the date the audit report is furnished to the Company by certified U S
264. ere the injury or damage is caused by any reason other than the willful misconduct of Company its agents employees or contractors Notwithstanding the foregoing any and all real or personal property damage sustained by an interconnector shall be recovered through the interconnector s own insurance coverage COORDINATION WITH RESPECT TO NETWORK CONTINGENCIES The customer shall in cooperation with the Company coordinate in planning the actions to be taken to maintain maximum network capability following natural or man made disasters which affect telecommunications services JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS Jurisdictional Determinant Pursuant to Federal Communications Commission order F C C 85 145 adopted April 16 1985 interstate usage is developed as though every call that enters a customer network at a point within the same state as that in which the called station as designated by the called station number is situated is an intrastate communication and every call for which the point of entry is in a state other than that where the called station as designated by the called station number is situated is an interstate communication To determine the jurisdiction of a call the Company compares the originating number information with the terminating number information Traffic without sufficient call detail shall be that traffic for which the originating number information lacks a valid Charge Party Number ChPN or Calling Party N
265. erminated for purposes of interconnection to trunks Included are Remote Switching Modules and Remote Switching Systems served by a host office in a different wire center End User EU The term End User means any customer of an interstate or foreign telecommunications service that is not a carrier except that a carrier other than a telephone company shall be deemed to be an end user when such carrier uses a telecommunications service for administrative purposes and a person or entity that offers telecommunications services exclusively as a reseller shall be deemed to be an end user if all resale transmissions offered by such reseller originates or terminates on the premises of such reseller T T T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 67 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Entrance Facility EF The term Entrance Facility denotes the dedicated Switched Access transport facility from the customer s premises or point of demarcation to the Company SWC Entrance Structure The term Entrance Structure which applies only to Expanded Interconnection Collocation Service as set forth in Section 21 following denotes the Entrance Enclosure Conduit innerduct and riser required to bring the Company s or interconnector s fiber optic cable into the Company central office to either the leased physic
266. ervice FGB Like utilizing traditional signaling with answer supervision 900 Access Service is available only as a LATA wide service and must be provisioned to all offices within the LATA 900 Access Service may be provisioned with 1 900 NXX XXXX dialing capability or expanded to include 0 900 NXX XXXX dialing capability The Expanded 900 Option is not offered without 1 900 Access Service within a LATA and is available only with Feature Group D Service in suitably equipped Company End Offices 6 2 6 2 9 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 60 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 900 ACCESS SERVICE Cont d Calls originating in a LATA in which the customer has not ordered 900 Access Service will be blocked Only customers who order the Expanded 900 i e 0 900 NXX XXXX Option will be able to receive 0 900 calls to NXX codes assigned to them In addition calls originating in a LATA for which 900 Access Service has been established will be blocked utilizing the blocking specifications as follows e 149004 NXX XXXX will be blocked from Smart Public Access lines 0 101XXXX Hotel Motel Service except those with customer owned rating services e 0 900 NXX XXXX will be blocked from 101XXXX and Inmate Service At the option of the customer 900 Access Service traffic may be collected at suita
267. es AEE Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System eeeeeeeseeeeeteeees D NNNDRDN W Qe Testing Services aitisen Gsiindiiaa san dunannunudaausuckiin duaiane Title or Ownership Rights 4c te9 cacvesstecsaie duraksasudes dev cis teisacednass utbaatondednbecn Transmission Specifications cccecesscecssececeseeeceeeeecesececsneeeeseeeeneeeenaeeees Trademarks Service Marks and Trade Names cccccccccseesesseceeceeeeeees Transport Termination Optional Features ee eeseeeseceseeeeeeeseeenaeeees Trunk ACCESS Limitations eiea eriek tno a ias Trunk Group Measurement Reports ssssesssessesssessseeeesserssresseesseeesseesssees Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 19 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX Cont d SUBJECT SECTION Undertaking Of The Company 0sssiciesscageesosdedecccsaatsves secs andocadeucsvade ceeesteaeacs Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement 0 0 0 0 ee eceeeeseceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeees Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement For Use With WATS Access LINES csccesgi st ievsheealiniueecteisteennel ties nttaledied dietician Maen USE oain eee aes dca cc es ik knee acca oc Ma lah eae a Up To 7 Digit Outpulsing Of Access Digits To Customer eee MSG act a Enola chs onan cast evan dudided ola e n SEE EE NANO NN D Qwest Corporation Access Service
268. es are applicable for the balance of the minimum period The Minimum Period Charge for monthly billed services will be determined as follows e For Switched Access Service the charge for a month or fraction thereof is equal to the applicable minimum monthly charge for the capacity as set forth in 6 7 3 following The Minimum Period Charge for Feature Group D Switched Access Service and the associated Entrance Facility and DTT Facility will be determined as set forth in 2 4 2 preceding All applicable nonrecurring and discontinuance charges for the service will be billed in addition to the Minimum Period Charge SHARED USE FACILITIES When a customer orders Switched Access Service on a Private Line Transport Service Shared Use facility as set forth in 2 7 preceding the customer must specify on its order a channel facility assignment for each service ordered DISCONTINUANCE OF ACCESS SERVICE A customer may cancel an Access Service at any time The Company requires 2 business days notice for the cancellation of an Access Service The notice can be written or verbal however a verbal notice must be followed by a written confirmation within 10 days The notice period will begin at the time of the verbal notice If there is no verbal notice the notice period begins at the time the written request is received This page cancels Page 26 Release 1 T T T N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Index
269. es for moving such service will be based on estimated costs attributable to the move When service with a maximum termination liability charge associated with it is moved and is reinstalled at a new location the customer may elect e To pay the unexpired portion of the maximum termination liability charge for the service if any with the application of a nonrecurring charge and the establishment of a new maximum termination liability charge for such service at the new location or e To continue service subject to the unexpired portion of the maximum termination liability charge if any and pay the estimated costs of moving such service provided that the customer requests these charges be quoted prior to ordering the service move Charges for moving such service will be based on estimated costs attributable to the move Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 12 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 12 SPECIALIZED SERVICE OR ARRANGEMENTS 12 2 MOvE CHARGES Cont d C Moves charges include the estimated costs of removal restoration of service or facilities necessitated by the move transportation storage reinstallation engineering labor supervision materials administration and any other specific items of cost directly attributable to the move 12 3 RATES AND CHARGES Rates and charges and additional regulations if applicable for specialized service or arrangements are pro
270. esngelaaeaausedensuspecd S sastea ane j End Office End User Line Service Screening for use With WATS PROCS STAMOS nne raeas e e A E Es E E i e testes Expedited Order Charge eeeeseeeeseeeeseseseseesseseresressererssressessresrensesseesresseeee Explanation of Abbreviation ssseseseeesessessrseresresseseresressessresrerseesresresseeee Explanation of Tariff Change Symbols sssssseseseeessseessesssessseresssesssreesseso e ONO T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 15 State of South Dakota Release 5 Issued 12 21 2011 Effective 01 21 2012 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX Cont d SUBJECT SECTION Peature Group A FGA recnici a e e a i ia Feature Group A InterLATA Toll Denial 0 0 ceeeeeeeeereeeneeeneeeees Feature Group A Usage Measurement c ceeccecesececeeececeeececeeeeeeeteeeees Feature Group B FGB iisstcaisintccdacssvecasascnscanesseceeastdesnceeandssea es dogeqatasuaeacsvans Feature Group B Usage Measurement ceescecesececesececeseceeeeeeeeeteeeees Feature Group C EGC worcester neonin a Ee o SEa S Feature Group C Usage Measurement ccceesececseeeecesececesececeseeeeeteeeees Feature Group D FGD J ren aseeni anea aae s a ES Feature Group D Usage Measurement ssneseesseeesseeesseesserssereseressseessese RPS Ss dalaee th sa ss Gat RG eae al ca Pern ide et oe aert oases Teresa eS teas General REGUlAtiONS lt sciessi
271. essresseesseessee 88 Obligations of the Customer si icccdisssccessveaveisiavjescradpaseeeaseccdannsescadeoanccbennss 94 Operator Trunk Coin Non Coin or Combined Coin and Non Coin 76 Ordering Options and Conditions sssesssssesssesessseesseessessseeessetsssresseesseessee 31 Ordering Requirements renneri eenei i i a A ees 94 Provision and Description of Switched Access Service eccere 32 Provision of Service Performance Data s esessseeeseeeesseesseessesesereesseessres 89 Rate Categories sscitinssaystevsuseaeiuseaeadeisegesdeahack sua AAE EE S 5 RAE R g latiohSissscjsiite estote e eaa E aE EE GEE 96 Rates and Char g s xiichsiieeivosiaceushjeaaes irinae ins a Ra ba aep a Eaa aa EIRE CE AaS 137 Re port Reg itements musescore ieie n EAE eain 94 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Index Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE SUBJECT PAGE D Service Class ROUDE yas csnsqenosayactationcsaveasoncarasieenscedquaseiive vecsancestadecavautetaveys 68 Service Code Denial on Line or Hunt Group cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 62 Shared USE ssa es sane el cher a ac ee E cae ein Ue ee a 135 Signaling System Seven SS7 Out of Band Signaling eee 13 Special Facilities ROUNE oni cccssaseere resterons o aeae E E E E E 31 Standard Transmission Specifications cceescecesseeceececeeeeecseeeeesteeeesaes 79 S pervis
272. et forth in 6 8 following When the customer does not combine FGA and Trunkside Access on the same facility the Company will provide DS1 to Voice Grade multiplexing equipment at no charge At the option of the customer FGA is provided on a single or multiple line group basis and is arranged for originating calling only terminating calling only or two way calling FGA provides a lineside termination at the first point of switching The lineside termination will be provided with either ground start supervisory signaling or loop start supervisory signaling The type of signaling is at the option of the customer The Company shall select the first point of switching within the selected LATA at which the lineside termination is to be provided unless the customer requests a different first point of switching and Company facilities and measurement capabilities are available to accommodate such a request A seven digit local telephone number assigned by the Company is provided for access to FGA switching in the originating direction The seven digit local telephone number will be associated with the selected end office switch and is of the form NXX XXXX If the customer requests a specific seven digit telephone number that is not currently assigned and the Company can with reasonable effort comply with that request the requested number will be assigned to the customer T T T T T 6 2 6 2 1 Qwest Corporation Ac
273. etation and application of their tariffs to the billing Exchange Telephone Company Also termed Single Bill Multiple Tariff T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 48 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 4 PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES 2 4 7 ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED B 2 Cont d 1 2 b Alternative No 2 1 The Exchange Telephone Company that will render the single bill will receive a prepared bill from each involved Exchange Telephone Company For Switched Access Services the billing Exchange Telephone Company will receive prepared bills without usage data The billing Exchange Telephone Company will then apply usage data to the bills calculate the charges and combine all of the bills into one bill For usage rated services the billing Exchange Telephone Company and the non billing Exchange Telephone Company will use the same amount of usage on the bill Alternative No 3 2 The Exchange Telephone Company that will render the single bill will include in its rates and charges the costs of each Exchange Telephone Company involved and will bill for the entire access service s ordered For usage rated services the billing Exchange Telephone Company and the non billing Exchange Telephone Company will use the same amount of usage on the
274. eter transmission limits for the transmission path s as delineated in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE T M M Material moved from Pages 85 and 86 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 88 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE OBLIGATIONS OF THE COMPANY In addition to the obligations of the Company set forth in Section 2 preceding the Company has certain other obligations pertaining only to the provision of Switched Access Service These obligations are as follows NETWORK MANAGEMENT The Company will administer its network to ensure the provision of acceptable service levels to all telecommunications users of the Company s network services Generally service levels are considered acceptable only when both end users and customers are able to establish connections with little or no delay encountered within the Company network The Company maintains the right to apply protective controls i e those actions such as call gapping which selectively cancel the completion of traffic over any traffic carried over its network including that associated with a customer s Switched Access Service Generally such protective measures would only be taken as a result of occurrences such as failure or overload of Company or customer facilities natural disasters mass calling or national security demands In the event that the protec
275. eveloped by CCITT that provides the foundation for interconnection of individual packet switched networks This standard was developed in order to connect dissimilar hardware software components residing in these networks T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 83 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d uer The term Query denotes the inquiry to a Company data base to obtain information processing instructions or service data Registered Equipment The term Registered Equipment denotes the customer s premises equipment which complies with and has been approved within the Registration Provisions of Part 68 of the F C C s Rules and Regulations Release Message The term Release Message denotes a SS7 message sent in either direction to indicate the release of a specific circuit Remote Switching Modules and or Remote Switching Systems RSM RSS The term Remote Switching Modules and or Remote Switching Systems denotes small remotely controlled electronic end office switches which obtain their call processing capability from an ESS type Host Office The RSM RSS cannot accommodate direct trunks to a customer Responsible Organization The term Responsible Organization denotes the entity responsible for the management and administration of 800 Data Base Access Service records in the Service Management
276. f The Company does not warrant that its facilities and services meet standards other than those set forth in this Tariff LIMITATIONS The customer may not assign or transfer the use of services provided under this Tariff however where there is no interruption of use or relocation of the services such assignment or transfer may be made to Another customer whether an individual partnership association or corporation provided the assignee or transferee assumes all outstanding indebtedness for such services and the unexpired portion of the minimum period and the termination liability applicable to such services if any or Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 1 UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY 2 1 2 LIMITATIONS A Cont d 2 A court appointed receiver trustee or other person acting pursuant to law in bankruptcy receivership reorganization insolvency liquidation or other similar proceedings provided the assignee or transferee assumes the unexpired portion of the minimum period and the termination liability applicable to such services if any In all cases of assignment or transfer the written acknowledgment of the Company is required prior to such assignment or transfer which acknowledgment shall be made within fifteen 15 days from the receipt of notification All regulations and conditions contained
277. f Rates Charges and Deposits ceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeees Premises Interface CodeS innsir teias Provision and Description of Switched Access Service 0 Provision and Ownership of Telephone Numbers eeeeeee Provision of Access Service Billing Information 0 e eee Provision of Other Services ogi dete a peace eed tested cease uiced ede Provision of Service Performance Data cee eeceeseesseceseeeeeeeenees Provision of SELVICES ouret pie radedetesteornatiacsi ea Stelanateetashsetesbun tients Rates and Charges sencsyuscs oesesaguesdetssdees anos E a E A taeda TIa Reestablishment of Service Following Fire Flood or Other OCCULTENCE si soc8hh res aesiastie a N EN E Recording SOT VIC Cia scey sera cusses esecadedty E a A oeat References to the Company ss sse0ecisesssecasencaivescvetsatvesaceusbscness senses Reference to Other Publications 0 c ccccccecececeseeeceesseessesssesereees Reference to Other Tariffs 000000 ccc ccccccccccssscscessceessesesseeeseseeeeeeees Reference to Technical Publications ccccccccccccccecececeseseseeeeees Refusal and Discontinuance Of Service ccccesseseeseeseseeeeeeseeees SECTION 1 Page 17 Release 3 Effective 5 11 2004 SECTION YNVNNWNANNN ON D D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 18 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 1 APPLICATION AND REFE
278. f South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 4 PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES 2 4 1 PAYMENT OF RATES CHARGES AND DEPOSITS B 2 c Cont d e If the dispute is resolved in favor of the customer and the customer has paid the disputed amount the customer will receive an interest credit from the Company for the disputed amount times a late factor The late factor shall be the lesser of The highest interest rate in decimal value which may be levied by law for commercial transactions compounded daily for the number of days from the date when payment was made or credit claimed in accordance with c preceding to and including the payment due date as set forth in a preceding of the bill that reflects the credit for the disputed amount In the event that the Company agrees to refund a credit by check or wire transfer interest will be applied up to and including the date of issuance for either the check or wire transfer 0 000407 per day compounded daily for the number of days from the date when payment was made or credit claimed in accordance with c preceding to and including the payment due date as set forth in a preceding of the bill that reflects the credit for the disputed amount In the event that the Company agrees to refund a credit by check or wire transfer interest will be applied up to and including the date of issuance for either the check or wire transfer
279. f of nonrecurring Entrance Facility charge for the capacity affected This one half nonrecurring charge per Access Order is applied per line or trunk and per POT for the Entrance Facility The first line or trunk is assessed the first move charge and each additional line or trunk is assessed the each additional move charge per appropriate Interface Group category per Access Order There will be no change in the minimum period requirements To a Different Building The charge for moves to a new location in a different building involves the customer relocation of a switched access point of termination The first line or trunk is assessed the first move charge and each additional line or trunk is assessed the each additional move charge per appropriate Interface Group category per Access Order In addition full nonrecurring charges will be assessed for the Entrance Facility per point of termination per Access Order New minimum period requirements at the different building will be established for the new service The customer will also remain responsible for satisfying all outstanding minimum period charges for the discontinued service Moves to a Different Serving Wire Center The charge for moves to a different serving wire center either to a different location or within the same building involves the customer relocation of the switched access points of termination The first line or trunk is assessed the first move charge and each
280. f the Company agrees to provide the service on an expedited basis an Expedited Order Charge will apply A customer may request a change of end user s premises within the same SWC When this occurs the Service Date is changed to reflect the standard interval If the customer requests an earlier Service Date an Expedited Order Charge will apply Expedited Order Charges will not apply if the revised interval to a pending order is equal to or longer than the standard interval for that service When an expedited Service Date is missed the Expedited Order Charge will apply unless the missed Service Date is caused by the Company The Expedited Order Charge will be applied when the customer requests a service date that is prior to the standard interval service date as set forth in the Qwest Corporation Service Interval Guide SIG on an order or when a customer requests an earlier service date on a pending standard or negotiated interval order The Expedited Order Charge as set forth below will apply on a per order basis for each day the service date is advanced NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE e Per day advanced EODDD 200 00 The Expedited Order Charges will be billed in addition to other applicable nonrecurring charges T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 17 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 7 21 2004 Effective 7 31 2004 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER 5 2 2 ACCESS ORDE
281. f the FGD Service with IG9 e The disconnect date for IG6 is the connect date for IG9 when the FGB service type is not changing B Interface Group Category 6 to Interface Group Category 9 on Feature Group D Service e The same customer premises quantity of trunks service type routing traffic type direction i e one way two way and optional features are maintained e The orders for the change from IG6 to IG9 are received at the same time e The trunks are upgraded from IG6 to IG9 in groups of 24 trunks e The disconnect date for IG6 is the connect date for IG9 T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 121 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS Cont d 6 7 5 CHANGE OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE TYPE Changes from one type of Switched Access Service to another will be treated as a discontinuance of service and the installation of service with the establishment of a new minimum period as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding When the following conditions are met the nonrecurring charges will not apply A Service Type Upgrade From Lineside Access or FGB to FGD Service e The same customer premises quantity of trunks routing traffic type direction i e one way two way and optional features are maintained e The same interface group category is maintained except as set forth in 6 7 4 preceding e The orders
282. fective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE RESOLD MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S RATE REGULATIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S Cont d Same State Telephone Company Exchange Limitation In order for the rate regulations to apply as set forth in D following the access groups and the resold MTS and or MTS type service s must be provided in the same state except when the same extended area service arrangement is provided in two different states by the same telephone company in the same exchange provided by the same telephone company and connected directly or indirectly For those exchanges that encompass more than one state the customer shall report the information by state within the exchange Direct And Indirect Connections Each of the access group arrangements used by the customer in association with the resold MTS and or MTS type service s must be connected either directly or indirectly to the customer designated premises at which the resold MTS and or MTS type service s are terminated Direct connections are those arrangements where the access groups and resold MTS and or MTS type service s are terminated at the same customer designated premises Indirect originating connections are those arrangements where the access groups and the resold originating MTS and or MTS type service s are physically located at different customer designated premises in the same exchange Such different cus
283. for carrying circuit switched data and or circuit switched voice traffic on FGD Service equipped with clear channel capability from the end user to the customer CCC Terminating represents access capacity within a LATA for carrying circuit switched data and or circuit switched voice traffic on FGD Service equipped with Clear Channel Capability from the customer to the end user 6 1 6 1 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS AND MANNER OF PROVISION Cont d When ordering capacity for Trunkside Switched Access the customer must at a minimum specify such access capacity in terms of Originating and or Terminating traffic type SWITCHNET 56 traffic type CCC Originating traffic type and or CCC Terminating traffic type Additionally when ordering capacity for 800 Access Service and or 900 Access Service the customer must specify 8XX and or 900 traffic type Because some customers will wish to segregate their originating FGC FGD 800 DB Access Service or 900 Access Service traffic further into separate trunk groups the Originating traffic type and CCC Originating traffic type are further categorized into Domestic 8XX 900 and Operator Domestic traffic type represents access capacity for carrying only domestic traffic other than 8XX 900 and Operator traffic 8X
284. for the disconnect of the Lineside connection or FGB Service and the start of FGD Service are placed with the Company at the same time e The disconnect date for the Lineside connection or FGB Service is no more than ninety 90 days from the connect date of FGD Service e At the customer s option the Company will allow a change to SS7 Out of Band Signaling and a change in direction from one way to two way at the same time as the service type upgrade When this kind of request is received the customer will be assessed a SS7 Rearrangement Charge when conditions in 6 7 1 preceding and the above conditions are met A new minimum period as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding will also be established B Service Type Upgrade from FGC Service to FGD Service e When a FGC Service is upgraded to a FGD Service the nonrecurring charge will not apply Because FGC is no longer available in an end office once the end office is equipped with equal access capabilities i e FGD such upgrades will be performed by the Company without the customer being required to place an order for the change unless a customer specifies an increase in the number of transmission paths e When the effective dates for the disconnect and start of service are the same the minimum period as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding will not change When the effective dates for the disconnect and start of service are different a new minimum period will be established for the FGD Service
285. g FGA the entire LATA for terminating FGA and all end offices subtending the access tandem for originating and terminating FGB and 3 the local calling area of the dial tone office is as defined in the Company s Exchange and Network Services Tariff The Company will provide to the customer upon request and free of charge the underlying data used to derive the subscriber line ratio described above This information and any other information necessary to verify a customer s bill will be provided to the customer within 30 days of the Company receiving a request from the customer Where FGD Switched Access Service is provided to a customer in an end office s where FGA or FGB premium access minutes have been determined in accordance with 2 preceding such premium access minutes will be adjusted in the following manner For each FGD access minute originating from or terminating at that end office except those minutes of use identified as SWITCHNET 56 minutes of use the originating or terminating FGA or FGB premium access minutes determined as set forth in 2 preceding will be reduced on a one for one basis but in no event shall the reduction exceed the total number of FGA or FGB premium access minutes originating from or terminating at that end office The customer will be billed for the revised number of premium access minutes Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 111 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2
286. ge 10 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY Cont d NOTIFICATION OF SERVICE AFFECTING ACTIVITIES The Company will provide the customer reasonable notification of service affecting activities that may occur in normal operation of its business Such activities may include but are not limited to equipment or facilities additions removals or rearrangements routine preventative maintenance and major switching machine change out Generally such activities are not individual customer service specific they affect many customer services No specific advance notification period is applicable to all service activities The Company will work cooperatively with the customer to determine reasonable notification requirements COORDINATION WITH RESPECT TO NETWORK CONTINGENCIES The Company intends to work cooperatively with the customer to develop network contingency plans in order to maintain maximum network capability following natural or man made disasters which affect telecommunications services Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 11 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 1 UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY Cont d 2 1 12 PROVISION AND OWNERSHIP OF TELEPHONE NUMBERS The Company reserves the reasonable right to assign designate or change telephone numbers any other call number
287. gy i i ina 89 End User Line and Usage Information Data sseeseesesseseeseeereererserererreeseese 93 Entrance Facility scenes neie ra E Ta E AE EIRE suntan evans 117 Feature Group A FGA esssesssesssesssesessoessossereseserrseeersoseeseoesessseersooersoseeresrs 33 Feature Group A Usage Measurement ceeescccesceecesececseeeeceteeeeeseeeees 128 Feature Group B FGB sisieinagesteasersaasviesdenea eenn as asies 39 Feature Group B Usage Measurement ss sssnssesssesessseessresseesseesseesseeessese 128 Feature Group C FGC sivicaciasecceitasecssecagwnentealscvedteceececeieb seacen seavaitalonsaleaye 43 Feature Group C Usage Measurement c ccesccecesceeceeececseeeeceteeeeseeeees 129 Feature Group D FGD sssicisssscecaassuseasssctaccndaseseaassdesnaeesooneen oai ians 48 Feature Group D Usage Measurement esececesececeeececseceeceeeeeeseeeeees 130 General setg sgean ae aeii e AE E EEEE SESE EA EES tas 1 Hunt Group Arrangement sssssesssesesssesssressresseesseeesseersstessrrsseeeseeeeseeesseeso 62 Immediate Dial Pulse Address Signaling ssesosssesseseesssessesssessesessseessres 68 nterc nnettioN s niisiis kiires E sE Ea kai D aE etn 30 Interconnection Charge osser nenii e e See a i 157 InterLATA Toll Denial scsssesssssssssesssssressssssssecssesrsssessesssesnrsressoeesesssessases 12 Local Information Delivery Services sssesseseseessessssseessresserssereseressseessees 131 Local SWITCHING oii
288. harges V and H Coordinates Method The term V and H Coordinates Method denotes a method of computing airline miles between two points by utilizing an established formula which is based on the vertical V and horizontal H coordinates of the two points T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 90 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d WATS Serving Office WSO The term WATS Serving Office denotes a Company designated end office switch which is capable of performing routing screening and recording functions in connection with the closed end of 800 800 type call Outward WATS and similar services Designation of an end office switch as a WSO is based upon the capability and capacity of the end office switch to provide WATS Access Service arrangements WSOs are identified in National Exchange Carrier Association Inc Tariff F C C No 4 Wire Center WC The term Wire Center denotes a building in which one or more central offices used for the provision of Telephone Exchange Services are located T T T T Tariff SECTION 2 Page 91 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued December 13 2004 Effective January 25 2005 2 7 2 7 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS SHARED USE REGULATIONS Shared Use occurs when the Company allows a customer to utilize the same
289. harges which apply to expanded 0 900 Service to activate the Expanded 900 Option These charges are assessed per access order per screening location end office or tandem with NXX activity or can be ordered without NXX activity The Expanded 900 Option is not offered without 1 900 Access Service within a LATA and is available only with Feature Group D Service in suitably equipped Company end offices These charges are set forth in 6 8 following Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization Nonrecurring Charge The nonrecurring charges for MPTS are described as follows The MPTS ASR charge applies when a customer is ordering MPTS without associated trunk activity on the same order This charge applies whether the order is to initially add sectors or make rearrangements to an existing sector s Trunk activity includes installing new trunks adding additional trunks rearranging existing trunks or removing trunks This charge is in addition to the MPTS establishment charge without associated trunk activity and the MPTS rearrangement charge without associated trunk activity 6 7 6 7 1 H Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 114 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization Nonrecurring Charge Cont d The MPTS establishment charge without associated trunk activity a
290. he Exchange Telephone Companies involved Each Exchange Telephone Company will determine the appropriate Transport Mileage by computing the airline mileage between the two ends of the Transport Mileage element using the V amp H methods as set forth in 6 7 11 following Each Exchange Telephone Company will determine the rate for the airline mileage determined in d preceding using the Company s tariff Multiply such rate by the Company s billing percentage factor and divide by 100 to obtain the Transport element charges The billing percentages will be agreed upon by the Exchange Telephone Companies involved D T T T T 2 4 2 4 7 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 50 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES ORDERING RATING AND BILLING OF ACCESS SERVICES WHERE MORE THAN ONE EXCHANGE TELEPHONE COMPANY IS INVOLVED Cont d When jointly provisioned Access Service is provided between the Company and another Exchange Telephone Company the appropriate Switched Access recurring rates will be applied based on the type of Switched Transport provided Tandem Switched Transport TST or Direct Trunked Transport DTT For Switched Access Service provisioned as TST the appropriate Switched Access recurring rates will be applied as follows 1 multiply the Tandem Transmission fixed rate
291. hen a FGA service arranged for two way calling is provided where neither the originating nor the terminating access minutes are recorded the average interstate access minutes will be assumed Where recording capability exists for either originating or terminating usage but not both on a line arranged for two way calling the number of access minutes per line will be the assumed average interstate access minutes or the recorded usage whichever is greater If the usage in the measured direction exceeds the assumed number of minutes it will be assumed that there is zero usage in the unmeasured direction If the measured usage is less than the assumed number of minutes the usage in the unmeasured direction will be assumed to be the assumed number of access minutes minus the measured usage e g 5919 4000 measured 1919 assumed in unmeasured direction Assumed Average Interstate Access Minutes 5943 e When a FGA service arranged for originating calling only is provided where originating access minutes are not recorded the average originating access minutes will be assumed and no terminating access minutes will apply Assumed Average Originating Access Minutes 3732 e When a FGA service arranged for terminating calling only is provided where terminating access minutes are not recorded the terminating access minutes will be assumed and no originating access minutes will apply Assumed Average Terminating Access Minutes 2211 e When
292. ibutable to interstate originating MTS and or MTS type minutes and shall not include collect third number credit card or intrastate minutes of use The resale credit adjustment shall apply for resold originating MTS and or MTS type service s and minutes of use provided Carrier Common Line and Switched Access Rates and Charges have been assessed on such services Terminating Services The Company will apportion the resold terminating MTS and or MTS type service s and terminating minutes of use for which the resale credit adjustment applies among the access groups Such apportionment will be based on the relationship of the terminating usage for each access group to the total terminating usage for all access groups in the LATA For purposes of administering this provision e Resold terminating MTS and or MTS type service s minutes shall be only those attributable to interstate terminating MTS and or MTS type i e collect calls third number calls and credit card calls and shall not include intrastate minutes of use or MTS and or MTS type minutes of use paid for by another party The resale credit adjustment shall apply for resold terminating MTS and or MTS type service s and minutes of use provided Carrier Common Line and Switched Access Rates and Charges have been assessed on such services 3 6 3 6 4 B Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 8 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Ef
293. ice Tariff SECTION 1 Page 29 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 9 REFERENCE TO TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS B Cont d PUBLICATION TITLE NUMBER Switching System Requirements for GR 394 CORE T Interexchange Carrier Interconnection Using the Integrated Services Digital Network User Part ISDNUP D Network Transmission Interface and TR NWT 000938 Performance Specification Supporting Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN D Common Channel Signaling CCS GR 905 CORE T Network Interface Specification D Common Channel Signaling CCS GR 954 CORE T Network Interface Specification Supporting Alternate Billing Services ABS D Network Interface Description TR TS Y 000776 for ISDN Customer Access D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 30 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 9 REFERENCE TO TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS Cont d C The following Qwest Corporation Technical Publications are referenced in this T Tariff and may be viewed at http www qwest com techpub T PUBLICATION TITLE NUMBER Qwest Corporation 77342 Common Channel Signaling Interconnections Network Channel and Network 77365 Channel Interface Combinations Qwest Corporation Service Publication 77201 Physical and Virtual Collocation and Associated DS1 and DS3 Expanded Intercon
294. ice when both Switched and PLTS multiplexing rate elements are chargeable When CCSAC Service is ordered on a Shared Use facility the customer must dedicate at a minimum one DS1 facility for that service When PLTS facilities are provided from the SWC of the customer s premises to a Company hub and those facilities are shared with Switched Access Service the appropriate PLTS transport channel mileage rates and the Switched DTT or DLT rates are apportioned Switched DTT facilities must be provisioned from the Company hub to an access tandem or end office based on whether the customer requests tandem routing or direct routing PLTS and Switched Access Service rates elements not associated with transport facilities are not allocated Following on the next page is an example of Shared Use allocation Appropriate nonrecurring installation charges are assessed on a per line per trunk or per link basis for Switched Access Service M Material moved from Page 91 M1 Material moved to Page 93 T M T M M1 Tariff SECTION 2 Page 93 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 Qwest Corporation Access Service 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 7 SHARED USE REGULATIONS 2 7 1 DS1 AND DS3 PLTS WITH SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d Example of Shared Use Customer has DS3 PLTS comprised of a DS3 Channel Termination and a DS3 DS1 Multiplexer in the SWC of the customer s premises Customer orders
295. ied on that end of the service i e originating minutes for outward WATS and or WATS type services and terminating minutes for inward WATS and or WATS type services shall not be assessed Carrier Common Line Access per minute rates with the following exception Carrier Common Line Access per minute rates shall apply when FGA is ordered from a nonequal access Company office that does not have measurement capabilities and the assumed average access minutes as set forth in 6 7 7 following are used UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY PROVISION OF SERVICE Where the customer is provided Switched Access Service under other sections of this Tariff the Company will provide the use of Company common lines by a customer for access to end users at rates as set forth in 3 9 following INTERSTATE AND INTRASTATE USE The Switched Access Service provided by the Company includes the Switched Access Service provided for both interstate and intrastate communications The Carrier Common Line Access rates as set forth in 3 9 following apply to intrastate Switched Access Service access minutes in accordance with the rate regulations as set forth in 3 8 4 following Percent Interstate Use PIU OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE REQUIREMENT The Switched Access Service associated with Carrier Common Line Access shall be ordered by the customer under other sections of this Tariff SUPERVISION The customer facilities at the premises of the
296. ient detail to substantiate the jurisdictional factors provided by the customer If the Company has provided data as requested by the customer per the terms of 2 3 20 B 6 preceding this data will not be part of the request and is not the responsibility of the customer In addition the customer may request more detailed data used to develop the summary data provided by the Company or a statistically valid sample of such data on a prospective basis not to exceed a consecutive three month period In response to this request the Company will provide data by trunk group e Except as provided in 2 3 10 B 6 where the Company fails to provide requested data if a quarterly report has never been received from the customer and the customer failed to report a POM in the order for service the Company will designate a zero percent 0 POM beginning with the next billing period This POM will be applied until a quarterly POM report is submitted M Material moved from Page 28 T M T M C M C M C M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 29 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS Cont d D Jurisdictional Report Dispute and Auditing Procedures If a billing dispute arises concerning the projected interstate percentage the Company will ask the customer to provide the data the
297. ifferent projected PIU factor based on the following guidelines a The customer may update the interstate and intrastate PIU factor via jurisdictional report on a quarterly basis The customer shall report the PIU factor by traffic and service type for each LATA The customer shall forward to the Company a revised report to be received no later than fourteen 14 days after the first of January April July and October The revised report shall show the PIU factor for the most current data available for each service arranged for interstate use This data shall consist of at least three 3 and no more than twelve 12 consecutive months of data ending no more than seventy five 75 days earlier than the date the report is due e g for the report due January 15th the last month of data should be no earlier than October 31 The updated PIU factor shall be based on call detail records The PIU factor can be based on a statistically valid sample The PIU factor reported in January April July and October will be effective on the bill date of each such month and will serve as the basis for subsequent monthly billing pending the receipt of a revised PIU report b No prorating or back billing will be done based on the report However usage will be billed utilizing the interstate percentage that was in effect at the time the usage was generated M Material moved from Page 27 M N M M T M T M Qwest Corporatio
298. ility can be de multiplexed to a lower capacity and the lower capacity DTT facility is then routed to an access tandem end office or another hub When the customer requests DTT from the SWC to a hub and facilities from the hub to an access tandem the customer must order DTT from the hub to the access tandem and TST from the access tandem to end offices subtending that tandem Multiplexing functions for EF and DTT facilities are described in 4 following Hub locations and the types of multiplexing available at each location for DS1 facilities are specified in the NECA Tariff F C C No 4 For DS3 facilities the Company will work cooperatively with the customer to provide the desired hubbing arrangements 3 Interface Groups Four Interface Groups are provided for terminating Switched Transport at the customer s premises Each Interface Group provides a specified premises interface e g two wire four wire DS1 etc Where transmission facilities permit the individual transmission path between the customer s premises and the first point of switching may at the option of the customer be provided with optional features as set forth in 4 following T 6 1 6 1 2 A 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 18 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES Cont d As a result of the customer s access order and the type of Co
299. ill be entitled to a credit allowance for Switched Access service interruptions as set forth in 2 4 4 preceding T T 20 6 20 6 1 20 6 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 15 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN TESTING REQUIREMENTS CCSAC ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS At no additional charge the Company will cooperatively test with the customer at the time of installation network compatibility and other operational tests as described in Technical References 77342 and GR 905 CORE When Clear Channel Capability on FGD Service is ordered as described in 6 3 1 preceding the Company will cooperatively test with the customer at the time of installation CCSAC network compatibility and other operational tests for ISDN interworking as described in Technical Reference GR 905 CORE at no additional charge Successful completion and acceptance of all testing requirements must occur in order to receive CCSAC Service LIDB ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS At no additional charge the Company will cooperatively test with the customer at the time of installation network compatibility and other operational tests for LIDB as described in Technical References GR 954 CORE and 77342 Successful completion and acceptance of all testing requirements must occur in order to receive LIDB service T T T
300. in this Tariff shall apply to such assignee or transferee The assignment or transfer of services does not relieve or discharge the assignor or transferor from remaining jointly or severally liable with the assignee or transferee for any obligations existing at the time of the assignment or transfer The assignor or transferor and the assignee or transferee will be required to sign a Transfer of Use Agreement assuming all outstanding indebtedness as set forth in 1 preceding In all cases where there is no interruption of use or relocation of the services i e change in Carrier Identification Code CIC or any other technical and or physical change to the service administrative changes will be made without charge s B The regulations for installation and restoration of Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System Services shall be subject to Part 64 401 Appendix A of the Federal Communications Commission s Rules and Regulations and Section 13 following C Subject to compliance with the rules mentioned in B preceding the services offered herein will be provided to customers on a first come first served basis T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 1 UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY Cont d 2 1 3 LIABILITY A General 1 The Company shall not be liable for any act or omission of any other carrier
301. inating terminating SWITCHNET 56 CCC originating and CCC terminating See 6 1 1 following for application N N 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 88 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Transaction Capabilities Application Part TCAP The term Transaction Capabilities Application Part denotes the design of non circuit related messages TCAP protocol provides a means for reliable transfer of information from one application at a switch location to another application within another network entity Transmission Measuring 105 Type Test Line Responder The term Transmission Measuring 105 Type Test Line Responder denotes an arrangement in an end office which provides far end access to a responder and permits two way loss and noise measurements to be made on trunks from a near end office Transmission Path The term Transmission Path denotes an electrical path capable of transmitting signals within the range of the service offering e g a voice grade transmission path is capable of transmitting voice frequencies within the approximate range of 300 to 3000 Hz A transmission path comprises physical or derived channels consisting of any form or configuration of facilities typically used in the telecommunications industry Trunk The term Trunk denotes a communications path connecting two sw
302. ine P6XOX 0 62 e Per PAL P6XOX 0 62 5 The charges for an IC Initiated Conversion are as follows e Per Telephone Exchange Service line or trunk 0 75 e Per Switched Access Lineside connection 0 75 e Per Centrex type line 0 75 e Per PAL 0 75 1 Simultaneous Manual and Electronic PIC Charges will apply in addition to the charges described in 13 3 3 B 1 c preceding C C N N T D N N 13 3 13 3 5 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 8 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Cont d TESTING SERVICES Testing Services offered under this section of the Tariff are optional and subject to rates and charges as set forth in 13 4 following Other testing services provided by the Company in association with Switched Access Services are furnished at no additional charge These other testing services are described in 6 1 5 preceding Testing services are normally provided by Company personnel at Company locations However provisions are made in A 5 and B 1 and 2 following for a customer to request Company personnel to perform testing services at the customer s premises The offering of Testing Services under this section of the tariff is made subject to the availability of the necessary qualified personnel and test equipment at the various test locatio
303. ing When a customer cancels an Access Order or part of an Access Order before the Service Date the Company will calculate the Cancellation Charge by multiplying all the nonrecurring charges associated with the Access Order or that part of the Access Order being canceled by the percentage shown in E following based on the last monitored Critical Date which has occurred on the Access Order When a customer cancels an Access Order or part of an Access Order on or after the original Service Date 100 of the nonrecurring charges plus minimum period charges apply Nonrecurring charges associated with an Access Order are used to calculate and bill the Cancellation Charge to the customer even when nonrecurring charges are waived Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 21 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER 5 2 3 CANCELLATION OF AN ACCESS ORDER Cont d E The Critical Dates monitored by the Company are as follows APP DLRD PTD DD 1 Switched Access Service e Lineside Access 1 21 56 71 2 e Trunkside Access 1 15 65 73 2 e VG EF and DTT 13 44 77 2 e DS1 EF and DTT 10 48 81 2 e DS3 EF and DTT 10 48 81 2 F When a customer cancels an order for the discontinuance of service no charges apply for the cancellation G If the Company misses a service date due to circumstances over which it has d
304. ingle customer between e The customer s SWC and an end office or e The customer s SWC and an access tandem or e The customer s SWC and a Company Hub where multiplexing functions are performed or e A Company Hub and an end office or e A Company Hub and an access tandem The DTT rate category is composed of a monthly fixed rate and a monthly per mile rate based on the facility provided i e Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 The fixed rate provides the circuit equipment at the ends of the transmission paths The per mile rate provides the transmission facilities including intermediate transmission circuit equipment between the end points of the circuit The DTT rate is the sum of the fixed rate and the per mile rate For purposes of determining the per mile rate mileage will be measured as airline mileage using the V amp H coordinates method Mileage measurement rules are set forth in 6 7 11 following The types of facilities available for DTT are described in 2 following C D 6 1 6 1 2 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 15 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES Switched Transport 1 General Description Cont d C 1 2 3 Switched Transport TST Rate Category TST provides the transmission facilities between an access tandem and end offices subtending that tandem utilizing t
305. ion supporting Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN signaling are described in Technical Reference GR 905 CORE M Material moved to Page 3 N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 6 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 2 SERVICE DESCRIPTION 20 2 1 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ACCESS CAPABILITY CCSAC Cont d A CCS Link CCSAC is provided by a CCS Link The CCS Link provides digital bidirectional transmission and operates at a DSO A level i e 56 kbps of CCS7 signaling data and 8 kbps of control supervisory data Each DSO A channel link occupies a single DSO i e 64 kbps channel of a 24 channel DS1 digital transmission system The DSO A channel link is multiplexed into a DS1 format for hand off at the customer s SPOI One STP Port is required for each 56 kbps signaling link utilized for CCSAC at the Company STP The customer s SPOI and the Company s STP or FSPOI wire center must be located within the same LATA Customer connections at an FSPOI will only provide signaling access for the LATA served by the FSPOI Customer connections for multiple LATAs where available must be made at the Company STP The STP Port is the POT to the signal switching capability of the STP and is dedicated to the customer The CCS Link is transported via an Entrance Facility and a Direct Link Transport DLT facility a
306. iority Installation Invocation includes system development verification and confirmation 2 Priority Restoration Level Implementation includes system development verification and confirmation 3 Priority Restoration Level Change includes verification and confirmation 4 Priority Restoration Administration and Maintenance includes reconciliation J Existing Restoration Priority RP assignments will remain in effect for 30 months until March 31 1993 If a customer converts RP Service to TSP the customer will incur the Priority Restoration level implementation nonrecurring charge as specified in 13 4 3 D following K The customer recognizes that quoting charges and obtaining permission to proceed with the installation and restoration of certain Access Services will cause unnecessary delays In subscribing to TSP System the customer recognizes this condition and grants the Company the right to quote charges after the work has been completed Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 18 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES Cont d 13 3 10 PEAK DAY REROUTING Peak Day Rerouting allows Feature Group B or Feature Group D customers the capability of completing terminating overflow traffic on specific peak calling days which will be limited to Mother s Day Father s Day Thank
307. iplying the total attempts obtained in Step 2 by the NCTA per attempt ratio The NCTA per attempt ratio is obtained from the sample study identified in Step 2 by measuring the non conversation time associated with both completed and incompleted attempts The total NCTA is the time on a completed attempt from customer acknowledgment of receipt of call to called party answer set up and ringing plus the time on an incompleted attempt from customer acknowledgment of call until the access tandem or end office receives a disconnect signal ring no answer busy or network blockage That is Total Attempts times Non Conversation Time per Attempt Ratio equals Total NCTA STEP 4 Obtain total chargeable originating access minutes by adding the total NCTA obtained in Step 3 to the recorded originating measured minutes obtained in Step 1 That is Measured Minutes plus NCTA equals Chargeable Originating Access Minutes 6 7 6 7 7 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 126 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES Cont d Following is an example which illustrates how the chargeable originating access minutes are derived from the measured originating minutes using this formula Where Measured Minutes M Min ccccccesscececeeeeees 7 000 Measured Messages M MeS cssccsseeeeeeeeeees 1 000 Att
308. irect control excluding e g acts of God governmental requirements work stoppages and civil commotions the customer may cancel an Access Order without incurring cancellation charges 1 Excludes DS1 or DS3 EF and DS1 or DS3 DTT facilities 2 Minimum period charges and 100 of the nonrecurring charges apply when the Access Order or part of the Access Order is canceled on or after the original Service Date Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 22 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER Cont d 5 2 4 SELECTION OF FACILITIES FOR ACCESS ORDERS When a customer places an order for Lineside or Trunkside Switched Access T Service the customer may choose to utilize existing Switched Access Entrance Facilities and or Direct Trunked Transport facilities ordered from Section 6 following Shared Use Switched Access and PLTS provided over the same facilities is allowed when Shared Use facilities are ordered and provided as set T forth in 2 7 preceding The customer is not allowed to order Switched Access T facilities from Section 6 and assign PLTS to those facilities The customer must specify the specific channels to be used to implement the Access Order 5 2 5 2 5 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 23 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5
309. is assessed the first installation charge for the first line or trunk and each additional line or trunk is assessed the each additional installation charge for Interface Group 6 per Access Order This charge applies for all Network Channel Interface NCI codes associated with a WATS access line If two or more optional features and changes are ordered on the same Access Order the optional feature or change requiring the lowest level of work activity will apply A maximum one half nonrecurring charge will apply per Access Order for service rearrangements If a feature is not required on each line but rather for an entire hunt group only one such charge will apply i e it will not apply per line This one half nonrecurring charge is assessed the first installation charge for the first hunt group and each additional hunt group is assessed the each additional installation charge per Interface Group 6 per Access Order Nonrecurring charges for service rearrangements are specified in 6 8 following M Material moved from Page 100 T M T T T M D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 102 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C Nonrecurring Charges Cont d 4 Rearrangement to SS7 Out of Band Signaling Rearrangement of existing FGD MF sign
310. itching systems in a network used in the establishment of an end to end connection Trunk Group The term Trunk Group denotes a set of trunks which are traffic engineered as a unit for the establishment of connections between switching systems in which all of the communications paths are interchangeable Trunkside Connection The term Trunkside Connection denotes the connection of a transmission path to the trunk side of a local exchange switching system N N 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 89 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Two Wire To Four Wire Conversion The term Two wire to Four wire Conversion denotes an arrangement which converts a four wire transmission path to a two wire transmission path to allow a four wire facility to terminate in a two wire entity e g a central office switch Underground Utility Vault The term Underground Utility Vault denotes an underground enclosure where conduit s are terminated and which provides ready access to conduit system Uniform Service Order Code USOC The term Uniform Service Order Code denotes a three or five character alphabetic numeric or an alphanumeric code that identifies a specific item of service or equipment Uniform Service Order Codes are used in the Company billing system to generate recurring rates and nonrecurring c
311. itional Tests as set forth in b following may be ordered by the customer at additional charges 60 days prior to the start of the customer prescribed schedule The customer also may specify a more frequent schedule of tests 60 days prior to the start of the customer prescribed schedule a Basic Tests 1 MONTHLY TO FIRST POINT OF SWITCHING USOC RATE e 1004 Hz Loss Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBSX 0 07 e C Message Noise Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBSX 0 07 e Return Loss Balance Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBSX 0 26 1 Subject to a one year minimum contract period and annually thereafter Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 28 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B 3 Cont d b Additional Tests MONTHLY TO FIRST POINT OF SWITCHING USOC RATE e Gain Slope Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBSX 0 07 e C Notched Noise Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBSX 0 07 c Example A customer schedules six 6 1004 Hz Loss Tests six 6 C Message Noise Tests and fo
312. ivation or deactivation as set forth in 6 6 2 following regardless of whether the activity is T to occur with or without a requirement for additional capacity i e busy hour minutes of capacity or quantities of trunks All 900 number assignments and administration shall be in accordance with the North American Numbering Plan NANP 6 For 800 Data Base 800 DB Access Service the customer shall order the service T in accordance with the requirements as set forth in 1 2 and 4 preceding The service will be provisioned as set forth in 6 2 5 following except that customers T may request DTT to those end offices designated by the Company as Service Switching Points SSPs 800 DB Service is available only as a LATA wide service and must be ordered to all end offices in a LATA Service will be provisioned at a minimum to all access tandems and operator switches equipped as SSPs in a LATA 8XX DB codes and number assignments shall be in accordance with the Guidelines for 800 Data Base 7 When a customer orders CCSAC the customer must specify the customer s STP T premises the number of CCS Links required between the customer s Signaling C Point of Interface SPOT and the Company s STP location per access order as set T forth in Section 20 following T 5 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 9 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTION
313. ken against the Company acts of God and other circumstances beyond the Company s reasonable control subject to the Credit Allowance for a Service Interruption as set forth in 2 4 4 following 2 1 2 1 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY LIABILITY A General Cont d 5 The Company does not guarantee or make any warranty with respect to its services when used in an explosive atmosphere The Company shall be indemnified defended and held harmless by the customer from any and all claims by any person relating to such customer s use of services so provided B Liability 1 The Company s liability if any for its willful misconduct is not limited by this Tariff With respect to any other claim or suit by a customer or by any others for damages associated with the installation provision preemption termination maintenance repair or restoration of service including presubscription and subject to the provisions of A preceding the Company s liability shall not exceed an amount equal to the proportionate charge for the service for the period during which the service was affected This liability for damages shall be in addition to any amounts that may otherwise be due the customer under this Tariff as a Credit Allowance for a Service Interruption The Company is not liable
314. lable in connection with Feature Group A are provided under the Company s Exchange and Network Services Tariff These are e Custom Calling Features e MARKET EXPANSION LINE e Bill Number Screening e IntraLATA Extensions e Open Switching Interval Protection OSIP e Message Waiting Indication Audible Transmission Performance FGA is provided with Transmission Type B or Type C performance The standard parameter limits associated with these Transmission Types are guaranteed to the first point of switching Transmission Type C performance is provided with Interface Group 1 and Transmission Type B performance is provided with Interface Groups 2 6 and 9 as available Voice band Data Transmission Type DB parameter limits are provided with FGA to the first point of switching as delineated in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE Testing Capabilities FGA is provided in the terminating direction where equipment is available with seven digit access to balance 100 type test line and milliwatt 102 type test line In addition to the tests described in 6 1 5 preceding which are included with the installation of service additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing and Nonscheduled Testing are available for FGA as set forth in Section 13 following T T T C T T T 6 2 6 2 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 39 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6
315. lease 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER Cont d AVAILABILITY FOR TESTING The services provided under this Tariff shall be available to the Company at times mutually agreed upon in order to permit the Company to make tests and adjustments appropriate for maintaining the services in satisfactory operating condition Such tests and adjustments shall be completed within a reasonable time No credit will be allowed for any interruptions involved during such tests and adjustments BALANCE All signals for transmission over the services provided under this Tariff shall be delivered by the customer balanced to ground except for ground start DESIGN OF CUSTOMER SERVICES Subject to the provisions of 2 1 7 preceding the customer shall be solely responsible at its own expense for the overall design of its services and for any redesigning or rearrangement of its services which may be required because of changes in facilities operations or procedures of the Company minimum protection criteria or operating or maintenance characteristics of the facilities REFERENCES TO THE COMPANY The customer may advise end users that certain services are provided by the Company in connection with the service the customer furnishes to end users however the customer shall not represent that the Company jointly participates in the customer s services 2 3 2 3 8 A Qwest Corporation Access Se
316. ling beginning in February May August and November respectively The Company will program the PIU factor into the Company s billing data base no later than the last business day of January April July and October for the advance quarterly billing beginning in February May August and November respectively If the customer does not notify the Company in time for the Company to program the billing data base with the Company developed LATA level PIU factor the customer must continue to provide a quarterly jurisdictional report for the quarter as the Company s billing data base can only be programmed with one PIU process at a time in the same quarter T T T 2 3 2 3 10 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 24 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B 3 Cont d C 4 VG EF and DTT Facilities for FGA to be Resold Customers initially ordering a VG EF and a DTT facility for FGA to be resold shall provide a projected PIU factor for each new facility These PIU factors shall reflect all originating and terminating traffic using these facilities and are in addition to the PIU factors as set forth in 1 a preceding The PIU factor for the VG EF and DTT facility will be applied to all rate elements associated with the EF and DTT facility The PIU factor is expressed as a whole
317. ll also specify which lines are to be arranged in T multiline hunt group arrangements and which lines are to be provided as single lines Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 6 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER A Switched Access Service Cont d 4 When the customer orders Trunkside Switched Access Service the customer T must have capacity available on an existing EF with a compatible interface or request an EF as described in 1 preceding In addition the customer must specify if direct routing or tandem routing is to be utilized T When direct routing is being requested the customer must have an existing DTT facility between the SWC and the end office or order a new DTT facility as described in 2 preceding If the DTT facility is existing the customer shall T provide the CFA of the facility to be utilized When tandem routing is to be utilized a DTT facility is required between the C SWC and the access tandem and TST common transport is required between the access tandem and all the end offices subtending that tandem If the DTT facility is new the customer may order the DTT facility as described in 2 preceding If the DTT facility is existing the customer shall provide the CFA of the facility to be utilized The TST common transport facilities are provided by the Company based on the number of
318. ly and October respectively The Company developed LATA level PIU factor will serve as the basis for the customer s next three months advance billing beginning in February May August and November respectively When existing customers order additional EF and DTT facilities for Switched Access Service the Company will determine the LATA level PIU factor where jurisdiction can be determined from previously billed usage The PIU factor is based on the average billed Switched Access Interstate usage excluding VG EF and DTT facilities for FGA per LATA per customer on a quarterly basis When the Company is unable to determine the LATA level PIU factor for EF and DTT facilities for an existing customer because usage data is not being billed to that customer the Company will apply a default PIU factor of fifty percent 50 T T T N N T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 22 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B 3 a Cont d The PIU factor is expressed as a whole number i e a number from 0 100 The PIU factor is used by the Company to determine interstate and intrastate rates and charges The PIU factor is applied to all rate elements associated with the EF and DTT facilities This PIU factor is in addition to the PIU factors as set forth in 1 and 2
319. m power available at the originating end and the actual power reaching the terminating end through the inserted connection T Tariff SECTION 2 Page 72 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued March 11 2005 Effective May 17 2005 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Integrated Service Digital Network User Part SUP The term Integrated Service Digital Network User Part denotes protocol that provides the mechanism for establishing the connections from the originating exchange to the destination exchange without using the bearer circuit itself Interexchange Carrier IC or Interexchange Common Carrier The term Interexchange Carrier or Interexchange Common Carrier denotes any individual partnership association joint stock company trust governmental entity or corporation engaged for hire in interstate or foreign communication by wire or radio between two or more exchanges Intermodulation Distortion The term Intermodulation Distortion denotes a measure of the nonlinearity of a channel It is measured using four tones and evaluating the ratios in dBs of the transmitted composite four tone signal power to the second order products of the tones R2 and the third order products of the tones R3 IntraMTA The term IntraMTA refers to traffic that originates and terminates within a Major Trading Area MTA and only applies to wireless providers MTAs ar
320. mediately Available Funds denotes a corporate or personal check drawn on a bank account and funds which are available for use by the receiving party on the same day on which they are received and include U S Federal Reserve bank wire transfers U S Federal Reserve notes paper cash U S coins U S Postal Money Orders and New York Certificates of Deposit Impedance Balance The term Impedance Balance denotes the method of expressing Echo Return Loss and Singing Return Loss at a 4 wire interface whereby the gains and or loss of the 4 wire portion of the transmission path including the hybrid are not included in the specification Impulse Noise The term Impulse Noise denotes any momentary occurrence of the noise on a channel over a specified level threshold It is evaluated by counting the number of occurrences which exceed the threshold Individual Case Basis ICB The term Individual Case Basis denotes a condition in which the regulations if applicable rates and charges for an offering under the provisions of this Tariff are developed based on the circumstances in each case Initial Address Message IAM The term Initial Address Message denotes a SS7 signaling message that contains the address and routing information required to establish a point to point telephone connection Inserted Connection Loss ICL The term Inserted Connection Loss denotes the 1004 Hz power difference in dB between the maximu
321. ment date shall be the first non holiday day following such Sunday or holiday If such payment date falls on a Saturday or on a holiday which is observed on Tuesday Wednesday Thursday or Friday the payment date shall be the last non holiday day preceding such Saturday or holiday T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 38 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 4 PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES 2 4 1 PAYMENT OF RATES CHARGES AND DEPOSITS B 2 Cont d b 2 C Further if any portion of the payment is received by the Company after the payment date as set forth in a preceding or if any portion of the payment is received by the Company in funds which are not immediately available to the Company then a late payment penalty shall be due to the Company The late payment penalty shall be the portion of the payment not received by the payment date times a late factor The late factor shall be the lesser of The highest interest rate in decimal value which may be levied by law for commercial transactions compounded daily for the number of days from the payment date to and including the date that the customer actually makes the payment to the Company or 0 000407 per day compounded daily for the number of days from the payment date to and including the date that the customer actually makes the payment to the Company
322. mer does not supply a projected PIU factor by LATA calls will be billed using a PIU of 50 50 interstate 50 intrastate The PIU of 50 will be used to apportion the terminating traffic which does not exceed the 7 floor In the event that the Company applies the intrastate terminating access rate to calls without sufficient call detail as provided in this tariff the customer will have the opportunity to request backup documentation regarding the Company s basis for such application and further request that the Company change the application of the intrastate access rate upon a showing of why the intrastate rate should not be applied See also Section 2 4 1 B 2 c billing disputes When the customer reports a LATA level PIU factor the specified percentage applies to all end offices within the LATA C C T C C C C N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 21 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B Jurisdictional Requirements Cont d 3 Entrance Facility EF and Direct Trunked Transport DTT Facility Excludes Voice Grade VG EF and DTT for FGA For EF and DTT facilities the customer has the following jurisdiction options 1 allow the Company to develop the projected LATA level PIU factor using a mechanized program as set forth in a
323. minating traffic using this flat rated port The FCC in their FCC 11 161 ICC Transformation order in section 51 907 d 1 allowed Price Cap Carriers to use an equal split to divide the charge between originating and terminating elements When the terminating portion of the rate is reduced and then combined with the originating portion of the rate a single flat rate is generated for billing purposes The Originating portion of the charge is 3 00 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 150 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING Cont d B Common Switching Optional Features FID 1 Call Denial on Line or Hunt Group available with FGA per line CAD 2 Service Code Denial on Line or Hunt Group available with FGA per line SCD 3 Hunt Group Arrangement available with FGA per line HML HTG Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 151 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING B Common Switching Optional Features Cont d FID 4 Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement available with FGA per Line HTY UD 5 Nonhunting Number for use with Hunt Group Arrangement or Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement available with FGA per line NHN 6 Automatic Number Identification
324. minations Multiple terminations for the variable routing options require the POTS Translation feature described in 1 preceding The following variable routing options are available Routing by Originating Telephone Number NPA NXX XXXX Time of Day Day of Week Specific Date Allocation by Percentage Routing by Originating Telephone Number NPA NXX XXXX where technically feasible allows a service subscriber to specify one or more multiple terminations with a single carrier and or multiple carriers Exchange and or Interexchange Carriers based on where a call originates Time of Day Day of Week allows a service subscriber to specify one or more multiple terminations with a single carrier and or multiple carriers Exchange and or Interexchange Carriers based on time of day or day of week the call originates Specific Date allows the service subscriber to specify alternate service routes with the date the call originates These calls can be routed to one of multiple terminations with a single carrier and or multiple carriers Exchange and or Interexchange Carriers Allocation by Percentage allows the service subscriber to specify by percentage the calls to be allocated to multiple terminations and or multiple carriers Exchange and or Interexchange Carriers A Call Handling and Destination Feature Query Charge as described in 6 7 1 following is assessed to the service provider for each 8XX query to the SCP which utilizes one or
325. mmon interface will be provisioned under the rules and regulations for Shared Use between Private Line Transport and Switched Access Services referenced in 2 7 preceding The rate for DS3 EF electrical capacity of two or greater or any optical interface is for the billing of shared use only Switched Access Services rates and charges as set forth in 6 8 following will apply for each channel of the Shared Use facility that is used to provide Switched Access Service Technical specifications are delineated in Qwest Corporation Technical Reference 77324 When Interface Groups 1 2 6 or 9 are associated with FGD Service with SS7 Out of Band Signaling no signaling will be done via the message channel When SWITCHNET 56 Service is ordered in conjunction with FGD it requires the use of a separate trunk group equipped with Interface Group 6 This service allows a customer to establish a connection between the customer s premises and a suitably equipped end user premises over facilities capable of transmitting digital data at 56 kbps T T T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 19 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES Cont d a Interface Group 1 Interface Group 1 except as set forth in the following provides two wire voice frequency transmission at the customer s premises Interface Gro
326. more of the Call Handling and Destination Features T T T 6 2 6 2 9 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 59 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d 900 ACCESS SERVICE 900 Access Service is an originating service utilizing FGB C or D Switched Access Service The service provides a customer identification function based on the dialed NXX When a 1 900 NXX XXXX or 0 900 NXX XXXX call is originated by the end user the Company will determine based on the NXX dialed the customer to which the 900 call is to be routed This six digit routing function will be performed at suitably equipped end office and access tandem switches as determined by the Company The manner in which 900 Access Service is provisioned is dependent on the status of the end office which serves the end user customer who places a 900 call 1 e equipped or not equipped with equal access capability and or the status of the customer i e MTS WATS provider or MTS WATS type provider When 900 Access Service is provided from an end office equipped with equal access capability all such service will be provisioned as Feature Group D or 900 Access Service When 900 Access Service is provided from an end office not equipped with equal access capability such service will be provisioned as Feature Group C or 900 Access S
327. mpany a Facility PVU factor representing the whole number percentage of the customer s total monthly recurring switched transport charges that are associated with the intrastate access MOU included in the PVU factor T T 2 3 2 3 10 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 33 3 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 06 12 2012 Effective 07 13 2012 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS F Identification and Rating of VoIP PSTN Traffic M 1 g i 2 a 3 Calculation and Application of Percent VoIP Usage Factors Cont d Both the customer provided originating PVU and the terminating PVU and the Facility PVU shall be based on information such as the number of the customer s retail VoIP subscriptions in the state e g as reported on F C C Form 477 traffic studies actual call detail or other relevant and verifiable information which will be provided to the Company upon request The customer shall retain the call detail work papers and information used to develop the PVU factors for a minimum of one year If the Customer does not furnish the Company with a PVU factor the Company will utilize a PVU equal to zero Initial Implementation of PVU Factors If the PVU factors cannot be implemented in the Company s billing systems by December 29 2011 once the factors can be implemented the Company will adjust the customer
328. mpany transport facilities serving the customer s premises the need for signaling conversions or two wire to four wire conversions or the need to terminate digital or high frequency facilities in channel bank equipment may require that Company equipment be placed at the customer s premises For example if a voice frequency interface is ordered by the customer and the Company facilities serving the customer s premises are digital then Company channel bank equipment must be placed at the customer s premises in order to provide the voice frequency interface ordered by the customer Interface Group Transmission Specifications and Data Transmission Parameters are delineated in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE Only certain Network Channel Interface codes NCI are available at the customer s premises The NCI codes associated with the Interface Groups may vary among different types of service based on the technical requirements The various premises interfaces which are available with the Interface Groups and the types of service with which they may be used are set forth in e following Based upon the Interface Group chosen by the customer EF and DTT multiplexing arrangements may be required Multiplexing arrangements are described in 4 following When Switched Access Services are ordered in conjunction with Private Line Transport DS3 Service which is provisioned with an electrical capacity of two or greater or any optical interface the co
329. mporary Surrender of a Service F The customer in obtaining TSP System service acknowledges and consents to the provision of customer service record information by the Company to the Federal Government as specified in the TSP Service Vendor Handbook in order for the Government to administer and maintain its overall TSP System This customer service record information will include TSP Authorization Code and Company Circuit Service ID customer telephone number and customer service location G When Priority Restoration Administration and Maintenance as defined in the TSP Service Vendor Handbook is discontinued revocation of assigned Priority Restoration and the associated Access Service is continued in service the charge specified in 13 4 3 D following will not apply for such a discontinuance Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 17 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PRIORITY TSP SYSTEM Cont d H Credit allowance for service interruption for Priority Restoration Administration and Maintenance shall be the same as for the Access Service with which it is associated as set forth in 2 4 4 preceding I Certain activities performed by the Company in association with the TSP System are included in the rate elements as follows 1 Pr
330. n Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 27 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS C 1 Cont d M c The customer shall maintain and retain the work papers that show how the T interstate percentage was determined and a summary derived from the actual call detail records for a minimum twelve 12 month period which statistically substantiates each interstate percentage provided to the Company This summary at a minimum shall include month year state traffic type e g originating terminating 700 8XX 900 etc and service type d The Company may request the actual call detail records or a statistically valid T M1 sample of such records on a prospective basis not to exceed a consecutive three month period The actual call detail records will be used to statistically substantiate the interstate percentage provided to the Company and the process by which it is developed Such call detail records shall consist of call information including call terminating address i e called number call duration the trunk group number s or access line number s over which the call is routed and the point at which the call enters the customer s network The Company will not request such data more than once a year e If quarterly reports are not supplied by the customer the following steps will be T taken
331. n Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 10 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 12 15 2008 Effective 2 10 2009 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Cont d SERVICE PROVISIONING A CCSAC Service Provisioning CCSAC transmission specifications diversity requirements testing parameters and design requirements for STP Links i e CCS Signaling Links are set forth in Technical References GR 905 CORE and 77342 CCSAC network interface specifications between the Company STP location and the customer s STP location supporting Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN signaling are described in Technical Reference GR 905 CORE CCSAC is provided from either the customer s Signaling Point SP which requires a minimum of two STP Links and two STP Ports or from the customer s STP which requires a minimum of four STP Links and four STP Ports A group of signaling links that connect the same two signaling points is described as a link set There are a maximum of 16 signaling links located within one link set The quantity of CCS Links required is based upon diversity requirements Diversity is provided as mutually agreed upon by the Company and the customer based upon the availability of facilities from the customer s SPOI location to the Company s STP or FSPOI Customer connections at an FSPOI will only provide two diverse routes to the Company STP If applicable Special
332. n Step 1 Step 4 The percentage in Step 3 is subtracted from 100 to determine the percentage of DTT traffic PDR factor Step 5 The percentage in Step 3 is multiplied by the total number of access minutes that the Company was unable to determine routing for in that specific state This PDR factor will serve as the basis for billing until a revised PDR factor is calculated annually based on the previous year s usage T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 137 State of South Dakota Release 6 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT A Entrance Facility Monthly Rates MONTHLY USOC RATE 1 Electrical Interface e Voice Grade per point of termination EF2AX FE4AX 51 35 1 e DSI per DSI EF2BX FE4BX 92 18 R e DS3 per DS3 EF2CX FE4CX 1 083 53 R 2 Optical Interface 1 e DS3 per DS3 EF2DX FE4DX 619 68 R 1 For Shared Use only as set forth in 2 7 preceding Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 138 Release 3 Effective 7 2 2013 State of South Dakota Issued 5 31 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 1 SWITCHED TRANSPORT Cont d B Direct Trunked Transport Monthly Rates MONTHLY RATE MILEAGE BANDS USOC FIXED PER MILE Voice Grade 0 1YTXA 1UFX1 x Over 0 to 8 1YTXB IUFX2 20 86 I 0 27 R Over 8 to 25 1YTXC 1UFX3 21 28 D 0 15 Over 25 to 50 1YTXD 1UFX4 20 37
333. n a mass conversion basis e g an IC using two or more PIC designations or an IC assuming ownership of another IC s end users etc charges will be as set forth in D following T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 7 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 11 16 2005 Effective 12 31 2005 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 3 3 INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER SUBSCRIPTION Cont d D Rates and Charges NONRECURRING USOC CHARGE 1 The charges for a Manual PIC change are as follows e Per Telephone Exchange Service line or trunk P6XLX 5 50 1 e Per Switched Access Lineside connection P6XLX 5 50 e Per Centrex type line P6XLX 5 50 e Per PAL P6XLX 5 50 D 2 The charges for an Electronic PIC change are as follows e Per Telephone Exchange Service line or trunk P6XFX 1 25 e Per Switched Access Lineside connection P6XFX 1 25 e Per Centrex type line P6XFX 1 25 e Per PAL P6XFX 1 25 3 The charges for a simultaneous Manual PIC change are as follows 1 e Per Telephone Exchange Service line or trunk P6XPX 2 75 e Per Switched Access Lineside connection P6XPX 2 75 e Per Centrex type line P6XPX 2 75 e Per PAL P6XPX 2 75 4 The charges for a simultaneous Electronic PIC change are as follows 1 e Per Telephone Exchange Service line or trunk P6XOX 0 62 e Per Switched Access Lineside connection P6XOX 0 62 e Per Centrex type l
334. n effort to further project CCSN facility requirements 20 5 ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 20 5 1 ORDERING REQUIREMENTS A CCSAC Ordering Requirements When a customer orders CCSAC the customer must specify the customer STP premises the number of CCS Links and the service application requiring CCSAC connectivity One STP Port is provided for each link ordered In addition the customer must specify at a minimum information for the Entrance Facility and the DLT as described following The customer must have capacity available on an existing DS1 Entrance Facility ordered and provisioned from this section or a DS3 facility ordered and provisioned from Section 6 preceding or Section 7 of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 between the customer s SPOI and the SWC of the customer s SPOI with a compatible interface or request a DS1 Entrance Facility If the Entrance Facility is existing the customer shall provide the Circuit Facility Assignment CFA of the existing facilities that will be utilized T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 9 State of South Dakota Release 5 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 5 ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 20 5 1 ORDERING REQUIREMENTS A CCSAC Ordering Requirements Cont d In addition the customer must specify the type of DLT facility DS1 or
335. n end office by the Company s tandem switch to mark the carrier connect time when the Company s tandem switch sends an Initial Address Message to the interexchange carrier Expected Measured Loss EML The term Expected Measured Loss denotes a calculated loss which specifies the end to end 1004 Hz loss on a terminated test connection between two readily accessible manual or remote test points It is the sum of the inserted connection loss and test access loss including any test pads Extended Area Service EAS See definition of Exchange T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 69 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 12 15 2008 Effective 2 10 2009 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Facility Signaling Point of Interconnection FSPOT The term Facility Signaling Point of Interconnection FSPOD denotes a Company designated ordering point within a Company LATA to which customers may establish SS7 Signaling connections Field Identifier FID The term Field Identifier denotes two to four characters that are used on service orders to convey specific instructions Field Identifiers may or may not have associated data Selected Field Identifiers are used in Company billing systems to generate nonrecurring charges First Come First Served The term First Come First Served denotes a procedure followed when the first Access Service Request ASR received will be th
336. n individual case basis and filed following USOC SYC Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 12 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 12 SPECIALIZED SERVICE OR ARRANGEMENTS SUBJECT PAGE GEM OTA ic cor TE EEEE E E EE E AE EE steeuneast 1 Move Charte nnana a Miata E E a E aai 1 R tes And Care 85 isses eteen ioiai S sta gE 2 12 1 12 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 12 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 12 SPECIALIZED SERVICE OR ARRANGEMENTS GENERAL Specialized Service or Arrangements may be provided by the Company at the request of a customer on an individual case basis if such service or arrangements meet the following criteria The requested service or arrangements are not offered under other sections of this Tariff The facilities utilized to provide the requested service or arrangements are of a type normally used by the Company in furnishing its other services The requested service or arrangements are provided within a LATA The requested service or arrangements are compatible with other Company services facilities and its engineering and maintenance practices This offering is subject to the availability of the necessary Company personnel and capital resources MOVE CHARGES When service without a maximum termination liability charge associated with it is moved the charg
337. n this document must conform to the transmission specification standards contained in this document or in the following Technical References B The following publications may be obtained from Telcordia Customer Service 8 Corporate Place PY A 3A184 Piscataway NJ 08854 4196 PUBLICATION TITLE NUMBER LATA Switching Systems Generic FR 64 Requirements LSSGR Operator Services Systems FR 271 Generic Requirements OSSGR Ordering and Billing Forum Multiple SR BDS 000983 Exchange Carrier Access Billing MECAB Ordering and Billing Forum Multiple SR TAP 000984 Exchange Carrier Ordering and Design Guidelines MECOD T T D D T D D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 28 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 9 REFERENCE TO TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS B Cont d PUBLICATION TITLE NUMBER Trunk Traffic Engineering SR TAP 000191 Concepts and Applications D Telecommunications Transmission Engineering ST TEC 000053 Textbook D Compatibility Information for Feature TR NPL 000175 Group B Switched Access Service D Compatibility Information for Feature TR NPL 000258 Group D Switched Access Service D Voice Grade Switched Access Service GR 334 CORE T Transmission Parameter Limits and Interface Combinations D OSSGR Section 22 3 Line GR 1158 CORE T Information Database D Qwest Corporation Access Serv
338. naling e For originating calls over FGD usage measurement on direct trunks begins when the FGD entry switch sends an Initial Address Message IAM The usage measurement for tandem trunks begins when the FGD entry switch receives an Exit Message EXM e The measurement of originating call usage over FGD with SS7 Out of Band Signaling ends when a Release Message is sent or received by the originating end user s end office whichever occurs first 2 Terminating Usage Measurement e For terminating calls over FGD the measurement of access minutes begins when the terminating FGD entry switch receives answer supervision from the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating end user has answered e The measurement of terminating call usage over FGD ends when the terminating FGD entry switch receives disconnect supervision from either the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating end user has disconnected or the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch T T T Tariff SECTION 6 Page 131 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 7 6 7 8 6 7 9 6 7 10 Qwest Corporation Access Service 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS Cont d APPLICATION OF RATES FOR EXTENSION SERVICE FGA Switched Access Service is available with extensions i e additional terminations of the service at different building s in the same
339. naling Access Capability CCSAC Cont d 2 20 2 20 2 1 Foreign Database Queries This service provides the customer the ability to query foreign databases databases not maintained by the Company by sending signaling information via TCAP messages between the Company s STP the customer s designated premises and the foreign database CCSAC Service as set forth in this section is required to provide this capability Line Information Data Base LIDB Service LIDB Service provides the customer the ability to query in the form of signaling information the Company s LIDB via the Company s CCSN LIDB provides customers the ability to validate all alternate billing services in an effort to prevent toll fraud occurrences LIDB customers must order CCSAC as set forth in this section SERVICE DESCRIPTION COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ACCESS CAPABILITY CCSAC CCSAC transmission specifications diversity requirements and testing parameters are set forth in Technical Reference GR 905 CORE GR 954 CORE and 77342 Diversity will be provided as mutually agreed upon by the Company and the customer based upon availability from the customer s STP SP or SSP location to the Company s STP If applicable Special Construction terms conditions and charges will apply CCSAC interconnection is available only in suitably equipped Company STP locations CCSAC network interface specifications between the Company s STP location and the customer s STP locat
340. nce or Impairment and Unlawful Use oe ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 Jurisdictional Reports Requirements eecceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 17 Aabtlity sossrninininsisietise n esa iaaa a EE ETEA E rS e Eas 3 Limitation of Use of Metallic Facilities sssneseeeseeeesseesseesseseseressseessres 9 Limitation Sinn ie n e e E A EEE EA AESI E E ERSS 1 Maintaining ServiCes caticisiceciansevcisatsduactuavisceegsecvedeaavensceehdeeesadaeantesoeenceasyn 6 Mi nim m Period S s cesesscicscsteveceousefacteesesexcaesesieeestessccersu te cbveseseceteseMencs eesces 40 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Index Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS SUBJECT PAGE Notification of Service Affecting Activities 0 0 eeeeeeeseceeneeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 Obligations of the Customer gee ccsstesevastensucseads hace shtageunsadesatepesttocssedademeermeancs 13 Ordering Rating and Billing of Access Services Where More Than One Exchange Telephone Company is Involved 1 0 0 0 eee 45 Ordering Rating and Billing of Switched Access Service Provided in Conjunction With a Commercial Mobile Radio Service Provider 54 Ownership Of Facilities s si cciistecsadicsieaccaseaveladsepeacsavensesedsededunnaveracedbeseceendes 13 Payment Arrangements and Credit Allowances sssessesesereereesererreresee 36 Payment of Rates Charges and Deposits sssssseeessseesssessssse
341. nd offices for which the Company needs to forward ANI to its recording equipment D C C T T T T T T 6 3 6 3 1 F Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 66 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Automatic Number Identification ANI Cont d Technical specifications are delineated in TR NPL 000175 and TR NPL 000258 Where ANI cannot be provided e g on calls from multiparty services information digits will be provided to the customer Charge Number is the SS7 Out of Band Signaling equivalent of the ten digit ANI telephone number Charge Number is the automatic transmission of the ten digit billing number of the calling station and the originating line information when a FGD trunk group is provisioned with SS7 Out of Band Signaling Charge Number is provided when the customer requests the ANI optional feature on FGD trunk groups provisioned with SS7 Out of Band Signaling ANI information and Charge Number information are provided based on the following requirements e The telephone number and billing information may be used for billing and collection routing screening and completion of the originating subscriber s call or transaction or for services directly related to the originating subscriber s call or t
342. nd a customer s premises through an access tandem The seven digit ANI telephone number is available with FGB where provided and FGC With these Feature Groups ANI will be provided only with DTT ANI will be transmitted on all calls except those originating from multiparty lines pay telephones using FGB when an end user has dialed 0 for operator assistance or when an ANI failure has occurred The ten digit ANI telephone number is only available with FGD including 800 DB Access Service provisioned as FGD The ten digit ANI telephone number consists of the Numbering Plan Area NPA plus the seven digit ANI telephone number The ten digit ANI telephone number will be transmitted on all calls except those identified as multiparty line or the end user has dialed 0 for operator assistance in which case only the NPA will be transmitted in addition to the information digits When 800 DB Access Service is ordered the ten digit ANI telephone number will be transmitted on all calls except those where ANI cannot be provided as stated above or from end offices not equipped to provide ANI In these instances only the three digit NPA and the information digits described in the LATA Switching Systems Generic Requirements LSSGR Technical Reference FR 64 if applicable will be transmitted With FGC ANT is provided from end offices at which Company recording for end user billing is not provided or where it is not required It is not provided from e
343. nd transmitted data file output the files are returned in the standardized format For paper output the BNA data is returned in a preformatted report The BNA data will be provided to the customer at the same intervals that the customer receives subscription data Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 8 Page 5 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 8 INFORMATION AND BILLING SERVICES 8 1 RECORDING SERVICE Cont d 8 1 7 RATES AND CHARGES USOC RATE A Recording Service e Recording Completed per message RDRD 0 0040 e Assembly and Editing With provision of message detail RPMD 0 0080 Without provision of message detail RAAE 0 0055 B Billing Name and Address e Mechanical Method per listing N A 0 1700 e Manual Method per listing N A 1 9500 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 9 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 9 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 10 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 10 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 11 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 11 SPECIAL FACILITIES ROUTING OF ACCESS SERVICES SUBJECT PAGE Descrip o cotiere a a E a a E aSa 1 R t s And Charf Surrersiena gins n a E a a E aii 2
344. nded Interconnection EI Service is determined as follows e If the EI Service and the access tandem are in the same wire center building the zero mileage band is used for the transport between the EI Service and the access tandem Mileage measurement for TST from the access tandem to subtending end offices not located in the same wire center building as the access tandem is calculated using the V amp H coordinate method If the subtending end office is in the same wire center building a zero mileage band applies e Mileage measurement for DTT is calculated using the V amp H coordinate method between the EI Service wire center building and the access tandem when the EI Service and access tandem are in different wire center buildings e Mileage measurement for DTT between the EI Service and the end office when the DTT connects to EI Service in the same wire center building as the end office is a zero mileage band When the end office is not located in the same wire center building mileage measurement is calculated using the V amp H coordinate method M Material moved from Page 135 T M T T M N N D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 135 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS Cont d M D 6 7 12 SHARED USE Shared use occurs when Switched Access Service and Private Line Transport Servi
345. ndem Sectors defined for a particular Tandem The end offices associated with the Tandem Sectors can be found in the Qwest Corporation Tandem Sectorization Guide The Company shall not be required to route traffic from a Tandem Sector to more than one POT unless the customer has the optional feature Service Class Routing as described in 6 3 1 following in addition to MPTS Tandem routed traffic with Service Class Routing can be delivered by traffic type to a minimum number of one POT and a maximum number of POTs that is less than or equal to the number of Tandem Sectors defined for a particular tandem A maximum number of four 4 trunk groups with mixed traffic types in accordance with the Service Class Routing specifications is allowed for each designated Tandem Sector Each traffic type e g 8XX 900 MTS within a Tandem Sector can be designated to the same POT or different POTs A customer with multiple POTs must direct all originating calls from a Tandem Sector to a single POT by traffic type MPTS in conjunction with Service Class Routing A customer may designate one to four POTs per traffic type For example when MPTS is ordered for a specific tandem it is possible to route all of a particular traffic type e g 8XX or Operator to only one POT subtending that tandem as long as other traffic type s comply to the stated MPTS guidelines of directing traffic to multiple POTs within a tandem serving area as referred to in 6 3 1 foll
346. nection Channel Terminations 1 544 Mbps Channel Interfaces 711315 T Technical Specifications for Network Channel Interface Codes Describing Electrical Interfaces at Customer Premises and at Qwest Corporation Central Offices Qwest Corporation DS3 Service 77324 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 31 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 10 REFERENCE TO OTHER PUBLICATIONS A The following publications are available for inspection in the Public Reference room of the Tariff Division at the main building of the Federal Communications Commission located at 1919 M Street N W Washington D C and may be obtained from the Federal Communications Commission s commercial contractor TITLE CC Docket No 83 1145 Phase I Memorandum Opinion and Order Including Appendices A B and C Adopted May 31 1985 Released June 12 1985 Part 64 401 Appendix A of the Federal Communications Commission s Rules and Regulations as set forth in Gen Docket No 87 505 Report and Order Adopted October 27 1988 Released November 17 1988 National Exchange Carrier Association Inc Tariff F C C No 4 CenturyLink Operating Companies T Tariff F C C No 11 T B The following publication may be obtained by contacting the Company Account Representative TITLE Qwest Corporation Service Interval Guide Qwest Corporation Tandem Sectoriz
347. ng office Disconnect supervisory signaling is sent from the originating or terminating office When FGD uses SS7 Out of Band Signaling no signaling will be done via the message channel When FGD Service is directly routed to an end office the Switched Transport configuration is composed of an Entrance Facility and a DTT facility to an end office When FGD is switched through an access tandem the Switched Transport configuration is composed of an Entrance Facility a DTT facility between the SWC and the access tandem and TST from the access tandem to the end offices subtending the access tandem Multiplexing options are described in 6 1 2 preceding FGD switching is provided with MF address signaling or SS7 outband signaling Up to 12 digits of the called party number dialed by the customer s end user using dual tone MF or dial pulse address signals will be provided by Company equipment to the customer s premises where the Switched Access Service terminates Such address signals will be subject to the ordinary transmission capabilities of the Switched Transport provided With SS7 Out of Band Signaling up to 12 digits of the called party number dialed by the customer s end user using dual tone multifrequency or dial pulse address signals is provided by the Company equipment to the customer s designated premises via CCSAC links SS7 Out of Band Signaling requires the customer to order the SS7 Out of Band Signaling optional feature as set for
348. ng Activities ec eeeeceesseecsseceenteeeeneeees Obligations of the Customer oasis 2205 ewssesg sacle vie adce tens cuontecadesenseaatavanserivent 2 Operator Trunk Coin Non Coin or Combined Coin and Non Coin Operator Trunk Full Feature vs cc sac scessscss aves cangeesseccy eve caseonseasensnuina sedeunededsase Ordering Conditions 4 vsscacssiccesaisaferecadenscevaspsvaataaveratedendeeeentvceaavetebenedeasaseawete D Ordering Options for Switched Access ServicCe cccceesccecsseeeesteeeesteeeenes Ordering Rating and Billing of Access Services Where More Than One Exchange Telephone Company is Involved eeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee Ordering Rating and Billing of Switched Access Service Provided In Conjunction with a Commercial Mobile Radio Service Provider Oth r LANGE ort sec acs Sst cartes e e e dhe ened ea eee E a AE EES Overtime Installation cso5 seectsteeiecatspczsce ie tcaedhswesaladetchensersate te eeehawentas Ownership of Facilities and Theft eeeeecseccecssececssececeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeees NW Wh N Nn MON WN OW NWO N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 1 14 2004 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX Cont d SUBJECT Partial Cancellation Charges ssccsscuesicssecetectotiettucsuaaieeitepautacautncsvads Payment Arrangements and Audit Provision eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee Payment Arrangements and Credit Allowances eceeeeeeeeeeeee Payment o
349. ng data only or a single DSO A channel i e 64 kbps of a 24 channel DS1 facility The customer may utilize an existing DS1 DLT facility previously ordered from this section for additional CCS Links or order a new DS1 DLT or a DSO DLT facility T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 6 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 2 SERVICE DESCRIPTION 20 2 1 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ACCESS CAPABILITY CCSAC C Direct Link Transport DLT Cont d Company hubbing arrangements can be utilized for CCSAC If the customer has an existing DS3 facility between the SWC of the customer s premises and a Company Hub ordered and provisioned as set forth in Section 6 preceding or Section 7 of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 the customer may utilize a portion i e DS1 of the existing DS3 facility for the CCS Link s under the provisions of the Shared Use regulations as set forth in 2 7 preceding In addition the customer must order the DS1 or DSO DLT from the Company Hub to the Company STP or FSPOL When the customer orders a DS1 DLT facility from the SWC of the customer s SPOI or a Company Hub to a Company STP or FSPOI the customer must also order a DS1 to DSO Multiplexer at the Company STP or FSPOI for termination into the STP Port When the customer orders a DSO DLT channel the customer must also order a DS1 to DS
350. ng intrastate access minutes less the reported resold terminating MTS and or MTS type service minutes of use as set forth in A 2 preceding but not less than zero T T T T T D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 10 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE 3 6 RESOLD MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S 3 6 4 RATE REGULATIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S Cont d D E When The Adjustment Will Be Applied To Customer Bills T M The adjustment as set forth in D preceding will be made to the involved customer T account no later than either the next bill date or the one subsequent to that depending on when the usage report is obtained F Conversion Of Billed Usage To Minutes T When the MTS and or MTS type usage is shown in hours the number of hours shall be multiplied by 60 to develop the associated MTS and or MTS type minutes of use If the MTS and or MTS type usage is shown in a unit that does not show hours or minutes the customer shall provide a factor to convert the shown units to minutes G Percent Interstate Use PIU T The adjustment as set forth in D preceding will be made to the involved customer T account after making the adjustments to the customer account as set forth in 3 8 4 following PIU M M Material moved from Page 11 3 8 3 8 1 3 8 3
351. ng the period that a service is interrupted the customer must pay the tariffed rates and charges for the alternative service used Temporary Surrender of a Service In certain instances the customer may be requested by the Company to surrender a service for purposes other than maintenance testing or activity relating to a service order If the customer consents a credit allowance will be granted The credit allowance will be 1 1440 of the monthly rate for each period of 30 minutes or fraction thereof that the service is surrendered In no case will the credit allowance exceed the monthly rate for the service surrendered in any one monthly billing period Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 44 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 4 PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES Cont d 2 4 5 RE ESTABLISHMENT OF SERVICE FOLLOWING FIRE FLOOD OR OTHER OCCURRENCE A Nonrecurring Charges Do Not Apply Charges do not apply for re establishment of service following a fire flood or other occurrences attributed to an Act of God provided that 1 The service is of the same type as was provided prior to the fire flood or other occurrence 2 The service is for the same customer 3 The service is at the location on the same premises 4 The re establishment of service begins within 60 days after Company service is available The 60 day period may be extende
352. nk is assessed the each additional installation charge per appropriate Interface Group category per Access Order If two or more optional features and changes are ordered on the same Access Order the optional feature or change requiring the lowest level of work activity will apply A maximum one half nonrecurring charge will apply per Access Order for service rearrangements If a feature is not required on each line or trunk but rather for an entire hunt or trunk group an end office or an access tandem switch only one such charge will apply i e it will not apply per line or trunk This one half nonrecurring charge is assessed the first installation charge for the first hunt group trunk group end office or access tandem switch and each additional hunt group trunk group end office or access tandem switch is assessed the each additional installation charge per appropriate Interface Group category per Access Order Nonrecurring charges for service rearrangements are specified in 6 8 following M Material moved to Page 101 T T T T M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 101 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C 3 Cont d e For optional features additions and changes associated with WATS Access Service the one half nonrecurring charge
353. ns are treated as disconnects and starts Changes in the physical location of the POT are treated as moves and are described and charged for as set forth in 6 7 6 following The charge to the customer for the service rearrangement is dependent on whether the change is administrative only in nature or involves an actual technical and or physical change to the service Administrative changes will be made without charge s to the customer Administrative changes are as follows e Change of customer name i e the customer of record does not change but rather the customer of record changes its name e g XYZ Company to XYZ Communications e Change of customer name as the result of a transfer of use of services as set forth in 2 1 2 preceding e Change of customer or customer s end users premises address when the change of address is not a result of a physical relocation of equipment e Change in billing data name address or contact name or telephone number e Change of agency authorization e Change of customer circuit identification e Change of billing account number T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 99 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C 3 Cont d e Change of customer test line number e Change of customer or customer s end users
354. ns mentioned following Testing Services for Switched Access are comprised of a tests which are performed during the installation of a Switched Access Service and b tests which are performed after acceptance of such access services by a customer i e in service tests These in service tests may be further divided into two broad categories of tests scheduled and nonscheduled Scheduled tests are those tests performed by the Company on a regular basis e g monthly which result in the measurement of Switched Access Service Scheduled tests may be done on an automatic basis no Company or customer technicians involved on a cooperative basis Company technician s involved at Company office s and customer technician s involved at customer s premises or a manual basis Company technician s involved at Company office s and at customer s premises Nonscheduled tests are performed by the Company on demand which result in the measurement of Switched Access Services Nonscheduled tests may involve Company technicians at Company offices and at the customer s premises 13 3 13 3 5 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 9 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES TESTING SERVICES Cont d Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing
355. nsitional rates is as set forth in 1 and 2 preceding T T 6 7 6 7 1 E Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 112 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Cont d 800 Data Base Access Service Rates and Charges An 800 Carrier Identification Charge is assessed per call to the service provider the call is delivered to in accordance with SMS 800 information residing in the Company s SCP A POTS Translation Charge is assessed per call in addition to the 800 Carrier Identification Charge when the POTS number is delivered to the service provider instead of the 8XX number in accordance with SMS 800 information residing in the Company s SCP The POTS Translation feature is described in 6 2 8 preceding A Call Handling and Destination Feature Charge is assessed to the service provider the call is intended for on a per query basis for each 8XX query to the Company s SCP that utilizes a Call Handling and Destination feature as described in 6 2 8 preceding The query rate is assessed for all completed queries whether or not the actual 8XX call is delivered to the service provider A query is considered to be completed when the routing information is delivered back to the SSP The rates and charges are in addition to the rates and charges for the rate categories described in 6 1 2 p
356. nt d EXAMPLE 3 Switched Access Service Ordered with DS3 EF for DTT and TST DS1 DTT EU TS LS AT Access Tandem CL Common Line CP Customer s Premises DTT Direct Trunked Transport EF Entrance Facility EO End Office EU End User LS Local Switching MUX EF Multiplexer SWC Serving Wire Center TS Tandem Switching TT Tandem Transmission C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 9 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES Cont d EXAMPLE 4 Switched Access Service Ordered with DS3 EF and DS3 DTT Facility to an End Office DS3 DTT LS CL Common Line CP Customer s Premises DTT Direct Trunked Transport EF Entrance Facility EO End Office EU End Users LS Local Switching MUX DTT Multiplexer SWC Serving Wire Center C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 10 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES Cont d EXAMPLE 5 Switched Access Service Ordered to a Company Hub CP DS1 DTT DS3 DTT TS AT Access Tandem CL Common Line CP Customer s Premises DTT Direct Trunked Transport LS EU EF Entrance Facility EO End Office EU End User HUB HUB Location LS Loc
357. ntage of terminating traffic without sufficient call detail to determine jurisdiction exceeds the 7 floor the Company will assess rates from the state jurisdiction on all minutes exceeding the 7 floor B Jurisdictional Requirements The customer must indicate a projected Percent of Interstate Use PIU factor in a whole number i e a number 0 100 when ordering Switched Access Service in a LATA including EF and DTT Facilities When a customer provided PIU factor is required and the customer has previously submitted a Jurisdictional Report i e Letter on File LOF as set forth in C following the LOF PIU factor is required on each Access Service Request ASR For CCSAC customers who are third party signaling providers must develop their jurisdictional factors based upon the weighted average of the jurisdictional factors of their customers M Material moved from Page 17 M1 Material moved to Page 18 1 M M N N M1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 18 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 10 31 2008 Effective 7 14 2009 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B Jurisdictional Requirements Cont d 1 Feature Group A FGA or Feature Group B FGB Service a FGA to be Resold Upon ordering FGA Service to be resold the customer shall state in its initial order a projected PIU factor as set forth in B
358. ntrance Facility rate is assessed for each Lineside service provided unless the customer requests a DS1 or DS3 Entrance Facility The Entrance Facility rate is assessed even when the customer s premises and the SWC are located in the same building The Entrance Facility rate is in addition to the rates assessed for DTT and TST Rates and charges are set forth in 6 8 following Direct Trunked Transport Except as set forth in 2 and 3 following for each DTT facility provided Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 a fixed monthly rate per mile band and a monthly rate per mile is assessed The DTT rates are in addition to the Entrance Facility rate Mileage measurement is described in 6 7 11 following Rates and charges are set forth in 6 8 following When FGA Switched Access service is provided the Voice Grade DTT rates are assessed for each Lineside service unless the customer requests a DSI or DS3 facility DTT rates are assessed between the SWC of the customer s premises and the dial tone office When traffic is terminated in an end office which is not the dial tone office Tandem Transmission rates as set forth in L following are assessed between the dial tone office and the end office where the traffic terminates The Tandem Transmission rates are in addition to the DTT rates Tandem Switching rates will not be assessed When the customer orders DTT to a remote switching system or module RSS or RSM DTT rates are assessed between the SWC
359. number i e a number from 0 100 The PIU factor will be used by the Company to determine interstate and intrastate rates and charges If the customer does not provide the Company a Switched Access PIU factor for an EF or DTT facility the Company will apply a default PIU factor of fifty percent 50 The PIU factor will be used by the Company until a revised PIU factor is reported as set forth in C following A Switched Access LATA level PIU factor shall be provided for all VG EF and for all DTT facilities provided within a LATA for FGA for the revised reports These PIU factors will account for both the originating and terminating traffic of all services using these facilities within the LATA VG EF and DTT Facilities for FGA Not to be Resold Customers initially ordering a VG EF and a DTT facility for FGA not to be resold shall state a projected PIU factor of zero percent 0 for each facility This PIU factor is in addition to the PIU factor as set forth in 1 c preceding Tandem Switched Transport For Tandem Switched Transport rates and charges will be apportioned by the Company between interstate and intrastate based upon the PIU factor for the serving arrangement Feature Group as set forth in 1 and 2 preceding T T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 25 State of South Dakota Release 5 Issued March 11 2005 Effective May 17 2005 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS
360. o Cut Trou gh ieee a eea a EEEE A eR E ATEOS A EEE ES REES i RP NAAAN N NNANNDNAANNY NNNWNAD Data eS wets asad capiad eis an Gasca hae didaae Wasead wane dana cosiad ae a aaa aiani WG TG ONS crests tes cet trcee sed tata Ait cre calc Htc eens te Ai mh ca ce eae Delay Dial Start Pulsing Signaling 0 eee ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeens Description and Application of Rates and Charges 0 eeeeeeseesseceeeeeees Design and Traffic Routing of Switched Access Service 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeee Design Blocking Probability ceecceescecesececeeececseeeeceeeeecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees Design Change Char te icsissscsiistecccasatedsaeduauncatedsedesusatvonuaeeseagnedaasesasadseteneveane Design Layout Report icc s4ensesasetsaatacdutetanosesdanqeastatastusaassatsorgeanaesaaiasastansans Design of Customer Services ix seissasesesenvsesdeceanscsasta tecsdeasasecesntecdaatasesbac tears Determination of Interstate Charges for Mixed Interstate and Intrastate Access SerViCe ciiise seas eE a AKEE ES e SE iik Determination of Jurisdiction for Mixed Interstate and Intrastate Access Service Billing isise inssi nakni oia ihs Determination of Number of End Office Transpott ss ssessseseseeeeseeesseee Determination of Number of Transmission Paths ceesceesseeeeeneeeees Dial Pulse Address SiS Malims csc cstecycoaccass ghedtanelyeaseeyvoadegonsvecasteghorseeoundtensees DUVETS IY sive soiedane n a ss tecedaraiupeddavecoden
361. of access service for the origination of calls from an end user premises to a customer s premises Tariff SECTION 2 Page 79 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued March 11 2005 Effective May 17 2005 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Pay Telephone The term Pay Telephone denotes an instrument provided by a Payphone Service Provider that is available to the general public for public convenience and necessity Pay telephones utilize Basic and Smart Public Access Line Service provided under the Exchange and Network Services Tariff Payphone Service Provider PSP The term Payphone Service Provider denotes an entity that controls and incurs the costs of placement and maintenance of pay telephones Percent Interstate Use PIU The term Percent Interstate Use PIU refers to traffic that originates in one state and terminates in a different state Periodic Inspection The term Periodic Inspection which applies only to Expanded Interconnection Collocation Service as set forth in Section 21 following denotes inspections conducted at irregular intervals of all or portions of the interconnector s transmission equipment and leased physical space to determine that occupancies are authorized and are installed and maintained in conformance with the requirements in Section 21 following Permanent Virtual Circuit PVC The term Permanent Virtual Circuit
362. omer the Company will begin the auditing procedures as set forth in g following T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 30 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 5 14 2001 Effective 7 1 2001 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS D 1 Cont d g When jurisdictional reports are not provided by the customer or a billing dispute arises the Company may request an audit The audit procedures and responsible party ies for payment of audit expenses will be determined as follows e If the Company and the customer mutually agree upon an independent Certified Public Accountant CPA auditing firm and the party ies agree to equally share in the payment of audit expenses both the Company and the customer will be bound by such agreement or e The customer may select an independent CPA auditing firm and pay all audit expenses e If the audit is not conducted as set forth preceding the Company may select an independent CPA auditing firm and pay all expenses h The Company will adjust the customer s PIU based upon the audit results The PIU resulting from the audit shall be applied to the usage for the quarter the audit is completed the usage for the quarter prior to completion of the audit and the usage for the two 2 quarters following the completion of the audit After that time the customer may report a revised PIU pursuant to C preceding The
363. omer must be prepared to handle normally dialed FGD calls as well as calls dialed with the FGB access code which requires the customer to receive additional address signaling from the end user The customer must be prepared to handle both the FGB and FGD signaling on the same trunks Such calls will be rated as FGD Should the customer desire to maintain the routing of their FGB access code to their FGD access service past 90 days after the installation of FGD access service the optional feature of 950 on FGD as set forth in 6 3 1 must be ordered T T T T 6 2 6 2 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 51 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE FEATURE GROUP D FGD A Description Cont d 11 The Company will provide 1 interLATA sent paid access from equal access end offices to the customer s premises for calls dialed as 1 and or 101XXXX 1 from pay telephones utilizing PAL Service Smart and Basic in the following manner a Smart PAL For traffic originating from a Smart PAL the customer to whom such calls are routed shall order FGD trunks from equal access end offices to the customer s premises via direct trunks or via Operator Access Tandems with the Operator Trunk Full Feature type of transport termination as set forth in 6 3 2 following The trunks must be dedi
364. on Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 32 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B 5 Cont d b Cooperative Testing MONTHLY TESTING PERIODS USOC RATE e Basic Time per technician First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USSX 39 15 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USS1 22 15 e Overtime per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USSO 43 68 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USS2 26 68 e Premium Time per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USSP 48 21 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USS3 31 21 1 A call out of a Company employee at a time not consecutive with the employee s scheduled work period is subject to a minimum charge of four 4 hours Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 33 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B 5 Cont d c Manual Testing MONTHLY TESTING PERIODS USOC RATE e Basic Time per technician First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USMX 39 15 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USM1 22 15 e Overtime per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction
365. on paths required to achieve this level of blocking The design blocking criteria for 800 DB Access Service and 900 Access Service will be equivalent to the design blocking criteria of the basic serving arrangement that they are provisioned as except under media stimulation when protective controls may be utilized to ensure the provisioning of acceptable service levels to all telecommunication users of the Company s network services The Company will perform routine measurement functions for trunks ordered in accordance with Company design blocking criteria to assure that an adequate number of trunks are in service The Company will recommend that additional trunks be ordered by the customer when additional trunks are required to reduce the measured blocking to the designed blocking level Where design blocking criteria apply the design blocking objective is assumed to have been met if the routine measurements show that the measured blocking does not exceed the threshold listed in the following tables T T T T C C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 92 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 5 OBLIGATIONS OF THE COMPANY 6 5 9 DESIGN BLOCKING PROBABILITY E Cont d 1 For transmission paths carrying only first routed traffic direct between an end office and a customer s premises without an alternate route and for path
366. onal Features Cont d NONRECURRING MONTHLY USOC CHARGE RATE 22 Clear Channel Capability available with FGD per trunk group NR4CA 25 00 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 9 14 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING Cont d C Transport Termination Optional Features 1 Line Side Terminations available with FGA Two Way Operation Dial Pulse with Loop Start Dial Pulse with Ground Start DTMF with Loop Start DTMF with Ground Start Terminating Operation Dial Pulse with Loop Start Dial Pulse with Ground Start DTMF with Loop Start DTMF with Ground Start Originating Operation Loop Start Ground Start 2 Trunkside Terminations Standard Trunk or Originating available with Trunkside Access Terminating available with Trunkside Access Two Way available with Trunkside Access Operator Trunk Coin Non Coin or Combined Coin and Non Coin available with FGC and FGD Operator Trunk Full Feature Arrangement available with FGD SECTION 6 Page 156 Release 1 Effective 9 15 2000 FID NC A NC E NC F NC G NC 4 N NC P NC R NC S NC U NC V TTC SO TTC ST TTC TY TTC CO TTC FF Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 157 State of South Dakota Release 5 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8
367. ordering customer shall provide the necessary on hook and off hook supervision T T 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 3 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE DETERMINATION OF USAGE SUBJECT TO CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS RATES Except as set forth herein all Switched Access Service provided to the customer will be subject to Carrier Common Line Access rates DETERMINATION OF JURISDICTION When the customer reports interstate and intrastate use of Switched Access Service the associated Carrier Common Line Access used by the customer for interstate will be determined as set forth in 3 8 4 following Percent Interstate Use PIU LOCAL EXCHANGE ACCESS AND ENHANCED SERVICE EXEMPTION When access to the local exchange is required to provide a customer service e g MTS type WATS type telex Data etc that uses a resold private line service Switched Access Service Regulations Rates and Charges as set forth in Section 6 following apply except when such access to the Local Exchange is required for the provision of an enhanced service Carrier Common Line Access rates as set forth in 3 9 following apply in accordance with the rate regulations as set forth in 3 8 following T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 4 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000
368. originating non coin calls requiring operator assistance to the customer s premises Because operator assisted non coin calling traffic is routed over a trunk group dedicated to operator assisted calls this arrangement is only provided in association with the Service Class Routing option The operator assistance non coin calling arrangement is also normally ordered by the customer in conjunction with the ANI optional feature since the preponderance of trunk groups equipped with this arrangement will be terminated in the customer s operator service positions rather than in the customer s manual cord boards When so equipped the ANI feature provides for the forwarding of information digits which identify that the call has originated from a hotel or motel and whether room number identification is required or that special screening is required e g for coinless pay telephones dormitory or inmate stations or other screening arrangements agreed to between the customer and the Company T T T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 77 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 3 COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 3 2 TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES A Operator Trunk Coin Non Coin or Combined Coin and Non Coin Cont d 3 Combined Coin and Non Coin a This arrangement provides
369. orporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 84 Release 2 Effective 11 30 2000 State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS C Transmission Type B1 Performance Cont d 3 C Message Noise The maximum C Message Noise for the transmission path at the IAL miles listed is less than or equal to the following IAL MILEAGE LIMITS C MESSAGE NOISE C MESSAGE NOISE POT to EO Direct POT to EO via POT to Access Tandem Access Tandem or Access Tandem to EO Less than 50 34 dBrncO 35 dBrncO 51 to 100 36 dBrncO 37 dBrncO 101 to 200 38 dBrncO 39 dBrncO 201 to 400 41 dBrncO 42 dBrncO 401 to 1000 43 dBrncO 44 dBrncO 4 C Notched Noise The maximum C Notched Noise measured with 16 dBm0 holding tone applied is less than or equal to the following C NOTCHED NOISE e POT to End Office Direct 47 dBrncO e POT to Access Tandem 47 dBrncO e Access Tandem to End Office 47 dBrncO e POT to End Office via AT 49 dBrncO M Material moved to Page 86 N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff State of South Dakota Issued 10 16 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION PARAMETER LIMITS C Transmission Type B1 Performance Cont d 5 Echo Control Echo Control is specified in dB and is expressed as Echo Return Loss ERL and Singing Return Loss SRL for CST1 CST2
370. ory D1 SM AING ireanii E e e I AS as 95 Switched Access Service Arrangements and Manner of Provision 2 Switched Transport Rate Categories annene n a aE a e an casasna aces 12 Rates and Charg s acdeiwiick syudvcndaceiduestansac eden pace a a A give caeeses 137 SWITCHNET 56 Service Switching Capability soseesssessesssesesesessseessees 70 Tandem Switched Transport ssseseseeessseesseesseesseesseeesseesserssereseeesseeessrese 118 Transmission Specifications sesesseeeesseeesseesseesseresseeesseessrrsseeeseeessseessrese 78 Transport Termination Optional Features 2 00 0 eee eeseceeeeereeeneeenseeeseeeees 76 Trunk Access Limitation scissile sot ccessl cates fet iatehar lad tian les aschcsdatepeatonians 70 Trunk Group Measurement Reports Obligations of he Company asocccssceusaasecsoutejercaeraad ageacsautas teuctesdesenateatacs 89 Report REQUITEMICIS i 5cescassesacaisd seacsanvavadselessades annsadea sd dvaseadounacdesnacenenste 95 Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeceereeeseeeeeeteeeeeteeeees 63 Up to 7 Digit Outpulsing to Customer 00 0 0 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeees 67 Usage RR ALES enaere tie a anea E EA EEE E EEA TEAS AEAEE ES EER S 96 WATS Access Service WATS ionun nA N a A RANS 71 6 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL Switche
371. ot as complete as those provided by the synchronous test lines but can be made more rapidly M Material moved to Page 76 M N N T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 78 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d North American Numbering Plan NANP The term North American Numbering Plan denotes a three digit area Numbering Plan Area code and a seven digit telephone number made up of a three digit Central Office code plus a four digit station number Octet The term Octet denotes a continuous sequence of eight binary bits of information Off hook The term Off hook denotes the active condition of Switched Access or a Telephone Exchange Service line Office Replacement The term Office Replacement denotes a situation where the hardware and software in a Company switching office is replaced with different hardware and software for the establishment and maintenance of a given switching office On hook The term On hook denotes the idle condition of Switched Access or a Telephone Exchange Service line Open Circuit Test Line The term Open Circuit Test Line denotes an arrangement in an end office which provides an ac open circuit termination of a trunk or line by means of an inductor of several Henries Originating Direction The term Originating Direction denotes the use
372. ota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 8 INFORMATION AND BILLING SERVICES SUBJECT PAGE Audit PHOVISIONS hassuine aae is 2 Billing Name And Address Service icsiccctes2irectenesesiedccatsiasetinciaeataiescuiedes 2 D finiti ghs it sus met ee cts aad Daa i orori eE oaie otiia iat 3 ree Rall nec oneee A Masa E a E E A E 1 Liability OF The Company C reserse trti narei 2 Rate Application And Provisioning Parameters ceseeeeeeeseeereeeeeeeees 4 Rates And Charges nininini isidi eire e rave E EAEE 5 R cordina SEryiC Esiste ege e ae ta eretia 1 8 1 8 1 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 8 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 8 INFORMATION AND BILLING SERVICES RECORDING SERVICE Qwest Corporation hereafter referred to as the Company will at the option of a customer provide Recording Service Name and address information on recorded media is available upon request as a Selective Processing item GENERAL The Company will provide Recording Service for messages that can be recorded on automatic message accounting AMA equipment or for messages on manual tickets The Company will provide Recording Service in appropriately equipped offices in a state operating territory for which the customer has ordered Feature Group C or D Switched Access Service A state is the minimum territory for which recording will be provided For Feature Group C and D
373. outh Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B 2 Cont d b Additional Tests MONTHLY TO FIRST POINT OF SWITCHING USOC RATE e Gain Slope Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBGX 0 02 e C Notched Noise Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBGX 0 02 c Example A customer schedules thirteen 13 1004 Hz Loss Tests thirteen 13 C Message Noise Tests and two 2 Return Loss Tests on one trunk for a year The charges will be computed as follows 13 x 0 02 0 26 13 x 0 02 0 26 2 x 0 04 0 08 0 60 per month per trunk Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 27 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B Testing Services Cont d 3 Cooperative Scheduled Testing The three 3 tests as set forth in a following represent the minimum offering i e an order for testing must at a minimum consist of four 4 1004 Hz Loss Tests per transmission path four 4 C Message Noise Tests per transmission path and one 1 Return Loss Balance Test per transmission path per year The Add
374. ove are dependent on whether the move is to a new location within the same building or to a different building within the same serving wire center or to a different serving wire center The charges for the move are applicable to Switched Access facilities lines trunks optional features as they exist at the current location Any changes to the existing services made in conjunction with the move will be treated as a discontinuance and a start of service and all associated nonrecurring charges and new minimum period requirements will apply The addition of lines and trunks made in conjunction with the move will be treated as a new installation of service and appropriate nonrecurring installation charges and new minimum period requirements will apply Additional lines or trunks are assessed the each additional installation charge per appropriate Interface Group category per Access Order M Material moved from Page 121 M1 Material moved to Page 123 N N T M M M1 6 7 6 7 6 A 1 B Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 123 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS MOVES Cont d Moves Within the Same Serving Wire Center Within the Same Building The charge for moves to a new location within the same building will be an amount equal to one half of the nonrecurring line or trunk move charge and one hal
375. owing MPTS in conjunction with Alternate Traffic Routing If a customer wants a direct trunk group from an end office to alternate route to a tandem routed trunk group subtending the same end office the customer can designate the direct routed traffic sent to any POT but the tandem routed trunk group must be routed to the customer designated POT that is specified for the Tandem Sector as referred to in 6 3 1 following T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 27 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GENERAL RATE CATEGORIES 4 Cont d e Multiplexing for EF and DTT Facilities Multiplexing provides the capability of converting the capacity or bandwidth of a facility from a higher level to a lower level or from a lower level to a higher level Multiplexing functions for an EF are available ata SWC For DTT facilities multiplexing is available at a Company Hub end office or access tandem Multiplexing arrangements are associated with the facility with the higher capacity or bandwidth e g a DS1 to Voice Grade multiplexing arrangement is associated with the facility using a DS1 connection EF and DTT multiplexing arrangements are described following DS1 to Voice Grade DS1 to Voice Grade multiplexing is an arrangement that provides a Company multiplexer which converts a DS1 channel to twenty four Voice Grade channels utilizing time divi
376. p request that is switched at the Company STP A TCAP Signal Switching charge is assessed for each data request that is switched by the Company STP and destined for a foreign network or database M Material moved to Page 8 T N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 8 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 3 RATE CATEGORIES Cont d 20 3 2 LIDB RATE CATEGORIES AND APPLICATIONS LIDB Service is a per query Switched Access Service and is not subject to rate categories as set forth in 6 1 2 preceding LIDB is billed on a per Access Query basis and a per Validation Query basis The Access Query represents the transport from the STP to the SCP and back The Validation Query represents the actual verification of LIDB information The query rates are applicable to all completed queries regardless of the results of the validation The nonrecurring rate category for LIDB Service is on a per OPC basis Any change in a LIDB OPC will be treated as a discontinuance of the existing OPC and an installation of a new OPC as set forth in 5 2 5 preceding 20 4 REPORT REQUIREMENTS 20 4 1 CCSAC NETWORK MANAGEMENT The customer shall provide semi annually a CCSAC Network Management Report The CCSAC Network Management Report requirements are described in Technical Reference 77342 The Company will use the report information in its ow
377. pany s STP and other entities in association with message telecommunications service Call Set Up may be associated with calls that utilize the Company s switched access network or may be associated with calls that do not utilize the Company s switched access network If the message trunks are provided by the Company the customer must order the associated FGD trunks with SS7 Out of Band Signaling option as set forth in Section 6 preceding Call Set Up associated with calls that do not utilize the Company s Switched Access network is referred to as transient call set up and the customer must have message trunks with SS7 capabilities CCSAC Service as set forth in this section is required to provide both capabilities FOREIGN DATABASE QUERIES This service provides the customer the ability to query foreign databases databases not maintained by the Company by sending signaling information via TCAP messages between the Company s STP the customer s designated premises and foreign databases those not owned by the Company CCSAC Service as set forth in this section is required to provide this capability T N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 18 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 7 SERVICE APPLICATIONS Cont d T 20 7 3 LINE INFORMATION DATA BASE SERVICE LIDB T D LIDB is charged on a per query
378. pecial handling purposes T T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 59 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Balance 100 Type Test Line The term Balance 100 Type Test Line denotes an arrangement in the end office which provides for balance and noise testing Bit The term Bit denotes the smallest unit of information in the binary system of notation Business Day BD The term Business Day denotes the times of day that a company is open for business Generally in the business community these are 8 00 or 9 00 A M to 5 00 or 6 00 P M respectively with an hour for lunch Monday through Friday resulting in a standard forty hour work week However Business Day hours for the Company may vary based on company policy union contract and location Busy Hour Minutes of Capacity BHMC The term Busy Hour Minutes of Capacity denotes the customer specified maximum amount of Switched Access Service access minutes the customer expects to be handled in an end office switch during any hour in an 8 00 A M to 11 00 P M period for the Switched Access Service ordered T T T C 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 60 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Calendar
379. pplies when a customer orders MPTS Service without associated trunk activity on the same order The MPTS establishment charge with associated trunk activity applies when a customer orders MPTS Service with associated trunk activity on the same order The MPTS rearrangement charge without associated trunk activity applies when a customer orders rearrangements to established MPTS service without associated trunk activity on the same order The MPTS rearrangement charge with associated trunk activity applies when a customer orders rearrangements to established MPTS service with associated trunk activity on the same order These charges are set forth on 6 8 following D 6 7 6 7 1 I Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 115 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Cont d Clear Channel Capability When Clear Channel Capability CCC is ordered and installed coincident with initial installation of FGD service a CCC nonrecurring charge applies per trunk group in addition to the initial installation charge s for FGD Service Rates and charges for CCC are as set forth in 6 8 1 following When CCC is ordered on existing trunkside service the service may be rearranged when the following conditions are met The customer changes from FGD service with multifrequency signaling to FG
380. quarterly basis an MST report that lists the test results for each trunk tested Trunk test failures requiring customer participation for trouble resolution will be provided to the customer on an as occurs basis 13 3 13 3 5 E 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 11 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES TESTING SERVICES Cont d Nonscheduled Testing Nonscheduled Testing NST of Switched Access Services is where The customer provides remote office test lines and 105 test lines with associated responders or their functional equivalent automatic testing or The Company provides a technician at its office s and the customer provides a technician at its premises with suitable test equipment to perform the required tests cooperative testing or The Company provides a technician at its office s and or at the customer s premises with suitable test equipment to perform the required tests manual testing Nonscheduled Tests may consist of any tests e g loss noise slope envelope delay which the customer may require Obligations of the Customer The customer shall provide the Remote Office Test Line priming data to the Company as appropriate to support AST as set forth in B preceding or NST as set forth in E preceding The customer shall make th
381. quests associated with local EAS IntraMTA for CMRS providers only the Local Exchange Company portion of jointly provided switched access and Company originated toll for the calendar month specified in 2 3 10 C 2 a for traffic on Local Interconnect Service and Wireless Type 2 trunks Qwest will provide data based on actual records defined as either call detail records call message counts including incomplete attempts or signaling message records as agreed upon by the Company and the customer If the customer has signaling associated with calls that do not utilize the Company s switched access network or Wireless Type 2 traffic this data should also be included in the calculation of the CCSAC PIU and POM to the extent that such data is available To the extent this data is not available the customer may declare the CCSAC PIU and POM based on the data that does exist and assume that the traffic for which data does not exist exhibits the same CCSAC PIU and POM proportions as that for which data does exist N M Material moved to Page 25 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 25 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued March 11 2005 Effective May 17 2005 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B Jurisdictional Requirements 6 CCSAC Cont d The total of the PIU and POM shall not exceed 100 If the total of PIU and POM exceeds 100 then
382. quipped with equal access capabilities and to all access minutes that originate or terminate at end offices not equipped with equal access capabilities when the service is provided to customers who furnish interstate MTS WATS When originating FGD is not available in an end office and terminating FGD service to an access tandem in a LATA is available such terminating FGD service may be used at the option of the customer to terminate FGD calls to that end office Premium FGD rates apply to all access minutes associated with such calls Transitional rates i e discounted access minute rates apply to all FGA or FGB access minutes measured or assumed that originate from or terminate at end offices not equipped with equal access capabilities and to all access minutes that originate at end offices not equipped with equal access capabilities when service is converted at the SSP switch to standard Feature Group D format for the provision of 800 DB Service When FGA or FGB Switched Access Service provided to an entry switch i e dial tone office for FGA and access tandem for FGB has usage originating from and or terminating at both end offices that have been converted to equal access and end offices that have not been converted the premium and transitional rates will apply in the following manner Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 109 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWIT
383. quivalent termination will be provided for each Feature Group line or trunk requested C 6 5 6 5 9 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 91 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE OBLIGATIONS OF THE COMPANY Cont d DESIGN BLOCKING PROBABILITY The Company will design and monitor the facilities used in the provision of Switched Access Services to meet the blocking probability criteria as set forth in A through D following For Feature Group A and B no design blocking criteria apply For Feature Group C the design blocking objective will be no greater than one percent 01 between the POT at the customer s premises and the first point of switching when traffic is directly routed without an alternate route Standard traffic engineering methods will be used by the Company to determine the number of transmission paths required to achieve this level of blocking For Feature Group D the design blocking objective for the final group will be no greater than one percent 01 between the POT at the customer s premises and the end office switch whether the traffic is directly routed without an alternate route or routed via an access tandem Standard traffic engineering methods as set forth in reference document Special Report SR TAP 000191 Trunk Traffic Engineering Concepts and Applications will be used by the Company to determine the number of transmissi
384. r DS1 facility provided when the Entrance Facility is ordered from this section for CCSAC A nonrecurring charge is assessed for each DS1 Entrance Facility provided When the customer has Shared Use facilities the monthly rates are apportioned as set forth in 2 7 preceding For each DLT facility provided DSO or DS1 a fixed monthly rate per mile band and a monthly rate per mile is assessed When the customer has Shared Use facilities the monthly rates are apportioned as set forth in 2 7 preceding Mileage measurement is calculated on a airline mile basis using the V amp H coordinates method between the SWC of the customer s SPOI and the Company s STP or FSPOI When DLT facilities of different capacities are connected by a multiplexer at a Company Hub mileage is measured separately from the SWC of the customer s premises to the Company Hub where multiplexing occurs and then measured from the Company Hub to the Company STP or FSPOI An STP Port is provided for each CCS Link and each STP Port is assessed a monthly rate EF and DTT multiplexing equipment is assessed a monthly rate per arrangement provided When the customer has Shared Use facilities the monthly rates are apportioned as set forth in 2 7 preceding T C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 7 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN 20 3 RATE CATEGORIES
385. ransaction e The ANI information shall not be reused or resold without first A notifying the originating subscriber and B obtaining the affirmative consent of such subscriber for such reuse or resale and e ANI information shall not be disclosed except as permitted by the two preceding paragraphs for any purpose other than i performing the services or transactions that are the subject of the originating subscriber s call ii ensuring network performance security and the effectiveness of call delivery iii compiling using and disclosing aggregate information and iv complying with applicable law or legal process T T D N N 6 3 6 3 1 G Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 67 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE COMMON SWITCHING AND TRANSPORT TERMINATION OPTIONAL FEATURES COMMON SWITCHING OPTIONAL FEATURES Cont d Up to 7 Digit Outpulsing to Customer This option provides for the end office capability of providing up to 7 digits of the uniform access code 950 XXXX or 1 950 XXXX to the customer s premises The customer can request that only some of the digits in the access code be forwarded The access code digits would be provided to the customer s premises using multifrequency signaling and transmission of the digits would precede the forwarding of ANI if that feature were provided It is available with FG
386. ratio of two signal powers Decibel Milliwatt dBm The term Decibel Milliwatt denotes a unit for expression of power level in decibels relative to one milliwatt Decibel Reference Noise dBrn The term Decibel Reference Noise denotes a unit used to express noise power relative to one picowatt 90 dBm Decibel Reference Noise C Message Referenced to 0 dBrncO The term Decibel Reference Noise C Message Referenced to 0 denotes noise power in Decibel Reference Noise C Message Weighting referred to or measured at a zero transmission level point Decibel Reference Noise C Message Weighting dBrnc The term Decibel Reference Noise C Message Weighting denotes noise power measurements with C Message weighting in decibels relative to a reference 1000 Hz tone of 90 dB below 1 milliwatt Detail Billing The term Detail Billing denotes the listing of each message and or rate element for which charges to a customer are due on a bill prepared by the Company Direct Trunked Transport DTT The term Direct Trunked Transport denotes the transport between the SWC of the customer s premises and an end office Company Hub or access tandem or between a Hub and an end office or access tandem on circuits dedicated to the use of a single customer without switching at the tandem T T N N T T 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 65 State of South Dakota Releas
387. ration Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 41 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES CREDIT ALLOWANCE FOR SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS Cont d When A Credit Allowance Applies In case of an interruption to any service allowance for the period of interruption if not due to the negligence of the customer shall be as follows For Switched Access Service including CCSAC and LIDB other than Entrance Facilities and Direct Trunked Transport Facilities no credit shall be allowed for an interruption of less than 24 hours The customer shall be credited for an interruption of 24 hours or more at the rate of 1 30 of a any applicable monthly rates or b the assumed minutes of use charge for each period of 24 hours or major fraction thereof that the interruption continues For Switched Access Entrance Facilities Direct Trunked Transport Facilities and any optional multiplexing arrangements associated with such facilities no credit shall be allowed for an interruption of less than 30 minutes The customer shall be credited for an interruption of 30 minutes or more at the rate of 1 1440 of the monthly charges for each period of 30 minutes or major fraction thereof that the interruption continues The monthly charge shall be the total of all the monthly rate element charges associated with that portion of the service i e Entrance Facility Direct Tr
388. receding which are applicable to all Switched Access Service The 800 Data Base Access Service rates are set forth in 6 8 1 following 900 Access Service Customer Identification Charge A 900 Access Service Customer Identification Charge is assessed for each 900 call delivered to the customer This charge is in addition to the rates and charges for the rate categories described in 6 1 2 preceding which are applicable to all Switched Access Services The per call rate is set forth in 6 8 following T T 6 7 6 7 1 G Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 113 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Cont d 900 Access Service Nonrecurring Charge In addition to the rates and charges for the rate categories described in 6 1 2 preceding which are applicable to all Switched Access Services the following charges apply to 900 Access Service There are two additional charges which apply to 1 900 Service to activate the 900 NXX code s for each end office These charges are assessed on a first and subsequent NXX per access order per screening location The screening location end office or tandem is determined by where the six digit translation of the 900 NXX portion of the dialed number is performed These charges are set forth in 6 8 following There are two additional c
389. rersui onia a a E a Mon eeeudes 149 D T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Index Page 3 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE SUBJECT PAGE Measuring Access Minutes isccayccsssstecnseeostesaeenseceaccdavadeesssbacsaeeshednaneseenseens 124 Message Unit Credit Rate R sulatiohS corsa ttejeestaaatens tery aizasaatacyoede a ata E 131 Rates and Char gesinner ledenn lea lunsaicasenensasbeestedsveraleuueteniannts 157 Mileage Meas r mMent seste usioe e aen Gud REE 132 Minimum Monthly Charge cscs jecscssecsaestcn access seceaastaesncecsncntea es leseqatanuaeaecvens 119 Minimum Periods siseses ttn eee id nla a ie seiner eames ae 119 Monthly Rates viiei eteina ateina sia a e E EA aa AE E R RS 96 ALON e E E T S th at bss cnuseteal Sea tiniies 122 Moves to a Different Serving Wire Center ssssessseseesssessersseresereesseessres 123 Moves Within the Same Serving Wire Center sssnsessssessessseseseressseessre 122 Multiple POTs Tandem Sectorization Nonrecurring Charge 6 113 Network Management yicsisvsicisic c sadasessacssessedava sdeesa tanwscaeey iik 88 Nonhunting Number for Use with Hunt Group Arrangement or Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement ceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaes 64 Nonrtec rring Charges essin isons osiga ee ae o eeN 96 Obligations of the Company esssssesssessessseesseeeesseesseessessseessset
390. reseeessseessese 36 Provision and Ownership of Telephone Numbers sssseceeccesereeererreresee 11 Provisi n of Sefyices onosai esisi aa e ede gh 5 Re Establishment of Service Following Fire Flood or Other OCC TrENCE aiota a e EEAS 44 References to the Company ais cciisadessaassiendecessacueaedestiedeanseceasseedansacacbaa eee 15 Refusal and Discontinuance of Services ssssseseseseseereesessresrersersrerreeseese 7 SCOPE yoan e na e a a a at a a aa ea a aa SE 1 Shared Use Regulations scenie an ie oei nii inove 91 Title or Ownership Rights icsiiiseccsiscdsseneteaensaedesscvesaabenncdessbeneondsavanneseseveseane 45 Undertaking of the Company sesssessssssssssesssssseesseresseeesseessersseeeseesseeessrese 1 USE rise eee A th is ache a a A A a 12 T D D D 2 1 2 1 1 A B 2 1 2 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY SCOPE The Company does not undertake to transmit messages under this Tariff The Company shall be responsible only for the installation operation and maintenance of the services which it provides The Company will for maintenance purposes test its services only to the extent necessary to detect and or clear troubles Services are provided 24 hours daily seven days per week except as set forth in other applicable sections of this Tarif
391. rk Services Catalog The Interexchange Carrier transports the interLATA traffic and bills interLATA usage to the end user at the IC s applicable WATS usage rates The intrastate trunkside Switched Access Service provided in conjunction with the 800 service shall be ordered as set forth in this section T T 5 2 5 2 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 11 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES ACCESS ORDER Cont d ACCESS ORDER SERVICE DATE INTERVALS Access Service is provided with one of the following Service Date Intervals e Standard Interval e Negotiated Interval Service Date Interval tables are found in the Company Service Interval Guide Service Date Intervals will be provided to all customers within a reasonable time of request To the extent the Access Service can be made available with reasonable effort the Company will provide the Access Service in accordance with the customer s requested interval subject to the following conditions A Standard Interval 1 A schedule of Standard Intervals is included in the Company Service Interval Guide The schedule specifies the services and the quantities provided within a Standard Interval Standard Intervals will be used for Access Orders with the same requested Service Date or service type Service Dates for items and services not assigned to the Standard Interval tables will
392. rmation for each specially routed service to only the ordering customer If requested by the customer this information will be provided when service is installed and prior to any subsequent changes in routing The rates and charges for Special facilities Routing of Access Services as set forth in 11 2 following are in addition to all other rates and charges that may be applicable for services provided under other sections of this Tariff Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 11 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 11 SPECIAL FACILITIES ROUTING OF ACCESS SERVICES 11 2 RATES AND CHARGES The rates and charge for Special Facilities Routing of Access Services are as follows A Diversity For each service provided in accordance with 11 1 A preceding the rates and charges will be developed on an individual case basis and filed following USOC SYD B Avoidance For each service provided in accordance with 11 1 B preceding the rates and charges will be developed on an individual basis and filed following USOC SYA C Diversity And Avoidance Combined For each service provided in accordance with 11 1 A and 11 1 B preceding combined the rates and charges will be developed on an individual case basis and filed following USOC SYB D Cable Only Facilities For each service provided in accordance with 11 1 C preceding the rates and charges will be developed on a
393. rovider in performing originating and terminating switching functions for calls exchanged between their customers the Company customers Interexchange Carriers and Independent Telephone Company customers Modification Of Final Judgment MFJ The term Modification of Final Judgment denotes the consent decree approved by the U S District Court in United States versus Western Electric 552 F Supp 171 To D C 1982 MTS WATS Type Execunet Sprint type interstate or intrastate services which MCI Telecommunications Corporation presently markets as Execunet and Network Service and which GTE Sprint formerly Southern Pacific Communications Company markets as Sprint IV and V or any other like service which may be offered by those two carriers or any other Other Common Carrier M Material moved from Page 77 T T T M M 2 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 77 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS DEFINITIONS Cont d Multifrequency MF Address Signaling The term Multifrequency Address Signaling denotes a signaling method in which a combination of two out of six Voiceband frequencies are used to represent a digit or a control signal Multiplexing MUX The term Multiplexing denotes a method of concentrating information via signal processing techniques i e frequency division multiplexing time division
394. rtaining to the use of Switched Access Service These obligations are as follows 6 6 1 ORDERING REQUIREMENTS When ordering Switched Access Service the customer shall specify on the order for service the type and number of Entrance Facilities to terminate at the customer s SWC the desired interoffice transport direct or tandem routing the number of lines and or trunks to be provisioned at an end office or access tandem and the desired directionality 6 6 2 REPORT REQUIREMENTS Customers are responsible for providing the following reports to the Company when applicable A Jurisdictional Reports When a customer orders Switched Access Service for both interstate and intrastate use the customer is responsible for providing reports as set forth in 2 3 10 preceding Charges will be apportioned in accordance with those reports The method to be used for determining the interstate charges is set forth in 2 3 11 preceding B Code Screening Reports When a customer orders Service Class Routing or trunk access limitation arrangements it must report the number of trunks and or the appropriate codes to be instituted in each end office or access tandem switch for each of the arrangements ordered C C T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 95 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 6 6 6 2 C 6 6 3 6 6 4 6 6 5 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE OBLI
395. rvice Tariff SECTION 2 Page 16 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER Cont d CLAIMS AND DEMANDS FOR DAMAGES With respect to claims of patent infringement made by third persons the customer shall defend indemnify protect and save harmless the Company from and against all claims arising out of the combining with or use in connection with the services provided under this Tariff any circuit apparatus system or method provided by the customer The customer shall defend indemnify and save harmless the Company from and against any suits claims losses damages including punitive damages attorney fees and court costs by third persons arising out of the construction installation operation maintenance or removal of the customer s circuits facilities or equipment connected to the Company s services provided under this Tariff Included without limitation are Worker s Compensation claims actions for infringement of copyright and or unauthorized use of program material Also included without limitation are libel and slander actions based on the content of communications transmitted over the customer s circuits facilities or equipment In addition proceedings to recover taxes fines or penalties for failure of the customer to obtain or maintain in effect any necessary certificates permits licenses or other authority to acquire or operate the servi
396. rvice Tariff SECTION 6 Page 57 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 800 DATA BASE ACCESS SERVICE General Description Cont d Measurement of 800 DB Access Service usage shall be in accordance with the regulations set forth in 6 7 7 following for Trunkside Access Specifically 800 DB Access Service originating usage whether combined with non 8XX Access Service usage on trunk groups or provided using dedicated trunk groups shall be measured in the same manner as specified for non 8XX Access Service usage over Trunkside Access The Company must be notified twenty four 24 hours prior to any media stimulation The Company maintains the right to apply protective controls i e those actions such as call gapping to ensure the provisioning of acceptable service to all telecommunications users of the Company s network services Application of rates for 800 DB Access Service shall be as set forth in 6 7 1 following Vertical Features In addition to the basic carrier identification function 800 DB Access Service subscribers may request vertical features through a Responsible Organization in accordance with the SMS 800 User Guide Vertical features will be maintained within the Company s SCP when technically feasible The POTS Translation feature is described in 1 following and the Call Handling and Destination Feat
397. s The Common Switching and Transport Termination optional features which are described in 6 3 following unless specifically stated otherwise are available at all Company end office switches C T T T T 6 2 6 2 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 33 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d FEATURE GRouP A FGA A Description 1 FGA Access which is available to all customers provides a lineside termination to Company end office switches for the customer s use in originating communications from and terminating communications to an Interexchange Carrier s Intrastate Service or a customer provided intrastate communications capability The customer must specify the InterLATA Interexchange Carrier to which the FGA Service is connected or in the alternative specify the means by which the FGA access communications is transported to another LATA FGA is provided in connection with Company electronic and electromechanical end offices Feature Group A may be transported via a DS3 DS1 or Voice Grade Entrance Facility and via a DS3 DS1 or Voice Grade DTT facility When the customer orders FGA and Trunkside Access to be transported via the same DTT facility DS1 to Voice Grade multiplexing equipment is always required at the end office at the rates and charges s
398. s Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 33 5 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 06 12 2012 Effective 07 13 2012 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS F Identification and Rating of VoIP PSTN Traffic 4 PVU Factor Verification Cont d d If the dispute is unresolved the Company may initiate an audit The Company shall limit audits of the customer s PVU factor to no more than twice per year The customer may request that the audit be conducted by an independent auditor In such cases the associated auditing expenses will be paid by the customer e In the event that the customer fails to provide adequate records to enable the Company or an independent auditor to conduct an audit verifying the customer s PVU factors the Company will bill the usage and associated facilities for all contested periods using the most recent undisputed PVU factors reported by the customer If no undisputed PVU factors exist then PVU factors of zero percent will be used for all contested periods These PVU factors will remain in effect until the audit can be completed e During the audit the most recent undisputed PVU factors from the previous reporting period will be used by the Company e The Company will adjust the customer s PVU factors based on the results of the audit and implement the revised PVU in the next billing period or quarterly report date whichever is first The revised PVU f
399. s an off hook supervisory signal from the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating end user has answered The measurement of terminating call usage over FGA Access ends when the terminating FGA Access entry switch receives an on hook supervisory signal from either the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating end user has disconnected or the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch Feature Group B Usage Measurement For originating calls over FGB usage measurement begins when the originating FGB entry switch receives answer supervision forwarded from the customer s POT indicating that the customer s equipment has answered The measurement of originating call usage over FGB ends when the originating FGB entry switch receives disconnect supervision from either the originating end user s end office indicating the originating end user has disconnected or the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch For terminating calls over FGB usage measurement begins when the terminating FGB entry switch receives answer supervision from the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating end user has answered T T T T T T T 6 7 6 7 7 B Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 129 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATI
400. s and apply the rate shown for that band If the calculation results in a fraction of a mile always round up to the next whole mile before determining the mileage band and applying the rates Exceptions to the mileage measurement rules are as follows Mileage for Lineside Switched Access provided as DTT in the originating direction is calculated on an airline basis using the V amp H coordinates method between the end office switch where the Lineside switching dial tone is provided and the customer s SWC for the Switched Access Service provided Mileage for Lineside Switched Access provided by DTT in the terminating direction is calculated on an airline basis using V amp H coordinates method between the end office switch where the Lineside switching dial tone is provided and the customer s SWC when traffic is terminated in the dial tone office or an end office without measurement capability When traffic is terminated in an end office with measurement capability and is not the dial tone office Tandem Transmission rates are applicable as set forth in 6 7 1 preceding and mileage will be calculated between the dial tone office and the end office where the traffic terminates for the application of Tandem Transmission rates The Tandem Transmission rates are in addition to the DTT rates C C T T T D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 133 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2
401. s carrying only overflow traffic the measured blocking thresholds are as follows MEASURED BLOCKING THRESHOLDS NUMBER OF IN THE TIME CONSISTENT BUSY HOUR TRUNKS FOR THE NUMBER OF MEASUREMENTS PER TRUNK GROUP PER TRUNK GROUP 15 20 11 14 7 10 3 6 MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MENTS MENTS MENTS MENTS 2 070 080 090 140 3 050 060 070 090 4 050 060 070 080 5 6 040 050 060 070 7 or more 030 035 040 060 2 For transmission paths carrying first routed traffic between an end office and a customer s premises via an access tandem the measured blocking thresholds are as follows MEASURED BLOCKING THRESHOLDS NUMBER OF IN THE TIME CONSISTENT BUSY HOUR TRANSMISSION PATHS FOR THE NUMBER OF MEASUREMENTS PER TRUNK GROUP PER TRUNK GROUP 15 20 11 14 7 10 3 6 MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MEASURE MENTS MENTS MENTS MENTS 2 045 055 060 095 3 035 040 045 060 4 035 040 045 055 5 6 025 035 040 045 7 or more 020 025 030 040 C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 93 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 5 OBLIGATIONS OF THE COMPANY Cont d 6 5 10 END USER LINE AND USAGE INFORMATION DATA A General The Company will provide to customers upon request historical and projected information pertaining to the number of end user lines and average use per line Such historical and projected information shall be limi
402. s described in A and B following and is utilized exclusively for connecting the customer s CCS network and the Company s CCSN for the transmission of network control signaling data only B Entrance Facility The Entrance Facility provides the connection from the customer s SPOI to the serving wire center SWC of the customer s SPOI on a dedicated DS1 facility ordered as set forth in this section and is utilized exclusively for the transmission of network control signaling data only The customer may utilize an existing DS1 Entrance Facility previously ordered from this section for additional CCS Links or order a new DS1 Entrance Facility from this section The customer may also choose to utilize a portion i e DS1 of an existing DS3 facility under the regulations of Shared Use The DS3 facility can only be ordered from Section 6 preceding or Section 7 of CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 When the customer chooses to use a portion of an existing DS3 facility the customer must allocate at the minimum one dedicated DS1 for the provision of the signaling links Rate applications for Shared Use are set forth in 2 7 preceding C Direct Link Transport DLT The DLT provides for the transmission facilities between the SWC of the customer s SPOI and the Company s STP or FSPOI The customer has the option of ordering a DS1 DLT facility from this section utilized exclusively for the transmission of network control signali
403. s the usage information required as set forth in 3 6 2 preceding to calculate the adjustment of Carrier Common Line Access rates the customer will be billed as set forth in D following depending upon respectively whether the usage is from nonequal access offices equal access offices or a combination of the two A Apportionment And Adjustment Of Resold Minutes Of Use When the customer is provided with more than one access group in a LATA in association with the resale of MTS and or MTS type service s the resold minutes of use will be apportioned as follows T 3 6 3 6 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 7 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE RESOLD MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S RATE REGULATIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S A Apportionment And Adjustment Of Resold Minutes Of Use Cont d 1 Originating Services The Company will apportion the resold originating MTS and or MTS type service s and originating minutes of use for which the resale credit adjustment applies among the access groups Such apportionment will be based on the relationship of the originating usage for each access group to the total originating usage for all access groups in the LATA For purposes of administering this provision e Resold originating MTS and or MTS type service s minutes shall be only those attr
404. s used in providing originating access for intrastate VoIP PSTN Traffic and associated facilities will be billed according to intrastate access rates The applicable rate elements used in providing originating access for interstate VoIP PSTN Traffic and associated facilities will be billed according to interstate access rates e Effective July 1 2014 the applicable rate elements used in providing originating access for intrastate VoIP PSTN Traffic and associated facilities will be billed according to interstate access rates e After the Initial Implementation date described in 2 3 10 F 2 terminating VoIP PSTN Traffic and associated facilities will be billed according to interstate access rates M Material moved to Page 33 2 C C N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 33 2 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 1 2015 Effective 5 1 2015 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS F Identification and Rating of VoIP PSTN Traffic Cont d VoIP PSTN Traffic and associated facilities identified in accordance with this tariff section will be billed at rates equal to the Company s applicable tariffed interstate switched access rates as set forth in CenturyLink Operating Companies Tariff F C C No 11 when applicable based on the schedule shown above 1 Calculation and Application of Percent VoIP Usage Factors a The Comp
405. scenie erer sata ucpauans tees Sa E E a 35 Testing SErvViCes esor eran aeina ae SEE E e EA EATE Ee AIEEE E EE aR S 8 Rates Arid Charges ccsccetjelanetaa nade onsi iga a a EENETI 24 M Material moved to Index Page 1 M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES In this section normal business hours are from Monday through Friday 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m Hours before 8 00 a m and after 5 00 p m Monday through Friday and all day Saturday are considered overtime Sundays and Holidays are premium time 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING Additional Engineering will be provided by the Company at the request of the customer only when A customer requests additional technical information after the Company has already provided the technical information normally included on the Design Layout Report DLR as set forth in 6 1 4 preceding The Company will notify the customer that additional engineering charges as set forth in 13 4 following will apply before any additional engineering is undertaken ADDITIONAL LABOR Additional labor is that labor requested by the customer and agreed to by the Company as set forth in 13 2 1 and 13 2 2 following The Company will notify the customer that additional labor charges as set forth in 13 4 following will
406. set forth in Section 13 following T 6 2 6 2 8 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 56 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Cont d 800 DATA BASE ACCESS SERVICE General Description 800 Data Base 800 DB Access Service is an originating service utilizing Trunkside Switched Access Service which provides for the forwarding of end user dialed 8XX NXX XXXX calls to a customer based on the dialed 8XX number 800 DB Access Service must be ordered to all end offices in a LATA and provisioned at a minimum to all access tandems and operator switches equipped as SSPs within a LATA If the customer is utilizing another carrier s facilities to meet the LATA wide minimum requirement the customer must provide a letter signed by the access customer ordering the 800 DB Access Service and the partnering carrier indicating LATA wide coverage In addition the provision of 800 DB Access Service requires the customer s direct access to the Service Management System 800 SMS 800 or as an alternative the provision of such service by a Responsible Organization in accordance with the Guidelines for 800 Data Base When an 8XX call is originated by an end user the Company will perform the customer identification function based on the dialed digits to determine the customer location to which the call is to be
407. sgiving and Christmas The Company will provide alternate completion routes for terminating calls where facilities exist The Company will work cooperatively with the customer to jointly plan in advance of peak day s the use of controls for the purpose of enhancing call completions A The customer must notify the Company 60 days in advance of the peak day The customer must have existing direct trunks between the customer s premises and the end office s designated by the Company as tandems for Peak Day Rerouting The Company will provide the customer a list of end offices and NXXs that may be used for each Peak Day The customer must also have existing direct trunks between the customer s premises and the terminating end office C The Company will work cooperatively with the customer to jointly plan implementation procedures including activation and deactivation time frames A single point of contact in the Network Management Centers for the customer and the Company shall be established during the implementation meeting D The Company will work cooperatively with the customer to negotiate testing procedures The Company and the customer shall mutually agree upon date time and notification procedures for testing E The customer shall remove or reduce the percentage of terminating traffic on the alternate route s immediately upon request by the Company on the actual Peak Day F All appropriate Switched Access usage rates and regulations
408. sh deposit for the period the deposit is held by the Company the customer will receive interest at the same percentage rate as that set forth in B 2 b 1 or in B 2 b 2 following whichever is lower The rate will be compounded daily for the number of days from the date the customer deposit is received by the Company to and including the date such deposit is credited to the customer s account or the date the deposit is refunded by the Company Should a deposit be credited to the customer s account as indicated above no interest will accrue on the deposit from the date such deposit is credit to the customer s account 2 4 2 4 1 B 1 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 37 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES PAYMENT OF RATES CHARGES AND DEPOSITS Cont d The Company shall bill on a current basis all charges incurred by and credits due to the customer under this Tariff attributable to services including but not limited to Maintenance of Service as set forth in 13 3 1 following established or discontinued during the preceding billing period In addition the Company shall bill in advance charges for all services to be provided during the ensuing billing period except for charges associated with service usage and for the Federal Government which will be billed in arrears The bill day i e the
409. sion multiplexing For example the customer has the option of ordering a DS1 to Voice Grade multiplexer for a DS1 Entrance Facility at the SWC when Voice Grade DTT is requested to an end office DS3 to DS1 DS3 to DS1 multiplexing is an arrangement which converts a DS3 channel to twenty eight DS1 channels utilizing time division multiplexing The twenty eight channels may be further multiplexed utilizing DS1 to Voice Grade multiplexing equipment EF and DTT multiplexing equipment is provided at no charge by the Company at a location determined by the Company as part of its overall network design when the following conditions exist e a DIT at a DSI level is requested from a SWC to an access tandem in conjunction with TST from an access tandem to subtending end offices or e a DS1 DTT facility terminates in an end office except when Lineside and Trunkside Access are combined on the same facility If the customer chooses to order multiplexing equipment at a location other than the location determined by the Company the customer will be assessed EF and DTT multiplexing rates and charges as set forth in 6 8 following T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 28 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 4 22 2003 Effective 6 3 2003 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A 4 e Cont d EF and DTT multiplexing arrangements are required and the customer will be assessed multiplexing r
410. srsssseee 22 Service Date Chanie oss ceva yialtavnlnansategahaunsngeedaet gas E aE eae E ESE 13 Shared Use Pacts a a a a a E a a Aa sosbes NT 25 Special Constr CtiON seeroete aree e e e e R Eies 2 Standard Intervals she s su boncasierve ce lathes at ewcek a dain oeheteeacee a eas 11 D 5 1 5 1 1 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES GENERAL This section sets forth the regulations and order related charges for Access Orders for Switched Access Service These charges are in addition to other applicable charges as set forth in other sections of this Tariff An Access Order is an order to provide the customer with Switched Access Service It is also used to provide changes to existing services ORDERING CONDITIONS The customer shall provide all information necessary for the Company to provide and bill for the requested service In addition to the order information required in 5 2 following the customer must also provide e Customer name and premises address es e Billing name and address when different from customer name and address e Customer contact name s and telephone number s for the following provisioning activities order negotiation order confirmation interactive design installation and billing The Company will establish a Service Date Due Date when the customer
411. ss may also be tested When the Switched Transport is provided with Interface Groups 6 or 9 the Company will at the customer s request mutually negotiate at the time of installation the use of the customer s 108 type test line capabilities to conduct digital testing on 56 kbps 64 kbps and 64 kbps Clear Channel service ORDERING OPTIONS AND CONDITIONS Switched Access Service is ordered under the Access Order provisions set forth in Section 5 preceding Also included in that section are other charges which may be associated with ordering Switched Access Service e g Cancellation Charges etc 6 2 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 32 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE Switched Access Service is provided in different serving arrangements The provision of each type of Switched Access Service requires transport facilities Entrance Facilities DTT facilities and TST facilities multiplexing equipment and the appropriate Local Switching functions In addition WATS Access Lines may at the option of the customer be provided for use with Switched Access Service Transmission types i e Al B B1 and C have been identified for the provision of Switched Access Services The transmission types are dependent on the Interface Group and the routing of the service i e whether the service is
412. ss tandem The Exchange Telephone Company that owns the access tandem will accept the order The Exchange Telephone Company that owns the end office s that subtend the access tandem will bill the customer 2 Upon agreement between the Exchange Telephone Companies involved a single bill will be rendered to the customer The Exchange Telephone Company rendering the bill is the Exchange Telephone Company as determined in 1 preceding There are three single bill alternatives that the Exchange Telephone Companies may agree to provide and are described following There are payment options with Alternatives No 1 and 2 In the first payment option the Exchange Telephone Companies can require the customer to remit payment via a single check to the bill rendering Exchange Telephone Company In the second payment option the Exchange Telephone Companies can require the customer to remit payment via multiple checks to all of the Exchange Telephone Companies jointly provisioning the Access Service to the customer a Alternative No 1 1 The Exchange Telephone Company that will render the single bill will separately identify the rates and charges of each Exchange Telephone Company involved The billing Exchange Telephone Company will maintain and administer in its billing system the applicable rates and charges for all of the involved Exchange Telephone Companies The Exchange Telephone Companies not rendering the single bill will provide the interpr
413. ss tandem and is requesting DTT to an end office see exception described in 6 following a rearrangement charge as set forth in 6 8 1 following is assessed if the following conditions are met If the conditions are not met nonrecurring charges as described in 1 2 or 3 preceding may apply as determined by the customer s access service request e The rearrangement charge is assessed in association with the Interface Group 1 2 6 or 9 and is applied per trunk in each direct routed access trunk group The first trunk in the direct routed access trunk group is charged the first trunk charge and each additional trunk is charged the each additional trunk charge M Material moved from Page 102 M1 Material moved to Page 104 T M T a T M T C C T T T T T M1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 104 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 1 DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C 5 Cont d The same customer premises service type and Interface Group category are maintained with the exception of a change in Interface Group category and service type as set forth in 6 7 4 and 6 7 5 following If the quantity of trunks changing to direct routed access exceeds the number of trunks disconnecting from the Company access tandem full nonrecurring in
414. sscuaisenssscasseaien cs aegeaasasuseacseel jodees seabed a eR EE i anert Hunt Group Arrangement ics52h lt 2sssejencruscagceassecyaacisyadeeutniessendaeantenevsnceesen Hunt Group Arrangement for Use With WATS Access Lines 04 Identification and Rating of VoIP PSTN Traffic Immediate Dial Pulse Address Signaling cee eeeeeecseneeeseeeeceteeeeeneeeees Improved Two Wire Voice Transmission Specifications eee Information and Billing Services ce ceececeeseeceseeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenteeeees Installation and Termination of Services ceeeesseesseceeeeeseeesceesaeeneeeees Interexchange Carrier SUDSCTIpPtiON e ee eeeececeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeneeeceeeeeneeeees Interference or LMpairiMeMbeasacs csavec siaees sesvuuassectncytin ss yesaetogodeveencdeancdaned teas N Jurisdictional Report Requirements eeeccecesececeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeteeeesteeeees EVAL Yo hterana aae e ion Cet iae i ria Eae ee as Limitation of Use of Metallic Facilities 0 0 0 ceeceeeeceecesneeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeees imitati oN S eeen e e A EAE dae ar e Sle AEEA rian Gens Local Information Delivery Services cceesceceesceesseeeceeeeeceeeeeceteeeeseeeee Local SWITCHING ossining ieus E EERO ETET M itenance OF SELVICE aaj vastinssiaga cy nleascatuusotded tens a e aE i Maintenance Of Services sissscaisssaveseissssesagwasc r ai a ES Ma ual Sched led Testing snrnid ieee e i Measuring Access
415. ssscscccccessuseaseecesess GENER AL ORGS OE ESR EERE DEFINITIONS o ccccsssseececccccescesssscecceccessuseneeseeeess SHARED USE REGULATIONS ccsseeccccseececeeeeess DS1 AND DS3 PLTS WITH SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE SWITCHED DS3 FACILITY WITH CCSAC SERVICE SECTION 1 Page 4 Release 2 Effective 11 30 2000 45 54 55 55 56 91 91 93 T T N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 5 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont d PAGE SECTION 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE 3 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION oicccccccccccssssssceccccceccssessescccccesssseneesecesceseeaees 3 2 TTIMITA TIONS 33 si3 Socdagiweettecconced edt tha EA EEA 3 2 1 EXCLUSIONS 2 eccsitsskc seis E AE OE EEE E 1 3 2 2 ACCESS GROUPS Sieen onon e a aa a a ona a a aoada 1 3 2 3 WATS ACCESS ENES n aaa a aa a a a age de 2 3 3 UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY ccssssssceccccccsessssssesccesceeeenenenss 2 3 3 1 PROVISION OF SERVICE ccssssescsccccccccessssscscceccessssesssescecceseeenes 2 3 3 2 INTERSTATE AND INTRASTATE USE cccscsceccccccccssssessececceceeenes 2 3 4 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER ccccccccccssesesseccccceceueesessscescesseeees 2 3 4 1 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE REQUIREMENT ccccccccccccssessseeseeees 2 3 4 2 SUWPER VISION E EAE A E E hd Soveeaused Sede 2 3 5 DETERMINATION OF USAGE
416. ssseseesceseeeees 13 20 6 TESTING REQUIREMENTS cccscsseccccccccccssssescsccecsceessseesesccssseesuneneess 15 20 6 1 CCSAC ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS sssseeesseceeeees 15 20 6 2 LIDB ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS ssssessecesceceeeees 15 20 6 3 CCSAC ADDITIONAL COOPERATIVE ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS ccssessscsccccccesssssescsccccccesssssesescceseseees 16 20 6 4 LIDB ADDITIONAL COOPERATIVE ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS ccssessscsccccccssssssscsccecceesesseesescceseseees 16 20 7 SERVICE APPLICATIONS c cccccccccsssssscscccccccessesesescccscesssssueeecescesesaees 17 20 7 1 COATT SET U Bihar selec cat ts tanss EA E E sities lt bond ae unc EA 17 20 7 2 FOREIGN DATABASE QUERIEG csssessssccesececeseesscseceseceeeeeessnaees 17 20 7 3 LINE INFORMATION DATA BASE SERVICE LIDB c 00008 18 20 8 RATES AND CHARGES o ccccccsssessececccccccssssessceccsscsssesscsesscesesesuaeeenss 19 T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 13 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 1 14 2004 Effective 5 11 2004 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 3 SUBJECT INDEX SUBJECT SECTION Acc ptance Testno ernieren a e a i i 6 Access Order Modifications seeeeseeeseseesseseresressereresressessrssrenseesresresseeee 5 Access Order Service Date Intervals eeeseseseeesseeeseereesessresrersesrrerreeseese 5 ACCESS OG ie sectis eel Hacisee Watndteden Wuarnindes diene
417. ssued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS B 3 b Cont d For existing customers who provide a quarterly report and the report is not received by the Company in time for the Company to program the revised LATA level PIU factor for EF and DTT facilities in the LATA the Company will assume the EF and DTT PIU factors to be the same as those provided in the last quarterly report and follow the steps as set forth in C following Customers who choose to provide a projected LATA level PIU factor for EF and DTT facilities shall supply a percentage in a whole number i e a number 0 100 by LATA The PIU factor is used by the Company to determine interstate and intrastate rates and charges The PIU factor is applied to all rate elements associated with EF and DTT facilities This PIU factor is in addition to the PIU factors as set forth in 1 and 2 preceding Customers may request to change from a quarterly customer provided LATA level PIU factor to a Company developed LATA level PIU factor for their EF and DTT facilities in the LATA The customer must notify the Company by certified U S Mail return receipt requested no later than fourteen 14 days after the first of January April July and October in order for the Company developed LATA level PIU factor as set forth in a preceding to serve as the basis for the next three months advance bil
418. stallation charges will apply for the additional trunks Customers may specify a change in traffic type and direction i e one way to two way at the time the order is received Customers may specify a change in optional features except Switched Transport multiplexing at the time the order is received If the optional feature has a separate nonrecurring charge that nonrecurring charge will apply in addition to the rearrangement charge Requests for a rearrangement from MF to SS7 Out of Band Signaling must be received on a separate access order All trunks will be rearranged into 24 trunks within a direct routed access trunk group The order to disconnect the tandem route and to connect the end office DTT shall be placed at the same time The disconnect date of the tandem route order may be negotiated with the Company not to exceed 30 days from the connect date of the end office DTT order with the exception of a change in service type as set forth in 6 7 5 following Customer specified rearrangement requests will be cooperatively negotiated with the customer and are subject to the availability of Company switching equipment and other existing facilities M Material moved from Page 103 T M T T T M T T T T T D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 105 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE R
419. t Corporation calling card number when call attempt activity exceeds the Company s designated usage threshold level over a given period of time All Qwest Corporation calling card call attempts are monitored against the Company s designated usage thresholds These thresholds are based upon classes of service and generate warning messages to identify potential calling card fraudulent activity The Company will monitor and deactivate Qwest Corporation calling card numbers seven 7 days a week twenty four 24 hours a day Qwest Corporation calling cards determined by the Company as being fraudulently used and or reported to the Company as lost or stolen will be deactivated within two hours from the time the fraud was determined and or reported The Company will provide to LIDB customers upon request the Billing Name and Address BNA information related to a Qwest Corporation calling card when LIDB call attempt activity for a specific account exceeds the Company s designated fraud control threshold level BNA information provided to a LIDB customer is to be used exclusively for resolving the fraud investigation case and for billing the calling party for telecommunications services and collecting the amount due Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 13 State of South Dakota Release 3 Issued 12 15 2008 Effective 2 10 2009 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIRE
420. t d B Transmission Type B Performance Transmission Type B performance is provided with the following IAL for FGA Service 1 Loss Deviation The maximum Loss Deviation of the 1004 Hz loss relative to the Expected Measured Loss EML at 1004 Hz dB is 2 5 dB 2 Attenuation Distortion The maximum Attenuation Distortion in the 404 to 2804 Hz frequency band relative to loss at 1004 Hz is 2 0 dB to 4 0 dB 3 C Message Noise The maximum C Message Noise for the transmission path at the IAL miles listed is less than or equal to IAL MILEAGE LIMITS C MESSAGE NOISE Less than 50 35 dBrncO 51 to 100 37 dBrncO 101 to 200 40 dBrncO 201 to 400 43 dBrncO 401 to 1000 45 dBrncO T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 82 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 4 TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS 6 4 1 STANDARD TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS B Transmission Type B Performance Cont d 4 C Notched Noise The maximum C Notched Noise measured with 16 dBm0 holding tone applied is less than or equal to 47 dBrnc0 5 Echo Control Echo Control is specified in dB as impedance balance at 4 wire interfaces for FGA Service Echo Control is expressed as Echo Return Loss ERL and Singing Return Loss SRL and is measured at the POT to First Point of Switching FPOS Both the low band and high band tests must meet the S
421. t is described in 6 7 11 following When a FGA switching arrangement for an individual customer a single line or entire hunt group is discontinued at an end office an intercept announcement is provided This arrangement provides for a limited period of time an announcement that the service associated with the number dialed has been disconnected Use of certain optional features available in B following may result in additional usage charges For example if a customer orders Three Way Calling additional Switched Access Service usage rates could apply if the customer establishes two calls N N T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 36 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 1 FEATURE GROUP A FGA Cont d B Optional Features 1 Switched Transport Optional Features Supervisory Signaling Customer Specified Entry Switch Receive Level 2 Common Switching Optional Features Call Denial Service Code Denial Hunt Group Arrangement Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement Nonhunting Number for Use with Hunt Group Arrangement or Uniform Call Distribution Arrangement WATS Access Service InterLATA Toll Denial Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 37 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SW
422. t of traffic it will generate to and or from each end office subtending the access tandem to assist the Company in its own efforts to project further facility requirements In addition the customer shall also specify for terminating only access whether the trunks are to be arranged in trunk group arrangements or provided as single trunks The traffic type must also be specified using the same categories as described in 6 1 1 following to enable efficient provisioning and billing functions T T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 8 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER A Switched Access Service Cont d 5 For 900 Access Service the customer shall order the service in accordance with T the preceding provisions as set forth in 1 2 and 4 preceding and the manner in which the service is to be provisioned i e Feature Group D except that customers may request DTT to only those offices designated by the Company as T 900 Access Service screening offices Additionally when new NXX s are to be opened in a LATA or when existing NXX s are to be deleted and such change is to occur coincident with the Service Date established for the order the customer shall provide such information when placing the order for the service The customer shall notify the Company of all NXX code activity act
423. tched Access Service facilities lines or trunks will be treated as a new Access Order for the increased amount only Service Date Change Access Order Service Dates for the installation of new services or rearrangements of existing services may be changed but the new Service Date may not exceed the original Service Date by more than 30 business days When for any reason the customer wishes to change the Service Date the customer should notify the Company before the original Service Date to request a different Service Date If the customer requested Service Date is more than 30 business days after the original Service Date the order will be cancelled by the Company and reissued with the appropriate cancellation charges applied unless the customer indicates that billing for the service is to commence as set forth in 5 2 3 following C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 5 Page 14 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 5 ORDERING OPTIONS FOR ACCESS SERVICES 5 2 ACCESS ORDER 5 2 2 ACCESS ORDER MODIFICATIONS A Service Date Change Cont d A new Service Date may be established that is prior to the original Standard or Negotiated Interval Service Date if the Company determines it can accommodate the customer s request without delaying Service Dates for orders of other customers If the Service Date is changed to an earlier date the customer will be notified by the Company
424. ted to that information which the Company uses in the course of performing its normal business operations Additionally the Company will make updated information available on a semi annual basis B Information Content and Format The historical and projected data will be provided on a per end office basis and will consist of the following information Number of residential lines Number of business lines e Average use per line Unless otherwise requested the data will be provided in machine readable format C Availability of Data The Company will update the data semi annually and provide the data to the requesting IC within 30 days of the receipt of the request D Charges for Data The charge to the customer for such data will be developed on an individual case basis and will include only those incremental costs incurred by the Company in responding to the individual data request Incremental costs include but are not limited to costs associated with the provision of data in a non standard format as well as costs associated with responding to other individualized treatment requested by the customer Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 94 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 6 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER In addition to the obligations of the customer set forth in Section 2 preceding the customer has certain specific obligations pe
425. tes e paces a a aaie 15 T N D D T 20 1 A 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 4 Issued 12 15 2008 Effective 2 10 2009 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Company s Common Channel Signaling Network CCSN is a digital data network carrying signaling information that interfaces with the Company s voice data network for services using the American National Standards Institute ANSI CCS7 signaling protocol Common Channel Signaling Access Capability CCSAC Common Channel Signaling Access Capability CCSAC allows a customer to connect with the Company s SS7 network CCSAC is used in conjunction with other SS7 based features and services CCSAC provides the means for transmitting SS7 out of band signaling information via Switched Access CCS Links between the customer s Signaling Point of Interface SPOI and the Company s Signal Transfer Point STP or Facility Signaling Point of Interconnection FSPOI The STP provides translations and routing functions for SS7 signaling messages received from the Company s network signaling points and the SS7 networks of other entities There are two types of signaling messages ISDN User Part ISUP messages are used for call set up establishing and closing transmission paths for voice and data calls over the public switched network Transaction Capabilities Application Part TC
426. tes specifies billing on a per message basis or any other basis Except for lost or damaged records the recorded detail will be available to the customer a minimum of five business days after the date all the details requested by the customer was processed by the Company When recorded and assembled and edited message detail is provided to a customer the message detail is entered on a magnetic tape or data transmitted for provisioning to a customer The tape charge per tape or data transmission charge per record will apply When Selective Processing is ordered a recurring charge ICB for daily processing may apply A development charge ICB for the design programming and testing required to satisfy the customer s request may also apply Contracts are required for each customer subscribing to Billing Name and Address BNA will not be provided unless a contract is signed between the Company and the customer The Company will accommodate BNA requests in either of two ways mechanized and or manual The mechanized method accepts requests on an input tape or a transmitted data file in standardized format from the customer The manual method accepts requests from the customer by telephone to a Company designated office and or by paper via datafax or U S mail With both the manual and mechanized methods the customer has several options of receiving BNA data The customer may elect tape transmitted data files and or paper For tape a
427. th Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES C 4 Cont d When Switched Access Service is rearranged to FGD with SS7 Out of Band Signaling the customer will be charged a Service Order Rearrangement charge and Trunk Rearrangement charges The Service Order Rearrangement charge is assessed per access order per Interface Group The SS7 Trunk Rearrangement charge is applied per trunk in each SS7 Out of Band Signaling trunk group The first trunk in the SS7 Out of Band Signaling trunk group will be charged the first trunk charge and each additional trunk in the same group will be charged the each additional trunk charge Service Order and Trunk Rearrangement charges are sensitive to whether the transmission one way or two way is changing These charges are set forth in 6 8 following The description and application of rates and charges when rearranging FGD Service to SS7 Out of Band Signaling and Clear Channel Capability are set forth in J following Rearrangement of FGB or FGD Trunks from a Company Access Tandem Route to a Direct Route When the customer requests the rearrangement of existing FGB or FGD trunks from a Company access tandem route to an end office direct route charges are determined as set forth following When the customer has the DTT rating option between the SWC of the customer s premises and the acce
428. th in 6 3 following and CCSAC Service as set forth in Section 20 following T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 49 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 4 FEATURE GROUP D FGD A Description Cont d 5 FGD switching when used in the terminating direction may be used to access valid NXX codes in the LATA community information services of an information service provider and other customers services by dialing the appropriate codes when such services can be reached using valid NXX codes When directly routed to an end office via DTT only those valid NXX codes served by that end office may be accessed When routed through an access tandem only those valid NXX codes served by end offices subtending the access tandem may be accessed Terminating FGD with tandem routing may also at the option of the customer access valid NXX codes served by end offices in which originating FGD is not available Rating of this optional service is as set forth in 6 7 1 following Additionally non access charges will also be billed for calls from a FGD trunk to another customer s service in accordance with that customer s applicable service rates when the Company performs the billing function for that customer Calls in the terminating direction will not be completed to 101XXXX 950 XXXX
429. the customer request to have work performed which involves the change of an existing Voice Grade facility onto a multiplexed DS1 facility or existing DS1 facility onto a multiplexed DS3 facility and all of the following conditions are met a rollover charge will apply see exception below to the lower speed facility as specified in 6 8 following e The facilities are provided between the same customer locations as the original facilities and e All rollovers are performed at the same Company Central Office location and e All facilities involved in the rollover are provided by the Company T D 6 7 6 7 1 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 108 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES Cont d Application of Premium and Transitional Rates The specific application of premium and transitional rates for a specific customer is dependent upon the type of service and the availability of equal access capabilities in the end office to which the service is provided The following rules 1 through 4 provide the basis for applying the premium and transitional usage rates for Local Switching Interconnection Charge and Carrier Common Line Premium rates apply to all FGC and FGD access minutes to all FGA and FGB access minutes that originate from or terminate at end offices e
430. the date specified in the thirty 30 days notice and the customer s noncompliance continues nothing contained herein shall preclude the Company s right to refuse additional applications for service to the noncomplying customer without further notice Unless the provisions of 2 2 1 B or 2 5 following apply if a customer fails to comply with 2 1 6 preceding or 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 4 or 13 3 7 following including any payments to be made by it on the dates and times herein specified the Company may on thirty 30 days written notice by Certified U S Mail to the person designated by that customer to receive such notices of noncompliance discontinue the provision of the services to the noncomplying customer at any time thereafter In the case of such discontinuance all applicable charges including termination charges shall become due If the Company does not discontinue the provision of the services involved on the date specified in the thirty 30 days notice and the customer s noncompliance continues nothing contained herein shall preclude the Company s right to discontinue the provision of the services to the noncomplying customer without further notice 2 1 2 1 8 C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 8 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS UNDERTAKING OF THE COMPANY REFUSAL AND DISCONTINUANCE OF SERVICES Cont d When Access Service
431. the terminating direction may be used to access valid NXX codes in the LATA community information services of an information provider and other customer s services by dialing the appropriate codes when the services can be reached using valid NXX codes When FGC is directly routed to an end office via DTT only those valid NXX codes served by that end office may be accessed When FGC is routed through an access tandem only those valid NXX codes served by end offices subtending the access tandem may be accessed Additionally non access charges will also be billed for calls from a FGC trunk to another customer s service in accordance with that customer s applicable service rates when the Company performs the billing function for that customer Calls in the terminating direction will not be completed to 101XXXX 950 XXXX access codes local operator assistance 0 and 0 and service codes 611 and 911 FGC may not be switched in the terminating direction to another Trunkside Switched Access Service 8 The Company will establish a trunk group or groups for the customer at end office switches or access tandem switches where FGC switching is provided When required by technical limitations a separate trunk group will be established for each type of FGC switching arrangement provided Different types of FGC or other switching arrangements may be combined in a single trunk group at the option of the Company T T T T C T T
432. the transmission path between the customer s premises and the end office when directly routed to the end office Voice band data Transmission Type DA1 parameter limits are provided for the transmission path between the customer s premises and the access tandem and between the access tandem and the end office Voice band data transmission parameter limits are delineated in Technical Reference GR 334 CORE T T T C C T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 55 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 4 FEATURE GROUP D FGD Cont d D Testing Capabilities FGD is provided in the terminating direction where equipment is available with seven digit access to balance 100 type test line milliwatt 102 type test line nonsynchronous or synchronous test line automatic transmission measuring 105 type test line data transmission 107 type test line loop around test line short circuit test line and open circuit test line and non inverting digital loopback 108 type test line In addition to the tests described in 6 1 5 preceding which are included with the installation of service Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing Automatic Scheduled Testing Cooperative Scheduled Testing Manual Scheduled Testing and Nonscheduled Testing are available for FGD as
433. thereof USMO 43 68 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USM2 26 68 e Premium Time per technician 1 First 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USMP 48 21 Each additional 1 2 hour or fraction thereof USM3 31 21 1 A call out of a Company employee at a time not consecutive with the employee s scheduled work period is subject to a minimum charge of four 4 hours Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 34 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE Cont d C Access Service Billing Information Additional Options of the Customer s Monthly Bill and or CSR RATE 1 Nonchargeable Additional Options e On line Billing Service 2 Chargeable Additional Options e Paper Each bill and or each CSR request 19 53 per page 0 01 e Microfiche Each bill set and or each CSR set request 39 67 per microfiche sheet 0 25 e Magnetic Tape Reel each reel request 39 88 e Magnetic Tape Cartridge each cartridge request 25 99 e Floppy Diskette each bill set and or each CSR set request 23 87 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 35 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARG
434. tification Number s Billed Number Screening indicators Class of Service Information related to billing LIDB usage All customer information e g calling number and called number received from the LIDB customer is used only for the purposes of billing each LIDB access and validation query and or to assist the Company in toll fraud detection 20 5 20 5 2 B 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 20 Page 12 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 20 COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING NETWORK CCSN ORDERING SERVICE PROVISIONING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SERVICE PROVISIONING LIDB Service Provisioning Cont d The Company s LIDB contains a record for all working line numbers active Qwest Corporation calling card data line numbers which contain billed number screening restrictions pay telephone line numbers and vacant and active Billed Number Groups These records are updated on a routine basis and an immediate basis as described following Routine Updates The Company will update LIDB on a daily basis for service order processing changes e g new service disconnects moves modifications cancellations and nonpayment of an account Immediate Updates The Company has procedures to update LIDB as requested by customers These updates are processed the same day as requested by customers The Company has procedures to deactivate i e automatically and manually a Qwes
435. tiline hunt groups or trunk groups will have Carrier Common Line Access rates applied as set forth in 3 8 5 following in accordance with the resale rate regulations set forth in 3 6 4 following For purposes of administering this provision e Resold interstate terminating MTS and or MTS type service s shall include collect calls third number calls and credit card calls where the reseller pays the underlying carrier s service charges and shall not include intrastate minutes of use e Resold interstate originating MTS and or MTS type service s shall not include collect third number credit card or intrastate minutes of use CUSTOMER OBLIGATIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S When the customer is reselling MTS and or MTS type service as set forth in 3 6 1 preceding the customer will be charged Carrier Common Line Access rates in accordance with the resale rate regulations as set forth in 3 6 4 following if the customer or the provider of the MTS service furnishes documentation of the MTS usage and or the customer furnishes documentation of the MTS type usage Such documentation supplied by the customer shall be supplied each month and shall identify the involved resold MTS and or MTS type service s The monthly period used to determine the minutes of use for resold MTS and or MTS type service s shall be the most recent monthly period for which the customer has received a bill for such resold service s This
436. ting is being utilized to a RSS or RSM via a host office the shared port rate is assessed to the access minutes originating or terminating from that RSS or RSM and is not assessed at the host office If the customer has requested direct routing from the SWC to a RSS or RSM via a host office the End Office Shared Port rate is assessed to the access minutes originating or terminating from the RSS or RSM This rate is in addition to the End Office Dedicated Trunk Port rate assessed for the dedicated trunk terminating in the host office as described below The port charge is not assessed to FGA or DA traffic N M Material moved to Page 30 1 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 30 1 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 5 31 2013 Effective 7 2 2013 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES B Local Switching Cont d 5 End Office Dedicated Trunk Port N The End Office Dedicated Trunk Port rate provides for termination of a trunk to a dedicated trunk port in an end office The rate is assessed per month for each FG trunk in service excludes FGA directly routed via DTT between the SWC and the end office The rate is not assessed to trunks directly routed to a DA location N C Interconnection M The Interconnection Charge IC rate element is assessed to all customers who connect with the Company switched access network This charge is applied to originating intrastate Switch
437. tive controls applied by the Company result in the complete loss of service by the customer the customer will be granted a Credit Allowance for Service Interruption as set forth in 2 4 4 preceding DESIGN AND TRAFFIC ROUTING OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE When ordering Switched Access Service the customer shall specify on the order for service the Entrance Facility direct routing or tandem routing the number of lines or trunks and the desired directionality i e one way two way When the customer orders facilities routing directionality or optional features different from that determined to be available by the Company the Company will work cooperatively with the customer in determining an acceptable configuration based on available facilities equipment and Company routing plans Rates and charges for Switched Transport as set forth in 6 8 following will be applied based on the transport provisioned at the time the order is completed For example if direct routing to the end office is requested but facilities are not available and the customer accepts tandem routing the rates for the tandem routing configuration shall apply until such time that direct routing to the end office is provided T C C C C 6 5 6 5 3 6 5 4 6 5 5 6 5 6 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 89 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE OBLIGA
438. tomer designated premises are connected by facilities that permit a call to flow from access groups to resold MTS and or MTS type service s Indirect terminating connections are those arrangements where the access groups and resold terminating MTS and or MTS type service s are physically located at different customer designated premises in the same exchange Such different customer designated premises are connected by facilities that permit a call to flow from resold terminating MTS and or MTS type service s to access groups T 3 6 3 6 4 D Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 3 Page 9 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 3 CARRIER COMMON LINE ACCESS SERVICE RESOLD MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S RATE REGULATIONS CONCERNING THE RESALE OF MTS AND OR MTS TYPE SERVICE S Cont d Access Groups The adjustments as set forth here will be computed separately for each access group The access minutes which will be subject to Carrier Common Line Access rates will be the adjusted originating interstate access minutes plus the adjusted terminating interstate access minutes for such access groups The adjusted originating access minutes will be the originating intrastate access minutes less the reported resold originating MTS and or MTS type service minutes of use as set forth in A 1 preceding but not less than zero The adjusted terminating access minutes will be the terminati
439. ty believes to be correct The arbitrator in deciding may adopt the PIU factor of either party or may adopt a PIU factor different from those proposed by the parties If the arbitrator adopts a PIU factor proposed by one of the parties the other party whose PIU factor was not adopted shall pay all costs of the arbitration If the arbitrator adopts a PIU factor higher than the PIU factors proposed by both parties then the party proposing the lower PIU factor shall pay all costs of the arbitration If the arbitrator adopts a PIU factor lower than the PIU factor proposed by both parties then the party proposing the higher PIU factor shall pay all costs of the arbitration If the arbitrator adopts a PIU factor which falls between the two factors proposed by the parties then the parties shall each pay one half of the arbitration costs Absent written notification within the timeframe as set forth preceding audit results cannot be contested and the Company will adjust the customer s PIU factor based upon the audit results as set forth in C preceding Application of PIU When the Access Service is not available in the intrastate jurisdiction the PIU factor must be one hundred percent 100 T T N N Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 33 1 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 06 12 2012 Effective 07 13 2012 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPOR
440. ue For terminating calls over FGC to 800 800 type service usage measurement begins when the terminating FGC entry switch receives answer supervision from the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating 800 Service end user has answered The measurement of terminating call usage over FGC to 800 800 type service ends when the terminating FGC entry switch receives an on hook supervisory signal from the terminating end user s end office indicating the terminating end user has disconnected or from the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 130 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 7 RATE REGULATIONS 6 7 7 MEASURING ACCESS MINUTES Cont d D Feature Group D Usage Measurement 1 Originating Usage Measurement a Multifrequency Signaling e For originating calls over FGD usage measurement begins when the originating FGD entry switch receives the first wink supervisory signal forwarded from the customer s POT e The measurement of originating call usage over FGD ends when the originating FGD entry switch receives disconnect supervision from either the originating end user s end office indicating the originating end user has disconnected or the customer s POT whichever is recognized first by the entry switch b SS7 Out of Band Sig
441. umber CPN Material moved to Page 18 N N M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 18 State of South Dakota Release 5 Issued 10 31 2008 Effective 7 14 2009 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS 2 3 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CUSTOMER 2 3 10 JURISDICTIONAL REPORT REQUIREMENTS A Jurisdictional Determinant Cont d For purposes of CCSAC ISUP Call Set up requests Percent Other Messages POM shall be established by dividing the customer CCSAC ISUP Call Set up requests originating and terminating associated with local EAS intraMTA the Local Exchange Company portion of jointly provided Switched Access and Company originated toll by the total number of CCSAC ISUP Call Set up requests originating and terminating and expressing the result as a percentage in a whole number When mixed interstate and intrastate access service is provided on the same Access Service transmission path all charges between interstate and intrastate are prorated as set forth in 2 3 12 following A floor of 7 will be set for a switched access customer s Feature Group D terminating access minutes when they are lacking originating number information needed to determine jurisdiction The 7 floor will be applied as follows e When the percentage of terminating traffic without sufficient call detail to determine jurisdiction does not exceed the 7 floor the Company will apply the PIU factor as set forth in B 2 c following or e When the perce
442. unked Transport Facility and Multiplexer that is inoperative The credit allowance s for an interruption or for a series of interruptions shall not exceed a any applicable monthly rates or b the assumed minutes of use charge for the service interrupted in any one monthly billing period Service interruptions for Specialized Service or Arrangements provided under the provisions of Section 12 following shall be administered in the same manner as those set forth in this section 2 4 4 unless other regulations are specified with the individual case filing D T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 2 Page 42 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 2 GENERAL REGULATIONS PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS AND CREDIT ALLOWANCES CREDIT ALLOWANCE FOR SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS Cont d C When Credit Allowances Do Not Apply No credit allowance will be made for Interruptions caused by the negligence of the customer Interruptions of a service due to the failure of equipment or systems provided by the customer or others Interruptions of a service during any period in which the Company is not afforded access to the premises where the service is terminated Interruptions of a service when the customer has released that service to the Company for maintenance purposes to make rearrangements or for the implementation of an order for a change in the service during the time that was negotiat
443. unkside services If tandem routing is desired the customer must specify the type of DTT facility Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 to be utilized from the SWC to the access tandem and the Company will determine the type of facilities i e common transport to the subtending end offices Tandem routing is not available for Lineside Switched Access Service If direct routing is requested the customer shall specify the type of DTT facility Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 to be utilized from the SWC to the end office There are three types of facilities Voice Grade DS1 or DS3 available to the customer for Entrance Facilities and DTT facilities for Switched Access Service Following is a brief description of each type of facility Each type has its own characteristics and is available with EF and DTT multiplexing options as set forth in 4 following a Voice Grade Facility Voice Grade facilities are available for Entrance Facilities and for DTT facilities A Voice Grade facility is an electrical communications path which provides voice frequency transmission in the nominal frequency range of 300 to 3000 Hz and may be terminated two wire or four wire Compatible Interface Groups are described in 3 following DS1 Facility DS1 facilities are available for Entrance Facilities and for DTT facilities A DS1 facility is capable of transmitting electrical signals at a nominal 1 544 Mbps with the capability to channelize up to 24 voice frequency transmission
444. unseen a e E a EESE E 23 Manual Scheduled Testing s i sisijesscssdseacst cnsccesssvceaastassceesasnsed va ueseaataneaeaccvsns 10 Rates and Charos srid snie ie nia e i tees S timate ends 29 Miscellaneous Services lt 3 scitececaeetsudaces vacated eri nenir a eiie S aS 2 RAGES and Charges csige tecr riestro en ec ee ioei E ean 23 Nonsched led Vesting snis miito a e e a feo wtheos 11 Rates and Charges asi icitssveissayeeaieid geaetaswapadealwbeadcvanneadeashaviasasvacaleusnbenbensss 31 M Material moved from Index Page 2 T M Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Index Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 3 20 2001 Effective 4 21 2001 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES SUBJECT PAGE Obligations OF The Customer 5 iccsacie sedessscssaastcesdcadpassscaescadedatasessaaevanedeavese 11 Other Labor 56 koe cs tae RE ora ah as E adam read 1 Rates And Charges sneno EE E EEA E Ea T 22 Peak Day Reroute tasin a a E a a aS 18 Primary Access Service Billing Copy s sssssssssesssesssssessseesseessereseressseesseese 12 Provision Of Access Service Billing Information 10 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 12 Rates And Charges si cissisisaidededasssasuas tinsedaadtacestdecsdunecets a idea snscea eaes 34 Rates And Charges lt 2 0sssissivaciuvsavelsisepesdoassascava a a spesaanaseesnetease 20 Telecommunications Service Priority TSP System 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeteeeees 15 Rates And arses
445. up SECTION 6 Page 153 Release 1 Effective 9 15 2000 FID ARTG ARTG Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 154 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING B Common Switching Optional Features Cont d FID 15 Trunk Access Limitation Arrangement available with FGC and FGD per end office CHOK 16 Band Advance for use with WATS Access Service available with FGA FGB FGC and FGD per hunt or trunk group BAAD 17 Panel Call Indicator Address Signaling available with FGC per trunk group 1 ADS PC1 18 End Office End User Line Screening for use with WATS Access Service available with FGC and FGD per line BAND 19 Hunt Group for use with WATS Access Service available with FGA FGB FGC and FGD per hunt group HML HTG 20 Uniform Call Distribution for use with WATS Access Service available with FGA FGB FGC and FGD per hunt group HTY UD 21 Nonhunting Number for use with Hunt Group or Uniform Call Distribution for use with WATS Access Service available with FGA FGB FGC and FGD per line NHN 1 Available with existing services only Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 155 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 8 RATES AND CHARGES 6 8 2 LOCAL SWITCHING B Common Switching Opti
446. up 1 is not provided in association with Trunkside Access when the first point of switching is an access tandem In addition Interface Group 1 is not provided in association with Trunkside Access when the first point of switching provides only four wire terminations Interface Group 2 Interface Group 2 provides four wire voice frequency transmission at the customer s premises Interface Group 6 Interface Group 6 provides DS1 level digital transmission at the customer s premises Interface Group 9 Interface Group 9 provides DS3 level digital transmission at the customer s premises T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 20 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 1 GENERAL 6 1 2 RATE CATEGORIES A 3 Cont d e Available Premises Interface Codes The following matrix lists the NCI codes available for each Interface Group with additional information defining the availability of each offering The provision of some NCI codes generally requires placement of the Company equipment at the customer s premises These codes are denoted with a footnote designator 1 COMPANY INTERFACE SWITCH NCI SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE GROUP SUPERVISORY CODE FGA FGB FGC FGD 1 LO 2LS2 X LO 2LS3 X GO 2GS2 X GO 2GS3 X RV EA EB EC 4EA3 E 1 RV EA EB EC 4EA3 M 1 RV EA EB EC 6EB3 E 1 RV EA EB EC 6EB3 M 1 KK S lt OX OX KK XX OX
447. ur 4 Return Loss Tests on one trunk for a year The charges will be computed as follows 6 x 0 07 0 42 6 x 0 07 042 4 x 0 26 _1 04 1 88 per month per trunk Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 29 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B Testing Services Cont d 4 Manual Scheduled Testing MST The three 3 tests as set forth in a following represent the minimum offering i e an order for testing must at a minimum consist of four 4 1004 Hz Loss Tests per transmission path four 4 C Message Noise Tests per transmission path and one 1 Return Loss Balance Test per transmission path per year The Additional Tests as set forth in b following may be ordered by the customer at additional charges 60 days prior to the start of the customer prescribed schedule The customer also may specify a more frequent schedule of tests 60 days prior to the start of the customer prescribed schedule a Basic Tests 1 MONTHLY TO FIRST POINT OF SWITCHING USOC RATE e 1004 Hz Loss Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBMX 0 14 e C Message Noise Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBMX 0 14 e Return Loss Balance Tests performed
448. ures are described in 2 following POTS Translation The POTS Translation vertical feature provides the option of having the ten digit POTS number i e NPA NXX XXXX delivered instead of the 8XX dialed number i e 8XX NXX XXXX delivered to the service provider If the POTS Translation feature is requested through the Responsible Organization the service provider will be unable to determine that such calls originated as 1 8XX NXX XXXX dialed calls unless the service provider also orders through the Company the Automatic Number Identification ANI optional feature as described in 6 3 1 following ANI information digit 24 indicates that the call originated as an 8XX dialed call is delivered when the ANI optional feature is ordered A POTS Translation Charge as described in 6 7 1 following is assessed to the service provider for each 8XX call delivered T T T T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 58 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 8 800 DATA BASE ACCESS SERVICE B Vertical Features Cont d 2 Call Handling and Destination Features Call Handling and Destination Features allow service subscribers variable routing options by specifying a single carrier multiple carriers Exchange and or Interexchange Carriers single termination or multiple ter
449. use of end office or access tandem switch trunk equipment The switch trunk equipment is provided with wink start start pulsing signals and answer and disconnect supervisory signaling FGB switching is provided with multifrequency MF address signaling in both the originating and terminating directions Address signals and address information required by the customer must be provided by the customer s end user using inband tone signaling techniques Such inband tone address signals will not be regenerated by the Company and will be subject to the ordinary transmission capabilities of the Switched Transport provided T T C C T T Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 40 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 PROVISION AND DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE 6 2 2 FEATURE GROUP B FGB A Description Cont d 6 The access code for non 8XX FGB Access Service switching is a uniform access code The form of the uniform access code is 950 XXXX or 1 950 XXXX for carriers These uniform access codes will be the assigned access numbers of all non 8XX FGB Switched Access Service provided to the customer by the Company No access code is required for FGB switching used to provide 800 DB Access Service The telephone number dialed by the customer s end users is of the form 1 8XX NXX XXXX 7 FGB switching when used in the terminating
450. ut of Band Signaling T T T T T 6 4 Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 78 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS Each Switched Access Service transmission path is provided with standard transmission parameter limits The standard for a particular transmission path is dependent on the Switched Access Service Interface Group and whether the service is directly routed to an end office or routed to the access tandem utilizing tandem switching functions The available transmission parameter limits are set forth in 6 4 1 following Data transmission parameter limits are also provided with each Switched Access Service transmission path The Company will upon notification by the customer that the data transmission parameter limits set forth in 6 4 2 following are not being met conduct tests independently or in cooperation with the customer and take any necessary action to ensure that the data parameters are met The Company will maintain existing transmission parameter limits on functioning service configurations installed prior to the effective date of this Tariff except that service configurations having performance specifications exceeding the standards listed in this provision will be maintained at performance levels specified in this Tariff The transmission parameter limits contained in this section
451. uting available are described in 1 through 3 following When Alternate Traffic Routing is added subsequent to initial service installation service rearrangement charges are determined as set forth in 6 7 1 following Multiple Customer Premises Alternate Routing Without MPTS This option provides the capability of directing originating traffic from an end office or appropriately equipped access tandem via a trunk group the high usage group to a customer designated premises until that group is fully loaded and then delivering additional originating traffic the overflowing traffic from the same end office or access tandem to a different trunk group via one or more intermediate high usage groups to different customer designated premises until the originating traffic is directed to a final trunk group The customer shall specify the last trunk CCS desired for the high usage group and each intermediate group s It is provided in suitably equipped end office or access tandem switches and is available with FGB FGC and FGD Multiple Customer Premises Alternate Routing with MPTS This option provides the capability of directing originating traffic from an end office via a direct trunk group the high usage group and deliver originating traffic the overflowing traffic from the same end office through the tandem to a tandem routed trunk group the final group to a customer designated POT The tandem trunk group must be routed to the
452. vided on an individual case basis Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Index Page 1 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 3 20 2001 Effective 4 21 2001 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES SUBJECT PAGE 900 Service Access Restriction s c 12she ssdctssasieaeiassdaateaestaaeardedeneeaeuataastacese 19 Rates and CHar cess ineen e n uae a E wai E Caa 37 Additional Access Service Billing Options sssssessssssssssesssssseseseseesseessreso 13 Additional Cooperative Acceptance Testing seeeseseesssesssssseseseressseessree 9 Rates and Charges cuse vsaceesaess ienie pita aad eave tdes o E EAS a 24 Additional Engineering s lt iazcscissecccasesesedaces vaceceasecesanatoenaneesdbenedeadesadageovereceien 1 Rates ANG Charges cosimetmeci satay orereta taay ses iE Eaa E eate 20 Additional LADO sosesisnssisnusnn ainn inaianei nsi aas 1 Rates amd CO ares cuteness e e a ee gies i E 21 Automatic Scheduled Testing 3 5 scis0sesecagvaceivslecesicnapenacdiendeecensvavaswesonsbceaye 9 Rat es and CALS jacsersnahassanadinenselestaazaaatiyaeategheed e a E ra RES 25 Cooperative Scheduled Testing s sssessssessssssesseeessseesseessersseesseeessseessees 10 Rates and Charges sinnopi eteinen E soeeddeawenaledonteceentes 27 Interexchange Carrier Subscription ssssessseseessesessseessressressereseresseeessrese 3 Maintenance of Service eicinaite eit sinsa s EES 2 Rates and Char Ges rostesc
453. witched Access Service on a per facility and or per trunk basis it is the customer s responsibility to assure that sufficient access services have been ordered to handle its traffic 6 7 6 7 1 A Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 6 Page 96 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 6 SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE RATE REGULATIONS This section contains the specific regulations governing the rates and charges that apply for Switched Access Service DESCRIPTION AND APPLICATION OF RATES AND CHARGES There are three types of rates and charges that apply to Switched Access Service These are monthly recurring rates usage rates and nonrecurring charges These rates and charges are applied differently to the various rate elements as set forth in C and D following Monthly Rates Monthly rates are flat recurring rates that apply each month or fraction thereof that a specific rate element is provided For billing purposes each month is considered to have 30 days Usage Rates Usage rates are rates that apply only when a specific rate element is used These are applied on a per access minute a per call or per query basis Usage rates are accumulated over a monthly period Nonrecurring Charges Nonrecurring charges are one time charges that apply for specific work activity i e installation or change to an existing service The types of nonrecurring charges that apply for Switched
454. within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBMX 0 50 1 Subject to a one year minimum contract period and annually thereafter Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 30 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B 4 Cont d b Additional Tests MONTHLY TO FIRST POINT OF SWITCHING USOC RATE e Gain Slope Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBMX 0 13 e C Notched Noise Tests performed within a one year period per test ordered per transmission path UBMX 0 13 c Example See 3 c preceding Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 13 Page 31 State of South Dakota Release 1 Issued 9 14 2000 Effective 9 15 2000 13 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING ADDITIONAL LABOR AND MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES 13 4 RATES AND CHARGES 13 4 3 CHARGES FOR MISCELLANEOUS SERVICE B Testing Services Cont d 5 Nonscheduled Testing NST a Automatic Testing MONTHLY To FIRST POINT OF SWITCHING USOC RATE e 1004 Hz Loss per test performed USCX 0 45 e C Message Noise per test performed USCX 0 45 e Return Loss Balance per test performed USCX 0 66 e Gain Slope per test performed USCX 0 45 e C Notched Noise per test performed USCX 0 45 Qwest Corporati
455. y Qwest Corporation d b a CenturyLink QC whether under that name or the trade or brand name CenturyLink are subject to the terms and conditions of this Tariff The provision of such services by the Company as set forth in this Tariff does not constitute a joint undertaking with the customer for the furnishing of any service The provision of such service by the Company as set forth in this Tariff is specifically intended to provide exchange network access to customers as follows e Providers of interexchange service that furnish service between Local Calling Areas must purchase services from this Tariff for their use in furnishing their authorized intrastate telecommunications services to end user customers and for operational purposes directly related to the furnishing of such services e Any customer including but not limited to Telecommunications Companies and or Interexchange Carriers may purchase certain services from this Tariff for their own or administrative use as specified in other sections of this Tariff Services provided for a customer s own or administrative use may be subject to the rates and charges of other tariffs of the Company C C C C Qwest Corporation Access Service Tariff SECTION 1 Page 2 State of South Dakota Release 2 Issued 10 16 2000 Effective 11 30 2000 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE SECTION 1 APPLICATION AND REFERENCE 1 1 APPLICATION OF TARIFF

Access Service Tariff

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents